39819
Site Admin
39819

Hippolyta the Great

PostJul 13, 2019#81

Hippolyta, Princess of the Amazons, was very unhappy.
 
She sat and watched the sun setting in the distant lands, across the Black Sea. Her eyes glanced at the wooden dummy that she had hacked to tiny pieces an hour ago. The sword was jabbed into the dirt and was blunted beyond repair. The cold air whipped at her muddy-blonde hair and made her rough-hewn skin even firmer. She was wearing a thick, fur-lined coat that was dyed bright yellow. The hood was tight around her head so her face appeared to poke out of the fluff with the tangle of curls that protruded from the garment billowing wildly. Yet her face was as still as stone.
 
The sun slowly descended and the sky turned bright pink. The clouds were stained orange as the light shone upon their bellies and the Black Sea was dark and sombre. Her mind was constantly diverted away from Otreriana, the Amazonian heartland, to the distant city of Troy, far, far to the south-west in Anatolia on the other side of the Black Sea. On her own side of the water expands the Western Steppe, though the Black Sea rests on the eastern block of said Western Steppe. She could see fires lit in the distance, across the great plains, where tribes of nomadic Scythians were camping. Even on the Black Sea, at this late hour, there were still those brave enough to sail. She reckoned some of those ships were military vessels belonging to the Hittite Empire, which lurked, like Troy, in Anatolia. The Amazons, however, never advanced in seafaring technology and raiding those ships from the air was difficult. Given they were a small target, it was easier for the sailors to defend their position with ranged weapons, like arrows or stones or even magic bolts, and their flying mounts more vulnerable.
 
A strong smell entered the air and invaded her nostrils. Hippolyta coughed a little as the pervading scent was so strong. It was like someone had taken a garden full of white lilies and set them all on fire. Smoky but fragrant. In most women, the smell was an aphrodisiac that would tingle and tickle the lust centre of the brain. While Hippolyta wasn’t immune to this, on her there was the uncommon side affect of instantly making her feel hungry. She growled to herself before she spoke out.
 
Hippolyta: “Go away, mammi.”
 
The feminine voice from behind Hippolyta tutted with disappointed at being so rudely dismissed.
 
Nakia ibn-bint Ismat ibn-bint Chadi al-Almasi was a si’la of sixty years, which was mid-life for her kind. She, like all si’la, had a hypersexualised female visage that looked like she had come straight from the cover of a 1990’s comic book. Incredibly fit and lean with extremely wide hips and ridiculously oversized breasts. Hippolyta had often wondered what Nakia had looked like when she was a child and always imagined she had been an ugly, shrivelled mutant before she adapted her body into this appealing shape. The si’la were shapeshifters of sorts but their bodies usually adapted slowly to match the sexual appetites of their lovers. The most striking changes would occur almost instantly – hair colour and length, for example. The subtle details, however, which were specific to each individual would alter over years. The Nakia that stood over Hippolyta now looked very different than the si’la she remembered a decade ago.
 
Hippolyta didn’t look up at her.
 
Hippolyta: “You’re blocking my view.”
 
Nakia: “You used to like viewing me more than sunsets!”
 
Hippolyta: “I grew up.”
 
Nakia: “No. You were tainted. By foreign thinking.”
 
Hippolyta: “Wow! I see the body of a si’la but it’s Bremusa’s words that come spewing forth. How uncanny! What does she want?”
 
Nakia: “She just wanted me to talk to you…”
 
Hippolyta: “And so, what do you want, mammi?”
 
Nakia knelt down so she was level with Hippolyta. Her large, brown eyes gleamed unnaturally amidst her well-tanned face. Her hair was actually golden and glittered as the wind blew through it, rather than the drab blonde of Hippolyta’s own head. She was wearing warmer clothes against the cold, just like the Amazons had to, but she still kept a sheer cut in her cloth to reveal that crevice that attracted so many of the girls in town. Even Hippolyta caught herself staring. She couldn’t deny that her mammi was still a very beautiful sight to behold. Yet, this was not unusual amongst Amazonian culture. The appreciation of physical form was common, even sexual admiration, but that wasn’t a cue for a sexual liaison and Hippolyta held no thoughts of an intimate connection with her step-parent, or any other woman in the city. Her sex was tied to her heart and her heart rested far away.
 
Nakia: “I want my strawberry to be happy again.”
 
Nakia pulled a mock sad face that was very endearing. The si’la’s appearance had adapted not only to the desires of Queen Molpadia, Hippolyta’s mother, but also to the queen’s closest relations, including Hippolyta herself. As a teenager, Hippolyta had been jealous of her mother’s sexual partner. Partly she fancied the woman herself, but she also saw the arrival of Nakia as giving credence to Hippolyta’s bullies – Hippolyta’s birth was unnatural. Ares might be a god, but he was a man. Only Nakia’s persistence on getting Hippolyta to like her warmed the girl’s heart to the si’la and when Nakia brought forth her first daughter, Hippolyta was won over. As her sister, Pentheseleia, and the third princess later, Antiope, learnt to talk, they addressed Molpadia as mum and Nakia as mammi. Soon enough Hippolyta was embedded into the family and Nakia was her mammi too.
 
Hippolyta: “I’ll never be happy again, mammi.”
 
Nakia: “That’s just silly.”
 
Hippolyta: “Do you know how old my baby is now?”
 
Nakia: “Eight.”
 
Hippolyta blinked with some surprise.
 
Nakia: “What? You think I wouldn’t remember the birth of my strawberry pie’s baby?”
 
She reached out and cupped Hippolyta’s cheek. She felt the heat from the si’la radiate into her own skin. A si’la wasn’t able to use magic, but they were, nonetheless, partially made up of it, which gave them their shapeshifting powers. Hippolyta sometimes wondered what Nakia might look like if she now left them and lived elsewhere. She could come back as a man with a rough beard, piercing eyes, a wise brow, a… she stopped fantasising and came back to see the real Nakia again.
 
Hippolyta: “It’s not fair. I’m being punished for what? For being who I really am. I can’t help it. I was born this way.”
 
Nakia: “Or they infected you with the straights!”
 
Hippolyta rolled her eyes.
 
Hippolyta: “Hello Bremusa. You’re back.”
 
Nakia shuffled to get sit comfortably beside Hippolyta. As she moved, the cotton phallus on her trousers glared up at Hippolyta and she had to avert her gaze. When the si’la living among the Amazons had achieved the great victory of impregnating a warrior, they would sew a phallus to the front of their trousers. The fact that Molpadia was pregnant with her fourth child, third by Nakia, was a huge source of pride of Nakia and she had made her phallus extra large to show just how proud she was. To Hippolyta, however, it was embarrassing. When she had been a girl, it seemed normal. But so long spent with the Trojans had changed how she saw things, she had to admit, and now an exposed phallus was just a reminder of the real thing.
 
When Nakia had gotten her bottom on the ground beside Hippolyta, she snuggled up to her and cuddled to share the warmth. Or rather, share her warmth with Hippolyta, which the princess accepted as a very thoughtful and kind gesture.
 
Nakia: “Let me ask you something, strawberry pie, do you think Piyama-Radu was a terrible father to those adopted boys?”
 
Hippolyta: “No!”
 
Nakia: “Do you think he would be a bad father to Creusa?”
 
Hippolyta: “No, he’ll be great!”
 
Nakia: “Then you have no need to worry.”
 
Hippolyta was silent to this. It was true, but it didn’t make her feel better.
 
Nakia: “What you feel is selfish.”
 
Hippolyta: “What!?”
 
Nakia: “You know she’s safe. She has a good father. She will be taken care of, educated and well fed. I’m sure she’ll be a prized pig before long with all that quality food available in Troy, right?”
 
Hippolyta: “So my wanting to be with her is selfish because it’s just want I want, not what’s good for her?”
 
Nakia: “Exactly. And who knows, maybe you will get to see her again one day? When she’s old enough to make decisions for herself, maybe she could come to live with us?”
 
Hippolyta: “Nobody would be happy about that! They barely accept me and I’m once-straight. She’s twice-straight. To most people, she’s a demon child. An embarrassment to Amazon kind.”
 
Nakia: “They’ll come around if she proves herself. Just like you did. I remember you beating up all the other girls, including your best friend!”
 
Hippolyta: “Former best friend.”
 
Nakia: “She cares for you, Lyta.”
 
Hippolyta: “She shouldn’t have left Creusa behind. It wasn’t her choice to make.”
 
Nakia: “You said it yourself, Creusa wouldn’t be treated so well here as she is in Troy.”
 
Hippolyta: “That’s not the point! Bremusa had no right--! I’m not arguing with you, mammi.”
 
Nakia: “Good! Because I’m always right!” She snaked her arm around Hippolyta’s shoulders. “Even when I’m wrong.”
 
Hippolyta: “I would have thought you, at least, would be more open to my… nature. You change. You could be a man or a woman. The idea that it’s natural for everyone to be one certain way is just… just dumb.”
 
Nakia: “You’re not wrong, Lyta. But sometimes it doesn’t matter how right you are. Morals have very little to do with logic, Lyta. They are what everyone agrees they are. And everyone else agrees that straights are bad. That means you’re upsetting everyone. So… what’s more important to you? Being who you really are, or upsetting everyone?”
 
Hippolyta: “That’s not fair! I’m like a parrot. Saying the same thing over and over and nobody listens.”
 
Nakia: “So you think you know better than everyone else? You alone are the sole saviour of Amazonkind?”
 
Hippolyta: “Sine so many people think Justin Beiber is talents and Fifty Shades of Grey is a good book, yes I think I know better than the majority of people.”
 
Nakia: “I have no idea what either of those things are.”
 
Hippolyta: “I don’t think I do either, but I think it proves my point. Most people are dumb.”
 
Nakia: “Most Amazons think rape is bad. Are they wrong about that then?”
 
Hippolyta just rolled her eyes.
 
Hippolyta: “I’m not arguing with you, mammi, I told you. And now I’m even more annoyed than I was before your stupid penis-pants walked over here.”
 
Nakia: “Hey, my penis is very sensitive.”
 
Hippolyta looked at Nakia.
 
Nakia: “Yes, I realised what I said soon as I said it. I meant emotionally sensitive! I was trying to be funny, not sexy!”
 
Bremusa: “Lyta! Nakia!”
 
At the sound of Bremusa’s voice Hippolyta’s shoulders stiffened and her lips unconsciously curled into a grimace. Nakia, however, turned to look back at Bremusa. She recognised the panic on Bremusa’s timbre.
 
Nakia: “What is it?”
 
Bremusa stammered, which brought even the softened attention of Hippolyta.
 
Bremusa: “It-it’s the queen! She’s—giving birth!”
 
Nakia:Already!?”
 
Bremusa: “She-she—ah! It’s not good! You should come at once!”
 
Both Hippolyta and Nakia leapt to their feet and they were soon running in the wake of Bremusa, following the soldier through the streets of Otreriana. Amazons had no vehicles. They usually carted goods in crates that hung from the backs of several pegasi, tethered together. So the streets between buildings were very narrow, just enough for three people to stand shoulder-to-shoulder, but there were many drop-off points where the cargo would be placed. These wide areas were always the hotspots for shops to be placed, closest to these cargo areas. One exceptionally large cargo area was set before the longhouse, the royal quarters of Queen Molpadia. It was, as the name implies, a long building that was also two storeys tall. The ground floor was dedicated to public office, where the small governing body of the Amazons functioned. The first floor of the building were the royal chambers. The three of them ran up the exterior stairs to gain access.
 
When they reached the birthing room, Bremusa stationed herself outside while Nakia and Hippolyta went in.
 
They heard the screeching infant before they saw her. The doctor, a old woman with many years of battle experience still shown in her muscles, was holding the baby and cleaning her off. However there was a lot of blood, a lot more blood than Hippolyta remembered during her own birthing.
 
Hippolyta: “Mother? Mummy?”
 
Queen Molpadia: “I hear you, Lyta. Come here.”
 
She hurried to the bed and held her mother’s hand. She was so weak she couldn’t even see clearly. She was drenched with sweat and her eyes were wetted by tears. Hippolyta glanced back at the doctor, where Nakia was checking the baby.
 
Hippolyta: “What happened, mother? The baby seems fine. A girl, did they tell you?”
 
Molpadia smiled. For the first time in Hippolyta’s life, her mother seemed old. She had been a young mother when she had given birth to Hippolyta, so the age gap was shorter even than the gap between Hippolyta and her former lover, Priam, yet now the woman looked as though decades weighed upon her chest. She was, like her daughter, of typical Scythian stock – tall, strong, blonde, white and tapered eyes. However, she had been born with a defect that caused one of her eyes to appear blue. It had been seen as an auspicious sign and when she was crowned queen of the Amazons, it seemed to have been true. Now, to Hippolyta, that eye was staring wildly, unable to see her first-girl, and an ill omen.
 
Queen Molpadia: “You are queen now, Hippolyta. You will surely be tested by others, but I know your strength and determination. You will beat them and you will prove to them that you are queen. Do not fail me, Lyta. Do not be beaten!”
 
Hippolyta: “I-I won’t!”
 
Queen Molpadia: “That’s my warrior-princess! Daughter of War! Make the Great Steppe tremble beneath your boot, Lyta. Make the men of this world love and fear you! Take the Amazons to ever greater heights! You were born for this, Lyta. You’ll be stronger than I could ever dream to be!”
 
Hippolyta did everything to keep her tears back and she masked her face with stone.
 
Hippolyta: “I will!”
 
The queen then smiled, but it was aimed at the ceiling because she couldn’t see where Hippolyta was.
 
Queen Molpadia: “And if you want to fuck a man, you fuck a man! Don’t let them tell you what to do!”
 
Hippolyta laughed, but that small burst of emotion let loose the rest and tears came out of her eyes. She was glad, at that moment, her mother couldn’t see her blubbering. But then her mother’s eyes focused on something, something far away. Something not of this world.
 
Queen Molpadia: “You are Hippolyta the Great.”
 
Molpadia’s head flopped to the side and her eyes fell still. Her lips managed to keep going;
 
Queen Molpadia: “I love you, girl. Tell my granddaughter…”
 
The words were lost but Hippolyta nodded anyway.
 
Hippolyta: “I’ll tell her everything about you. She, and everyone, will sing your praises at every turn, mother!”
 
She lowered her head and rested her forehead into the crook of Molpadia’s neck.
 
Hippolyta: “Mummy…”
 
The crying sounds of Nakia filled the room. Amazons were conditioned to hold their emotions but the si’la were permitted to freely display their sorrow and Nakia did so in great wails and sobs. She crawled onto the bed and clutched her lover’s silent form. Her own face now back to stone, Hippolyta rose from the bed to let her mammi and mother time alone. She turned and led the doctor from the room, as well as the nurses, and there she took hold of the baby.
 
Doctor: “Melanippe.”
 
Hippolyta glanced up.
 
Doctor: “She managed to come up with the name before she died. Melanippe.”
 
Hippolyta nodded.
 
Hippolyta: “The daughters of Molpadia. We’ll be the mightiest Amazons to ever live, Mel. Mark these words.”

Apollo's Gift

PostJul 13, 2019#82

Hecuba: “What is wrong with the world, Priam?”
 
They were walking through the streets of Troy with their youngest child in Hecuba’s arms. She was the forth they had had and the second girl. Hector, the eldest, was already nine years old and growing to be a smart and responsible boy. Polyxena, the second child, was a strong-willed girl who aspired to be every bit as smart and capable as her older brother. Hecuba had had to stop her learning to swing a sword though, that was where Hecuba determined the roles of men and women were too radically different. The third child, Paris, was just one year older than the youngest, Cassandra. The first three had proven to be wonderkids. Perfect in every way. Cassandra, however, was something quite different. She couldn’t walk. She couldn’t talk. She could barely feed herself. By the age of four, Hecuba came to the conclusion that something was wrong with her daughter’s brain.
 
Hecuba: “I remember when Telamon returned with news of Achilles’ birth. That was a fine, fine day. Wonderful in fact. Since then… why has she stayed in Greece? I don’t understand! This connection to Hades the boy has, cannot be real can it? Making a deal with lord of the dead. Such an ill omen.”
 
Priam: “If Hades keeps our nephew safe, then we should not cast judgement…”
 
Hecuba: “And then that bitch—”
 
She caught herself.
 
Hecuba: “That Amazon… she becomes queen! As if she has any of the grace required to be queen! It speaks volumes of those savages if they allow such an animal to be their ruler!”
 
Priam’s face was pained. She felt guilty causing it, but she also relished in any opportunity to insult the woman who tried to steal her husband from her. As far as she was concerned, she had every right to.
 
Hecuba: “Since she became queen, those Amazons have become all the more barbaric. They’ve been raiding and looting the Hittite Empire something fierce!”
 
Priam lifted a finger.
 
Priam: “But not us.”
 
Hecuba: “No…”
 
They turned the street in a moment of silence.
 
Hecuba: “But it’s only a matter of time. They’re already raiding Greek settlements almost daily now. Telamon heard that they’re trying to learn to sail. Can’t believe they don’t have ships. Stupid savages.”
 
Priam: “You’re back on speaking terms with Telamon then?”
 
Hecuba: “Yes. Finally.”
 
Priam: “So there is some good news after all! See?”
 
Hecuba: “Six years of Queen Hippopotamus--!”
 
Priam: “You shouldn’t call her that.”
 
Hecuba: “And now the greatest hero of the world has been murdered! Murdered! By a girl, no less. Seduced by a harpy and murdered by poison! It’s unthinkable! What a cruel world this is! We should consider a day of mourning for Hercules, Priam. Perhaps once a year, the city can pay our respects to the man that was?”
 
Priam: “That’s a fine idea, my dear. Perhaps people will be inspired to be more like him if we honour him.”
 
Hecuba: “And now our child… my little baby girl is… I don’t understand how this could happen. She told me—Illythia told me—my children would all be blessed with greatness! How can my little Cassandra be… broken?”
 
Priam: “Let us see, Hecuba.”
 
Hecuba: “I don’t see why we can’t pray to Hera for help.”
 
Priam: “If one of the peasants asked for your favour and you granted it… then he comes back again and again for more favours, would you be happy?”
 
Hecuba: “I suppose not.”
 
Priam: “We don’t want to test our beloved Hera’s patience. I’m sure she is watching over you. If she was inclined to help, or able to help, I’m sure she would have done so. Better to seek out the aid of another. Apollo is god of healing. If our daughter’s brain is, indeed, broken, then perhaps he can help us.”
 
They reach the Shrine of Apollo in northern-most part of the city. Apollo was one of the lesser gods in Troy as his benefits were less important to the people than other gods. Poseidon was the most dominant of all due to the sea battering the walls and his images were carved into stone walls across the entire city. Hera, too, was extremely popular amongst the Trojans as was the previous wife of Zeus, Metis. Metis was the god of intellect, much like her daughter Athena came to be of wisdom, and this intellect was highly valued amongst the well-educated population of the city. With education came superior health, which meant less need of healing and few believed in the arts of prophecy. He was, however, one of the city’s founder-gods after the people departed the Hittite Empire and so a whole quarter of the district was named in his honour – the Apulian District. Though there was no large temple, the shrine was lovely and kept in a wide open space for everyone to view as they went by. His image was held aloft on a great many banners of honour and the entire district was largely used for entertainment and art.
 
The soldiers blocked off the shrine to allow the couple some privacy and they prayed to the god of healing. Priam invoked their past relationship as means of welcoming the god back to the city.
 
Unseen to the humans, Apollo watched them from his room on Mount Olympus.
 
His room was all white with pure gold furnishings. The tables, the chairs, even the bed and the bedsheets were all sparkling gold.
 
Artemis: “What will you do?”
 
Artemis was toying with one of her arrows in her hand as she watched her brother watch the humans. He glanced back at her.
 
Apollo: “They want my blessing.”
 
Artemis: “Well, yes. Are you strong enough to do it?”
 
Apollo was wearing just a loincloth, leaving his torso exposed. It was, however, wrapped in bandages. Earlier in the year he and Artemis had been with their brother, Orion, when he was struck by a poisoned arrow that caused him to go mad and attack Apollo – almost killing him. Artemis had been forced to slay their half-brother but Apollo was still sick from the wound he took. As it was dealt by a demi-god, the wound was no normal blow and it constantly returned to fester and imbue pain upon the unfortunate Apollo. Today, however, was one of his better days. He nodded at his sister.
 
Apollo: “I think I can do something for them.”
 
She came up beside him to watch as he stared intently at them. After a few minutes he nodded.
 
Apollo: “There. Done.”
 
Artemis frowned and looked side-long at him before looking at the humans. The baby didn’t do anything.
 
Artemis: “Uh… what did you actually do?”
 
Apollo: “I blessed the baby!”
 
The baby remained just as still and silent as before.
 
Artemis: “… exactly how did you bless the baby?”
 
Apollo: “Well, I looked at it and—”
 
Artemis: “I mean, what with. What is so blessed about the child now?”
 
Apollo: “Oh! I gave her future-sight! Isn’t that wonderful!? My old friend Priam will be super happy, I’m sure.”
 
Artemis facepalmed.
 
Artemis: “Apollo… they wanted you to make her sensible. Can’t you sense that the baby’s brain development is hindered? She clearly has learning disabilities.”
 
Apollo: “Ooooooooooooh! That’s why they asked me for help. I thought they just wanted something fun to play with.”
 
Artemis: “Babies aren’t for playing with.”
 
Apollo: “They’re not?”
 
Artemis: “No! I mean… you can play with babies but that’s not… you know how screwed up this child is now going to be? She has emotional and intellectual development issues and she now has the gift of prophecy. Powerful prophecy, I might add, since it came straight from you. She’s going to lose her bananas.”
 
Apollo: “Well, there are worse things you can lose!”
 
Artemis: “I didn’t mean literal bananas…”
 
Apollo: “Oh. Lucky she isn’t a koala!”
 
Artemis frowned.
 
Artemis: “You mean monkey.”
 
Apollo: “Is that the one with a beak and a flat tail?”
 
Artemis: “That’s a platypus.”
 
Apollo: “Can’t be! They’re mythological!”
 
Artemis: “They’re not--! We have mythological cre--! You know what? Nevermind. I will hunt a platypus and bring you one. What will do you about this mess you’ve made?”
 
Apollo: “What mess?”
 
Artemis: “The baby!”
 
Apollo: “What baby? A baby platypus? How do they eat bananas with those beaks?”
 
Artemis: “They don’t eat ban—the baby, brother! Priam and Hecuba’s baby!”
 
Apollo: “Yes! She can see the future, isn’t that great!?”
 
Artemis: “Oooooy… you’re probably too weak to be giving out more blessings anyway. You should come and lie down.”
 
She helped him lie down on his golden sheets and she checked his wound underneath the bandages. She nodded with grim foresight.
 
Artemis: “I suspected as much. Giving that blessing has opened the wound Orion gave you. Your friend Priam will just have to accept what you’ve done for him.”
 
Apollo: “Poor Orion…”
 
Artemis sat down and patted her brother.
 
Artemis: “Yeah, poor Orion. I heard Hades let him sit on the jury in the Underworld though! That sounds like fun!”
 
Apollo: “Coooooool! He’s, like, a lawyer!”
 
Artemis: “Well no…”
 
Apollo: “Monkeys are lawyers, right?”
 
Artemis: “Maybe that little girl will grow up just like you…”
 
Apollo: “Hey! Now that would be great! I can turn into a cat and visit her sometimes!”
 
Artemis: “Actually, that would be quite nice, I expect!”
 
Apollo: “Although, she doesn’t live underwater so that could be a problem.”
 
Artemis: “Cats don’t… why… by Zeus… why…?”
 
Apollo: “You think father likes cats too!?”

Aži Dahāka

PostJul 15, 2019#83

To the east of the Black Sea and south of the Great Steppe was the inland Caspian Sea. In the year 5300BC, Caspian tiger prowled along the southern-most beach, overlooked by the Elborz mountain range. The tiger spied a turtle that was clambering out of the inland sea and pounced on his newest meal of the day. He is suddenly startled, however, allowing the turtle to make its escape back into the salty water, as a tremendous boom shook the land. He stared off into the distance to see a dark cloud fill the sky and a thick, glutenous liquid blast into the sky.
 
Mount Damavand, the world’s only vril volcano, erupted.
 
The hot liquid was thrust into the air, where it sizzled against the aether. It slopped its way down the mountainside in a thick, gloopy torrent. Anything and everything in its path was engulfed and disintegrated into its atoms. Plants and animals alike were consumed.
 
Except one. One that was birthed by the mountain itself.
 
Mount Damavand seemed to give a great heave and from its open canal sprang a monstrous beast that had been gestating within its vrilian womb. The creature’s wings snapped open, all four of them, as it began to glide on the air, circling its home. The great dragon was ashen grey and its skin so tight that it appeared skeletal. Most notably was the absence of a stomach. Its rib bones were visible and wrapped like a cocoon where the stomach ought to have been, but within the ribs was empty air.
 
It plunged back down and opened its maw to gorge upon the hot vril. It slithered down the beast’s throat and nestled into its empty stomach. There the vril gathered up, kept in place by an invisible wall of aether, and gathered into a bright, blue pool. To test himself, the dragon let loose a great stream of vril straight into the air from his new reserve. It sprayed high, high in to the sky. The beast, satisfied, began to survey his new world.
 
His skin was grey flesh and not scaled, like many other dragons. His eyes were bright orbs of golden light and from the top of his head were ram-like horns that were twisted around and around into two fine points. Its long tail was jagged and pointed by extruding bones from within and his four, powerful legs were ended with long talons that cut into the very rock of the volcano.
 
In a very human-like motion, the dragon turned to crack the bones in his neck and twisted his long muzzle into a grim smile.
 
Aži Dahāka: “What destruction shall I sow upon this virgin land? What misery shall I cast upon sapient-kind?”
 
 
Over two-thousand years later and there was a small, very peculiar-looking, machine dangerously falling from the sky. The machine looked like a fat seagull with three heads, twenty legs and ten wings – because more is ‘cool’. However the machine was now popping springs, spilling fuel and ready to explode.
 
Zoroaster: “I wish you had warned me it wouldn’t last the whole trip, Imhotep!”
 
Imhotep: “I can’t predict when it’ll decay! They just… do!”
 
Zoroaster: “The closer to the ground we get, the better. At least then if we fall, we may just break out legs and not splatter…”
 
Imhotep: “Cheery thought.”
 
Zoroaster: “Just being practical! Come now, down we go!”
 
The flying-buggy drew closer and closer to the ground.
 
Zoroaster: “That’s it!”
 
Imhotep: “To be honest, it’s kind of headed that way anyway!”
 
The seagull gave one last cough of smoke and then it was in freefall. Imhotep lost his Egyptian-fashion hat and the orbs that follow Zoroaster were speeding after him like a series of children, frightened they’d be lost. The vehicle, being much heavier than either man, soon outpaced them to its imminent demise on the earth and the humans were left with nothing but air between their legs.
 
Zoroaster: “Well, that is why I have’ll have to truck with these new-fangled technologies all the kids are using!”
 
Imhotep closed his eyes, certain he was about to be dashed into a lot of tiny, iddy-biddy pieces, only to find himself being slowly lowered onto the sand. Zoroaster hooked his wand back onto his belt, along with the rest of them. Each wand had its own unique appearance and while most were made of wood there were a few made of other materials. A very simple wand, that appeared more like a pipe with a grip, was made of iron. Another delicate wand was made of glass, showing the core within its centre. Not every wand was showy. Some were made purely for practical use in certain scenarios. One wand was best used when conducting aether. Another when used specifically with the water element. Another was best used for conjuring and yet another was best for druidic magic in taming nature.
 
Imhotep: “Where are we anyway?”
 
Zoroaster: “You were driving! Weren’t you paying any attention to where you were going?”
 
Imhotep: “I was just following your directions!”
 
Zoroaster: “Such a lack of geographical knowledge from someone supposedly so talented? I suppose raw skill is no match for learned knowledge.”
 
Imhotep: “Am I being insulted? I think I’m being insulted…”
 
Zoroaster: “This is the far reaches of the Assyrian Empire, Imhotep.”
 
Imhotep: “You know, my name isn’t actually Imhotep—”
 
Zoroaster ignored him and carried on.
 
Zoroaster: “This is the Caspian Sea and there lie the Elborz mountains. And that lonely mountain in the centre is where I plan to build my lair!”
 
Imhotep: “Lair!?”
 
Zoroaster: “Yes? What?”
 
Imhotep: “Lair gives off a kind of villainous air…”
 
Zoroaster: “Honestly! Such silliness. Lair is a perfectly fine word.”
 
Imhotep: “What about base?”
 
Zoroaster: “B-B-base!? What do you take me for!?”
 
Imhotep: “A good guy?”
 
Zoroaster softened at that.
 
Zoroaster: “Yes, well. My domain…”
 
Imhotep: “Eeeeeeh…”
 
Imhotep, palm stretched out, waggled it back and forth.
 
Imhotep: “What about realm?”
 
Zoroaster: “I am no king!”
 
Imhotep: “Do you have to be a king to have a realm?”
 
Zoroaster: “Yes.”
 
Imhotep: “Oh…”
 
Zoroaster: “This will be my… my…”
 
He glanced at Imhotep.
 
Zoroaster: “Sanctum!”
 
Imhotep: “Oooooooo! Yeeeeeees! Very mystical!”
 
Zoroaster: “But first, we must overcome a blood-thirsty dragon.”
 
Imhotep: “Uh… what now?”
 
From the skies suddenly howled a terrible roar as a monstrous dragon with four wings plunged from the clouds. The creature came down before them and landed with such momentum that the ground shook and Imhotep almost tumbled over. Zoroaster perched his old legs for the crash and managed to maintain his ground.
 
Zoroaster: “Hear me, Aži Dahāka! Your reign of terror has come to an end!”
 
Aži Dahāka: “Is that so, little man?”
 
The beast leered over them with a nasty smirk. His teeth were yellowed and filled with the decay of corpses. He couldn’t eat anything except for vril but he chewed living creatures nonetheless. His voice was a deep bass that rattled the bones of the two men. As he glared, the luminescence of his eyes increased.
 
Zoroaster: “For too long has man allowed you to prey upon—where are you going!?”
 
Imhotep: “I am not going to get eaten by a dragon! Call me when it’s over!”
 
Zoroaster: “You blighter! Get back here!”
 
The dragon chuckled, his deep voice clucking.
 
Aži Dahāka: “How entertaining you both are. Come now, little man. Serve me. Entertain me. And I may let you live.”
 
Zoroaster: “Foul creature of—of---”
 
Aži Dahāka: “Of what?”
 
Zoroaster: “Give me a moment to think…”
 
Zoroaster stroked his long beard for a moment.
 
Zoroaster: “Aha! Foul creature of demonstrable calamity!”
 
Aži Dahāka: “Oh! Not bad!”
 
Zoroaster: “Yes, thank you. Now—”
 
Aži Dahāka: “Alas. Your fate is sealed.”
 
The dragon belched up vril from his gut. It poured from his mouth like blue magma, much like the Earth’s core from which Aži Dahāka had been spewed. The vril splashed on the ground where Zoroaster stood and coated everything in its sticky goop. The sizzling of organic material and aether blasted in the ears of Imhotep, who was hiding behind a rock.
 
Aži Dahāka: “I almost wish that could have lasted longer! Humans are such tiny morsels…”
 
Zoroaster: “If that is what you think of us, then you do not understand us at all.”
 
Aži Dahāka: “Now, now! What’s this!?”
 
The molten vril slopped down the sides of Zoroaster like oil. He shook himself and the last of the liquid magic trickled off of his person. One of the smaller orbs that floated around him had been glowing but now ceased with the threat extinguished.
 
Imhotep: “Wow! You’re alive! That was amazing!”
 
Zoroaster: “You mistake me for a conjurer of cheap tricks, Imhotep!”
 
Aži Dahāka: “But now, I shall not.”
 
The dragon’s mighty tail swung round with far more speed than most would expect of such a huge beast. But one of Zoroaster’s wands quickly snapped to his hand and a powerful wall of wind blasted back at the tail. Aži Dahāka grunted as he met the sudden wall of pressure. Rather than fight it, he turned his claws into weapons. He slashed with his long, sharp talons. Zoroaster turned his wand and creature a sudden blast of wind before him. This wasn’t enough to repel the strength of the beast, but it was enough to propel himself backwards several metres to avoid being skewered. He had no time to then react as another bout of vril was gushed upon him. The smaller orb reverberated and glowed with a sharp green hue as it shielded Zoroaster from the affects the liquid magic. The human stepped away from the puddle.
 
Aži Dahāka: “And how long can your little balls withstand this onslaught, I wonder?”
 
Zoroaster: “There’s no need to get so personal, Aži Dahāka!”
 
The dragon’s maw lunged at him and Zoroaster produced a sphere of wind, pushing outwards from his body. The massive teeth clamped down on the sphere, just inches from him. Slowly they pushed inwards.
 
Zoroaster whipped another wand from his belt with his free hand. It was extremely long and narrow, carved from the femur bone of Belshaggath – an ancient NeSorcerer long deceased. At its core was inserted the ancient marrow of another NeSorcerer. Within it lay so much potential and it was crafted for one very gruesome purpose. He aimed it straight inside the dragon’s mouth and unleashed its power. Blood suddenly gushed from the dragon’s mouth and the beast retracted with sudden horror. Blood vessels all inside his mouth were bursting open and his blood was spilling out and in. It mixed in with the vril inside his open stomach.
 
Aži Dahāka: “How dare you!!”
 
He spluttered through rivers of his own blood.
 
Zoroaster: “I do, indeed, dare.”
 
His wind-element wand snapped itself back to his belt and he took out yet another wand. This was carved from the most magical of wood – the wood of Yggdrasil itself and for its core was a strand of Thor’s hair. There was a screech and snap from the sky above and one of the clouds turned pitch black, like darkness. The bolt of lightning came down in a fork, with three deadly prongs. The lightning itself was the hottest of plasma, as though it came from the sun itself, and it blasted against the dragon’s flesh. A hole blasted upon Aži Dahāka’s side and he roared. Not with pain, but from shame. A creature as terrible as this, feels no pain.
 
Without any caution any longer, the dragon spewed vril upon Zoroaster and again his sphere acted in his defence. Aži Dahāka had been right, however. The spheres were not built to last forever but the dragon had feasted for centuries upon the liquid volcano of Mount Damavand. Then the dragon reached out and snatched Zoroaster while he was blinded by the vril. He soared up into the sky with the human in his claws and Zoroaster dropped the Bone Wand of Belshaggth.
 
Aži Dahāka: “Greater wizards than you have tried and failed! You believed some blood magic and bad weather would defeat me!? Me!?”
 
They went higher and higher and higher. The air grew colder and colder and colder. Zoroaster began to feel ice forming upon the dragon’s claws, but the vril within the beast kept him from freezing up entirely. Zoroaster himself used a simple magic spell, which he managed to mutter through the gale of wind, to heat himself up like a radiator. But then the atmosphere grew thin and the air was no longer cold – the was an absence of heat. He still had his wind element wand and managed to summon it to his hands, which were locked in place by the fingers of the monster. He snapped a shield of air all around him, like a miniature atmospheric bubble, that saved his air and his air pressure. Here in space, Zoroaster could see the planet curved around and sailing through space like a lonely ship of millions of people.
 
With his other hand he struggled to summon another wand. The more powerful the wand, the more effort it took to control it and now, trapped in space with a dragon, old Zoroaster was feeling depleted. But come it did. The wand was an elegant piece made of soft wenge from the African rosewood that was created by The White Goddess, carved and shaped by a renowned artisan in Cairo and combined with a slip of rock. The rock was from the very place at the wand was created to control the magical energies of.
Although there was no sound in space, Zoroaster felt as though Aži Dahāka was laughing. Cackling even.
 
The entire moon, however, then began to glow softly. Zoroaster jerked as Aži Dahāka stopped moving through space to spy the brightness of the large, white rocky world. Zoroaster focused and then, suddenly, a narrow ray of light blasted from the moon.
 
Had the ray breached the atmosphere of the Earth, travelled down through the layers of cloud, gases, microbes and aether then its potency would have diminished drastically by the time it reached the land. Out here, with nothing between it and the target, the moonblast was so strong and powerful that Aži Dahāka was knocked back miles and miles. Zoroaster was dropped and he was soon plummeting to Earth. Another of his orbs, one of the larger ones designed to protect him from heat, started to vibrate and glow as heat burnt up around him. He became a meteor, coming down to Earth.
 
Tired as he was, he managed to control his fall using the wind wand and he even managed a nice, soft landing, back in the Assyrian Empire and just a mile from where he had been formerly. A short march later and he rejoined Imhotep and they began to climb Mount Damavand, albeit slowly. Zoroaster was injured both physical, spiritually and magically. He realised he had actually been fortunate when Aži Dahāka dragged him into space. Anything less than the moonblast may not have dealt with the dragon so soundly. And yet, the beast was still out there. It wouldn’t be long before he could recuperate.
 
When they reached the edge of the forest, before the bare rock of the volcano took precedent, Zoroaster turned and took out another wand. This wand had been fashioned by the druids of Stonehenge, who were attuned and friendly with the Aes Sidhe of Albion. He used the wand to reach out to any Aes Sidhe that had moved into such distant lands from Brittannia. Soon there were dozens of various Aes Sidhe species willing to lend their aid to Zoroaster.
 
Imhotep: “What do we need them for?”
 
Zoroaster sat down wearily.
 
Zoroaster: “I thought you might need some help.”
 
Imhotep: “Me? Help with what?”
 
Zoroaster: “A prison…”
 
He rubbed his eyes. He was using aether to keep himself awake but sleep was snapping at his mind and his now weary body was eagerly engaging with that nagging sleep sense.
 
Zoroaster: “I do not know if a monster such as Aži Dahāka could ever truly be slain. The magic is too strong, his will to live too strong and the Narrative is strong too. But with these impossible machines that you make, perhaps you can create the impossible – a prison for the beast.”
 
Imhotep: “I can try, but you know Entropy works very quickly on my impossible inventions. It won’t be long before he is free!”
 
Zoroaster: “That is why we shall build it within his home. Within my new sanctum. Within Mount Damavand is an endless pool of vril that bubbles up from the planet’s core. If you craft it just right, the machine can be self-sustaining by using that endless supply of vril. Am I correct?”
 
Imhotep: “I think that could work! Is that… why you came for me? Why you chose me?”
 
Zoroaster: “Not at all! I didn’t choose you at all! I actually think something funny happened to time to make me arrive there… but no, I came up with this plan after I learn of your skills. You must live life ready to adapt at any moment. I have many possible plans, but only some of them will I ever be able to enact should the opportunities arise.”
 
Imhotep: “Very wise!”
 
Zoroaster: “Indeed. I suppose I am. You, however, have talent but no wisdom. This I intend to teach you. But for now, we need that talent.”
 
And so Imhotep designed a prison capable of holding the dreaded Aži Dahāka. As Zoroaster predicted, the dragon did return to Mount Damavand eventually. The beast required its eternal source of nourishment. The humans and the Aes Sidhe hid and lay in wait. The dragon entered his lair—
 
Imhotep: “See!? Evil word!”
 
Zoroaster: “Hush!”
 
--But he instantly sensed that something was amiss. Though he had grown arrogant in his age, he was now on edge since his defeat at the hands of Zoroaster. The interior of the volcano had a long ring of stone around the outside with the molten vril bubbling at the centre. Though the volcano had not erupted for over two-thousand years, it was still active.
 
The Aes Sidhe burst from hiding first and Zoroaster joined them in the attack. Though Aži Dahāka may once have laughed this off as a futile attempt, his wounded pride and injured body demanded a total victory of carnage. He slammed his jaws down upon the nearest bodies of the Aes Sidhe and they were ripped to shreds. Zoroaster tried to use shield spells to protect as many of them as he could, but the dragon was enraged. Zoroaster doubted he could have bested this beast had he shown this much ferocity in their initial encounter.
 
The dragon’s tail swung around and Zoroaster tried to repel it again with his wind wand but now the attack was too strong and Zoroaster was struck so hard that he was sent flying over the vril pool. He tumbled down and splashed into it. The small orb rattled like crazy as it sought to protect him from the liquid magic. He swam towards the edge of the pool but the rockface back to the circular ledge was too sheer.
 
Zoroaster: “I should definitely invest in a wand to control vril…”
 
He managed to get the Yggdrasil Wand out and held it aloft. He was losing the strength to swim and his orb was ready to rattle its last rattle. The bolt of plasma smashed down from the sky and struck the vril. An unusual affect happened next, which Zoroaster had expected. The bolt turned to stone as it his the magical liquid. The jagged rock spire was a much easier climb and he sought to reach the peak. He was still some space away from the ledge but he only needed to use the wind wand to fly himself over the gap to safety.
 
He reached the rock, with an air of self-congratulation, when he was suddenly slammed against the wall by the tail of Aži Dahāka. He felt his bones crunch as solid wall and tonnes of flesh met. When the tail removed itself, Zoroaster fell limply to the floor. He watched through bleary eyes as more Aes Sidhe were ripped to pieces in a shower of horrible gore. He partly wished he had never asked for their help in the fight, to spare their lives, but he knew the creature could never be locked up without their sacrifice.
 
Then, from within the vril pit, a great hand, as large as the dragon himself, reached out of the magic. Deep within it the impossible machine had opened a portal into the sun itself and from within the sun, the sun god, Helios reached out. He grasped the dragon, who fought with tooth and nail but the glowing plasma of the sun could not be harmed. The hand pulled down and submerged the body of the dragon, with the intent of pulling the beast all the way through. His wings, however, snagged on the walls of the volcano walls and lodged himself in place. The sun tugged but the colossal beast refused to budge. The grip of both titans remained in place and neither could be loosed. Aži Dahāka’s head and forearms were still free, but his lower half was trapped by Helios.
 
For months the dragon struggled but Imhotep and the Aes Sidhe worked on maintaining and sustaining the portal and Helios’ grasp of Aži Dahāka. They built ever more elaborate imprisonments; wards, magical chains, a collar and even barred the walls of the volcano itself like a cage. Eventually Aži Dahāka settled down and rather than rage at his captors, he belittled and threatened them. Many Aes Sidhe fled, having seen their brethren destroyed already. They were immortal magical beings and death was even more a grave consequence than it was for the mortal humans who knew and understood death. The idea that their friends were now gone seemed impossible to them and they did not want to be ‘gone’ too.
 
The entrapments were fuelled by the vril volcano itself and so while Entropy resumed its affect, the spells were constantly fed and recast by the vril. A new layer was built above Aži Dahāka, which was to be the sanctum of Zoroaster. Here he built his studio and began to teach Imhotep how to use magic itself, rather than use his impossible machines to utilise magic on his behalf. Whenever Imhotep had to practice his spells on something, Aži Dahāka made excellent target practice – though the dragon usually claimed the spells just tickled him, no matter how destructive they got. Other students also came to learn magic and soon there developed a clan of mages that lived in the mountain, above the dragon.
 
The dragon was forever awake and now, able to forever feed on the vril he bathed in, he never tired.
 
 
Zoroaster made regular trips out of his sanctum, but returned in 1250BC after joining Athena’s Eleven with the determination to finally finish Imhotep’s training. Imhotep was proving to be an impossible student as he was very ignorant of the world and the cosmos in general, but especially on the subject of magic. His over reliance on his impossible machines made him a difficult student to train because he often took the short cut. Zoroaster often wished he could take that innate ability away from Imhotep so he could learn properly.
 
Ultimately, having lost patience, Zoroaster sent Imhotep to student in Egypt under the new god of magic, Isis. Isis, in turn, had learn from Thoth and so Zoroaster hoped she could teach Imhotep. With a series of guest teachers too, Imhotep came back with a well-rounded education and, finally, some actual skill in magic. But most importantly he understood the need to learn. Zoroaster was finally able to teach his pupil in the Narrative and, after a few more years, was able to pass on the NeSpell to Imhotep.
 
With elation, Imhotep left the sanctum to explore the world and continue his education, while Zoroaster was left with his many other students. They had become known as the Shaheb-e-Dilan – “The Masters of the Heart” – as they trained to control their emotions by subjecting themselves to the vitriol of Aži Dahāka, who was more than happy to berate anyone that came into his lair below the sanctum. Many fled, never to return. Those that remained were men and women of inner peace and harmony.
 
And then, in the year 1198BC, a stranger came to Mount Damavand. He was an old acquaintance of Imhotep and went by the name of Aman Tabiz. He came with the unfortunate news – Imhotep had lost the title of NeSorcerer…

Wrath

PostJul 22, 2019#84

Zoroaster: “I’m surprised you travelled all this way just to relay this news to me. That’s very honourable of you.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “I didn’t.”
 
Zoroaster: “Ah.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “I heard this is called Sanctuary? I have need of such a place. I figure a place home to powerful mages must be well defended?”
 
Zoroaster: “I suppose… though we’re not some kind of army for you to hire, you understand?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “I don’t intend to do any such thing. I just need a… room. Somewhere I can store my possessions.”
 
Zoroaster: “Perhaps that could be arranged… but we are not a bank either.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “I will pay my way.”
 
Zoroaster: “We have no need of money directly, but if you were to make some donations in towns so that they could provide us with food and goods, I think we can accommodate you, Mr Tabiz.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “Consider it done. I will go to the towns directly. The Assyrian Empire has much in the way of trade.”
 
Zoroaster: “Yes, I know. One of the teachers here, Daveous, has an obsession with something called bubble gum. Please ensure some of your funds go in that direction.”
 
Without a further word, Aman Tabiz left the Sanctuary and headed to the town where he would begin trading and collecting the possessions he wanted stored at Sanctuary. And yet, in the bowls of Mount Damavand, beneath Zoroaster’s den, was the Gaol of Aži Dahāka and within it, the dark dragon stirred.
 
Aži Dahāka: “I do sense it. The corruption of this stranger.”
 
Voice: “Thus is the well that an immortal provides. Even minor corruptions will amount to a great evil given generations and generations to fester.”
 
Aži Dahāka: “And can you use this? The Shaheb-e-Dilan have purged themselves of corrupting emotions so they are of no use.”
 
Voice: “I can. Patience, fell dragon. Upon this immortal’s return, I shall draw upon his darkness and I shall bestow upon thee a portion of my power.”
 
Aži Dahāka: “So long as it is enough to break these bonds, Demon Lord.”
 
Voice: “It shall be, for I am Aeshma; the embodiment of wrath!”
 
 
Ancient Postal Service (APS) Guy: “Delivery for a Mister A-men… Tabits”
 
Zoroaster: “I believe it’s Aman Tabiz, dear fellow.”
 
APS Guy: “Yeah, that guy.”
 
Zoroaster: “You can leave it here. He’ll be back shortly, I expect.”
 
APS Guy: “You’ll need to sign for it.”
 
Zoroaster: “Very well.”
 
The Assyrian Empire hadn’t gotten Phoenician writing yet, so the APS Guy whipped out a large tablet and Zoroaster had to carve into it a symbol that looked like a donkey having sex with a whale. Though it could have been an eagle eating the carcass of a dancing hamster. Who could tell?
 
APS Guy: “Nice lair you got here, mister!”
 
Zoroaster: “Oh! And they tell me ‘lair’ is an evil-sounding word!”
 
APS Guy: “Oh? You’re not a supervillain then? I thought with all those rings, you had to be some kind of crime boss…”
 
Zoroaster: “No. No. These rings are artefacts!”
 
APS Guy: “Oh? Like them, eh, magical rings, am I right?”
 
Zoroaster: “Exactly!”
 
APS Guy: “And what do they do? Anything special?”
 
Zoroaster: “My dear fellow, they’re magical rings… of course they do something special!”
 
APS Guy: “Should be interesting!”
 
Zoroaster: “Well, this one is enchanted to wash dishes!”
 
APS Guy: “Oh…”
 
Zoroaster: “And this one will wash clothes.”
 
APS Guy: “Hmm…”
 
Zoroaster: “And this one dusts…”
 
APS Guy: “I think I get the picture…”
 
Zoroaster: “And this one—”
 
APS Guy: “They’re all for housework are they then?”
 
Zoroaster: “Well… most of them. All but one.”
 
APS Guy: “And what about that last one then?”
 
Zoroaster: “The most special of all!”
 
APS Guy: “I’m listening…”
 
Zoroaster: “It clips toenails! Aha!”
 
APS Guy: “Useful… I guess…”
 
Zoroaster: “Quite! I can spend my time doing more important things.”
 
APS Guy: “Well… I guess that’s true. I mean, I reckon the wife would love to have a few of them. But I was expecting a bit more… you know?”
 
Zoroaster: “A little more…? Pizzazz?”
 
APS Guy: “That’s the one!”
 
Zoroaster: “Well, that’s what wands are for! It would be pointless having wands and rings! Better to be a master of a few things rather than a novice of many. That’s what I always tell my students!”
 
APS Guy: “Want to tell me what your wands do?”
 
Zoroaster: “No.”
 
APS Guy: “Awww…”
 
Aman Tabiz: “You can leave now…”
 
The APS Guy jumped as Aman appeared behind him and then, with a frown and a complaint under his breath about unappreciative customers, he marched off. Zoroaster turned to look at Aman and eyed the beclothed object he held in his hands.
 
Zoroaster: “And what is that?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “A lamp.”
 
There was no pause, no trace of a lie on his face.
 
Zoroaster: “That might work on other people, but I can feel a lot of magic radiating from it, Mr Tabiz.”
 
Aman shrugged, not surprised he had been caught out. He unwrapped the head of it to reveal a staff. It appeared to be a somewhat traditional magic staff – a long wooden pole topped by a gem encased in cage-like wood. The gem was silent now, but Zoroaster new it would awaken in the hands of a mage it deemed worthy. Most staves were like that, they were temperamental and had a habit of only serving a select few. Magical talent had nothing to do with it. Even the most powerful mage, no matter how grandiose they were, wouldn’t get a staff to work unless that staff liked them. Zoroaster had seen many staves in his time and instantly recognised the one in front of him.
 
Zoroaster: “Now, I may not know the man very well but I have met Hermes and I know this is his staff. Does he know you have it?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “He wasn’t using it.”
 
Zoroaster: “My dear fellow, I am not using my appendix. That doesn’t mean you are at liberty to take it.”
 
Aman glanced down.
 
Aman Tabiz: “I could get you a good price for it.”
 
Zoroaster rolled his eyes.
 
Zoroaster: “You do realise how potent that object is? Caduceus is not a toy.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “That is why I have it.”
 
Zoroaster: “What do you mean?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “The gods have been reckless with their gifts. They continuously bestow these things to mortals who wield them for a time and then die and pass it on to people who are… less worthy. Many have died when these things fall into the wrong hands.”
 
Zoroaster: “And you believe yours are the right hands, do you?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “No. I told you. I want to store it here. Nobody knows it’s here. It will stay quiet and hidden from evil men.”
 
Zoroaster: “I see… well, I suppose I can admire your purpose, Mr Tabiz, I still think you are being a sly rogue about it. Perhaps you could merely return it to Hermes?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “What for? He’s a god of magic, he doesn’t need it.”
 
Zoroaster: “Wasn’t he only just reinstated as a deity? How did you even get this?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “We were both students of Isis. We shared a dorm.”
 
Zoroaster: “If I caught any of my students doing that, I’d expel them!”
 
Aman Tabiz: “That’s why they work so hard to not get caught.”
 
He tapped his chin.
 
Aman Tabiz: “Actually, they’d probably make good students of mine!”
 
Zoroaster: “A thief mage? I hope never to see such a thing!”
 
Aman Tabiz: “Just a thought.”
 
He stalked past Zoroaster who blinked with surprise;
 
Zoroaster: “Now, hold on! I didn’t allow you to take that up there!”
 
Aman Tabiz: “Yes you did.”
 
Zoroaster: “What? When!?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “You said I could store my things here.”
 
Zoroaster: “Yes, that was before I knew it was going to be stolen, magical objects!”
 
Aman Tabiz: “See that crate the APS Guy delivered?”
 
Zoroaster: “Yes?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “You received your payment already. Transaction is completed. No refunds.”
 
Zoroaster: “Now see here--!”
 
Aman Tabiz: “We’ll be quiet!”
 
He called down as he ascended the stairs.
 
Aman Tabiz: “You won’t even know I’m here.”
 
 
Aeshma: “I have it.”
 
Aži Dahāka: “Then freedom is at hand!”
 
Aeshma: “Where will you go once free, fell dragon?”
 
Aži Dahāka: “I shall take back my mountain! The sorcerer will rue the day he stepped foot into my lair! And yes, it is a lair. I’m a dragon. Dragons have lairs.”
 
Aeshma: “You will be vulnerable. You are weakened by this prison. And now there are many mages here, each with training under Zoroaster himself. You will die here.”
 
Aži Dahāka: “Then I shall die wreaking my revenge and my name shall go down in legend!”
 
Aeshma: “I will not waste my gifts upon such nonsense, Aži Dahāka.”
 
Aži Dahāka: “You dare renege on our pact, demon!?”
 
Aeshma: “There are other lands to terrorise without such a powerful adversary. He is a mortal human. He will wither and die. The future belongs to you, dragon of vril, should you learn patience. Destruction and chaos can be meted out upon humanity. I have no interest in your trivial desires and neither should you. If you must use our wrath upon Zoroaster and his kin, then you should do so when you have more strength and he is weakened with age. Then you can piss on his grave.”
 
Aži Dahāka: “I don’t piss…”
 
Aeshma: “Unfortunate.”
 
Many days passed as Aži Dahāka considered this. He understood Aeshma’s view and knew it to be the wisest course and yet his bubbling desire for vengeance had grossly consumed his mind ever since he was trapped. He couldn’t believe he had been defeated by a human and still refused to acknowledge that he may be beaten again. Zoroaster had been lucky, that is all.
 
But as the days wore on and he watched the Shaheb-e-Dilan parade themselves before him as always, his anger towards them became deeper. It wasn’t a surface-level rage, it became a deep-seated loathing. Revenge would be a dish best served cold.
 
The Shaheb-e-Dilan reported to Zoroaster of the dragon’s unusual quietude and Zoroaster began to further improve the enchantments and workings of the prison as a precaution. But it wasn’t enough. The dragon agreed to the terms of the Demon of Wrath and was suddenly imbued with such demonic strength that the very walls of the volcano threatened to rumble from the sheer aura that now surrounded the beast.
 
He struggled and fought. The magic enchantments were first to break, as were the physical bindings. The impossible devices also gave way under the strain of the demonic aura. The last surge was fought against the vice grip of Helios, a god of the sun. His plasmatic hand was fuelled by the sun itself but that power could only hold so long as the portal remained open. Aeshma exerted his strength into the physical world from his hellish domain and the machine keeping the portal open blasted apart. Suddenly the hand was gone and the dragon burst from his chains.
 
The volcano had long since quieted and the funnel was crusted over. But now it was blasted apart as the vril dragon smashed through the rock and soared into the sky. The mages sent spell after spell at the dragon, but the beast laughed with elation at his freedom. He went up and up and then far away from the lands of the Elborz mountains.
 
He was guided by the Demon Lord to a land known as India. Here there were many kingdoms more ancient than even his birth and decadence was rife with its kings. Here the demon could feed on the corruption and Aži Dahāka relished in the opportunity to sow his malevolence upon these people. Initially they opposed him with weapons and beasts and ancient magics but Aži Dahāka was powerful and with the demon’s aura, he demolished all those who fought him. When he demanded obedience, many caved in to his demands. Gold was delivered to his new lair in the south of the Himalayas. The Panchachuli mountains became his bed. He accumulated so much gold and offerings that he burrowed out all five mountains. He even demanded human sacrifices – the most vulnerable of them, beautiful girls especially as they had more value to the kings. When the girls were mounted upon the sacrificial rock, he chewed them to pieces and spat out the mutilated carcasses. He didn’t need to eat flesh, after all, he just wanted to kill something precious. The kings of northern India would send great trains, filled with offerings, to stave off the dragon’s wrath. Should Aži Dahāka be displeased with the splendour of the offerings, that kingdom would suffer months of attacks – entire villages razed and, should no offering still be satisfying enough, he would destroy the great palaces that the royals lived in. This began to corrupt the kings further. They would offer the greatest sacrifices, the most beautiful virgins, up to the dragon in order to gain his favour and the loser of this contest would often become victim to the dragon and his lands would become ripe for the taking of other, richer kings. The corruption fed upon corruption and bred more corruption still.
 
The dragon went on unchecked. Even when the Christians came to India, they placated the beast just as the Hindus before them. The great Christian kingdom of Prester John grew powerful under the influence of the dragon. The Catholic Church always had the funds to further spread its influence into neighbouring lands, even as the peasants of Italy and France starved, and Aži Dahāka was well fed. The Hindu kings, as wealthy as they were, always fell prey to the dragon’s wrath and the kingdom of Christians grew larger and larger still…

Cornucopia

PostJul 23, 2019#85

Pirithous was a changed man.
 
Since he married and came to live with Hippodamia and her son, Polypoetes, he was well-groomed, straight-backed and always wore a friendly smile – a genuine one. He wore simple but neater clothes and most of the wealth he inherited from his past life he poured into renovating the small village. It soon had greater pastures, warehouses and was a thriving producer of food for the rest of Greece. Yet he was careful never to overinvest and disparage the quiet, scenic beauty that the town held. Simply named after the nearby mountain, Oeta Town, Pirithous had been living peacefully and happily.
 
That was until he was dragged into the schemes of his old friend.
 
Pirithous looked down at the off food served unto him.
 
It was oysters with prawns and a fillet of trout, which he poked with his knife. It was dead, certainly, but barely. Pirithous never liked the idea of eating living organisms. However he was obliged to eat for the sake of his host. He looked up as the large man sat himself down in an armchair by, what should have been, the fireplace. Except, instead of fire, there were bubbles whizzing up the chimney breast as a fissure emitted heat into the submerged house.
 
Pirithous was seated on the section of the room that was raised out of the river water, along with the table and his meal. His host was seated in the warm water like it was a hotspring. He grinned at Pirithous encouragingly.
 
Achelous: “Eat up, son! Don’t be shy!”
 
Pirithous: “Thank you, sir. This is very kind of you.”
 
Achelous: “I don’t get to act as host for many mortals, I’m happy for the company!”
 
He was a tall man with broad shoulders and long arms. He had a great beard that was moulded into two halves that looked like half-moons on either side of his chin. Upon his head was one huge horn that looked like it would be too heavy for his head to support. On the other side, where the matching horn ought to be, was a stump. He wore riverweeds over his body like a toga and his skin was a light shade of green. Father of all rivers, Achelous, made his home in the similarly named Acheloos River and was considered the overseer of all rivers in Greece, each of which had its own river spirit. As God of Rivers, he had a close relationship with Poseidon, God of Oceans, that was not always positive.
 
Pirithous ate and complimented the deity as best he could. It tasted great, despite the wiggling oysters.
 
Pirithous: “So, you were telling me about your, uh, horn.”
 
Achelous: “Yes. Unfortunate business. There was a human girl I had become quite… well, to be blunt, enamoured with. Please don’t judge me, son, I am not prone to fraternising with humans normally… but this young lady had a sweetness about her that just… captured my heart.”
 
Pirithous: “I can relate to that, sir.”
 
Achelous: “Yes, I would imagine so! You told me of your beautiful wife, Hippodamia. I’m glad you can understand my feelings. But, someone else was interested in her too. And he was a mortal. I considered letting him pursue her and let it be, but I just… I truly wanted to be with her.”
 
Pirithous: “Did she choose him?”
 
Achelous: “In a manner of speaking. We fought for the right to pursue her. I took a mortal form and we battled. I was a fool, truly. I am new to these sensations, you understand? But I am no warrior, even as a god, and as a human I was outmatched. Hercules defeated me in battle and ripped off my horn…”
 
He sighed but Pirithous’ nerves pricked.
 
Pirithous: “Oh… what did you say the name of this woman was?”
 
Achelous: “Deianira. Beautiful name for a beautiful girl.”
 
Guilt was a new sensation to Pirithous and he felt the hairs on his neck stand on end. He was not only responsible for the death of Hercules by tricking the young Deianira with a poisoned shirt, but therefore responsible for her death by execution too.
 
Achelous: “Well, for my audacity, I now have just a single horn.”
 
Pirithous: “I have heard that your horn is now considered the Cornucopia. A much prized possession…”
 
He glanced over at the mantlepiece beside the bull-horned god and saw the horn resting there. It was full of river life wriggling around. Pirithous thought it was a little gruesome to keep a piece of your own body lying around, like keeping his own leg should it be chopped off, but he supposed such an object would be quite potent in powers. And this made it important to his friend.
 
Achelous: “That depends really.”
 
Pirithous rose an eyebrow.
 
Pirithous: “Oh?”
 
Achelous: “Technically my horn could be considered a Cornucopia. It will provide abundance to any who hold it. But it is not the original Cornucopia.”
 
Pirithous: “I had no idea!”
 
Achelous: “The original horn was that of Amalthea, the foster mother of Zeus. After he was cast out from his mother’s care, whoever she might be I do not know, he was taken care of by Amalthea here on Earth. She breastfed the baby, taught him to walk and talk. Made him a young man.”
 
Pirithous: “I’m surprised he didn’t come out as a whole man. I thought gods did that?”
 
Achelous: “Some do, some don’t. There’s no consistency there. I think it depends on the parents’ desire. Anyway, the original horn was hers. That would be a much more precious possession.”
 
Pirithous: “And where might that be?”
 
Achelous: “Well, I wouldn’t rightly know. But if you hear tell of a land that is highly prosperous and rich in food, then you might find it there.”
 
Pirithous: “Not that I have any interest in it, of course. But I know those who might be. Thank you.”
 
Pirithous remained for some time with the river god and moved onto other topics. By the evening, the Greek-Egyptian took his leave. He rowed his small boat along the river, back towards Thessaly, until he saw a shadow lurking by the river.
 
Pirithous: “Lo! Who goes there?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “An interested party.”
 
Pirithous: “The horn of Achelous is on the mantlepiece. It looks heavy.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “Target acquired.”
 
Pirithous: “There is something else you would be interested in though.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “Alarms?”
 
Pirithous: “Uh, no…”
 
Aman Tabiz: “Guard dogs?”
 
Pirithous: “None that I could see.”
 
Aman Tabiz: “Guard cats?”
 
Pirithous: “Really?”
 
Aman Tabiz: “They screech and scratch.”
 
Pirithous: “There is a second horn…”
 
 
Two months later.
 
Zoroaster: “I see you have brought something new to add to your growing collection?”
 
Aman Tabiz didn’t reply and just walked past the old sorcerer with a box that appeared to be sprouting reeds and dripping with water.
 
Zoroaster: “Well I suppose they’re safer now that the dragon is gone…"

The Role of Antediluvia

PostSep 03, 2019#86

The banquet was in full swing. Platters of beautifully cooked meats and vegetables were laid out across the long banqueting table. Servants were hurrying around with fresh plates and glasses and bottles, replacing used up trays or half-drunk cups. Conversations were loud and merry as the red wine was guzzled away by the guests. The smell of food was overwhelming and the heat from the cooked dishes grew intense so the windows were opened to let cold, clean in and hot, pungent air out. The noise of the airship’s engines increased, but the clamour of voices drowned it out all the same. The gondola’s walls were all windows, now partially opened, and displayed the striking view of the cloudy sky high above Antediluvia.
 
The airship had travelled across the narrow channel known as the Atlantic Channel from its home depot in Atlantis. With a few dignitaries from Atlantis, the rest of the passengers were Antediluvians. Their heavy accents were heard brashly against the more practised Atlanteans, whose language had been declared the new national language over the conquered territory. Children were now being taught Atlantean at schools, though they still commonly spoke their own native language when at home with their parents. This led to a lot of entertainment for Atlanteans who liked to joke and criticise the poor pronunciation of the Antediluvians. Aboard the airship, however, the Antediluvians were in the majority and their broad accents were prevalent.
 
Towards one end of the table was the man known as Adai Theos. His rich, brown skin was weathered but stretched youthfully across his strong physique. His hair was dark and thick and worn long, in the common style of the Atlantean elite. He was regaling a group of young Antediluvian men with one of his many, many stories and thrilled in their rapturous attentions. He enjoyed the company of these rougher people. Aside from them being much more easily enthralled by his presence, their lack of sophistication met his more boisterous nature.
 
Centuries ago he had paraded around the humans like a peacock, wearing the grandest of fashions and paving the way for high culture and elegance. But as he grew older, and the elegance of nobles became less and less comprehensible, he began to eschew that which he had created and drew on his more down-to-earth side. He became the resident ruffian at many parties and began his own counter-culture trend where it became ‘cool’ for the elite to downplay their wealth and status with expensive ‘poor people clothes’ and utilise slang words borrowed from the uneducated masses.
 
Adai Theos: “And then I made a mountain!”
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “You made a mountain? How?”
 
Adai Theos: “I pulled it up!”
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “… with your hands I suppose?”
 
Adai Theos: “Don’t you know I’m super strong?”
 
He grinned at the other men and flexed his arm. They all gave a good chortle.
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “Okay, absurdity of that aside, why?”
 
Adai Theos: “Why what?”
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “Why pull up a mountain? What was the point?”
 
Adai Theos: “Because… why not?”
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “Why a mountain?”
 
Adai Theos: “What do you mean?”
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “Why make a mountain? Why not something else?”
 
Adai Theos: “Because… mountains are impressive!”
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “They’re just stacked rock where the plates have pushed together. Nothing impressive about it. Even less, they’re useless. Where you planning to sit on the top of it or something? What did you do with it?”
 
Adai Theos: “Well, I didn’t really think about it at the time. It just seemed cool and impressive.”
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “It isn’t, and it wasn’t. It’s just stupid and unrealistic and doesn’t make any sense.”
 
Adai Theos: “Hey now. Who’s telling the story here, me or you?”
 
He turned to the other men.
 
Adai Theos: “He’s not a secret Atlantean, is he? This guy is way too serious to be hanging around with you lot.”
 
The men had a good laugh at their rational friend’s expense while he just rolled his eyes at the nonsensical fabrications of their Atlantean guest. He was more interested in the golden-skinned friend of Adai Theos, who was seated next to the human with wide, expectant eyes. Benem, the Borean, was very interested in the odd behaviour of the fleshy people around him, which was all quite alien to him.
 
When the banquet had first been served up, Benem had been extremely surprised to find nothing but dead things laid before him. Adai Theos had to explain that, unlike a Borean banquet, humans ate things. Boreans, conversely, sampled experiences at their banquets. Smells, colours, shapes and sounds would be magicked into existence by God, the grand sphere at the heart of Hyperborea, for them to try. Taste was certainly a common experience, but he had never tasted actual food before. He was eating endlessly, which started to worry the sceptical Antediluvian deeply until Adai Theos explained that the food wasn’t going anywhere because Benem had no real biological stomach. Oddly enough the rational Antediluvian was more convinced by this than Adai’s own tall-tales, which lacked not only credulity but also reason. ‘Coolness’ was not a good enough reason, so far as he was concerned.
 
Other Antediluvian: “So Benem! Do you have a girlfriend?”
 
Benem: “I have friends who take on the form of girls, yes!”
 
This garnered a lot of laughter from the humans around him, much to the polite bemusement of Benem.
 
Other Antediluvian: “And what are Borean women like? Are they hot? I bet they’re hot!”
 
Benem: “No, we don’t actually generate body heat.”
 
More laughter.
 
Benem: “We can feel heat if we want to! Hyperborea is usually maintained at a stable temperature though, enough to keep the ice out.”
 
The more boisterous Antediluvian was wiping a tear from his eye.
 
Other Antediluvian: “What a made world we live in.”
 
Adai Theos grinned at that and nodded assuringly.
 
Adai Theos: “Truer words have never been spoken!”
 
There was a sudden ruckus from down the table that excelled even the usual tumult of the table. There, at the head of the table, was the host for the banquet. The appointed magistrate for Antediluvia, Cercyon Eleusis. Plans to insert an Atlantean into the role of magistrate over the region had been scrapped for fears of a rebellion against the new regime, so instead they employed one of their own in the guise of the strapping Cercyon. In the early years of his reign, the man had proven well-suited to the position. He had been fair and gentle with most issues presented to him but firm on matters of treachery against the Atlantean Empire. This pleased the Atlantean Council greatly and Cercyon found immense favour amongst the political elite of the empire.
 
His father was the deity known as Poseidon. As son to the God of the Oceans, Cercyon had inherited many superhuman qualities that gave him physical dominance over his fellow humans. Not only was his immensely strong and very agile, he had some control over water particles that enabled him to manipulate not only large bodies of water but also the moisture within the bodies of others. He was well known as a prankster and his age-old trick was to render someone at the table illimitably thirsty, no matter how much they drank either of wine or water.
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “It’s not funny any more! Please stop it!”
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Stop what!?”
 
Many laughed at the misfortune of the miserably thirsty man. Some laughed with genuine mirth, others laughed with pity as they remembered being subjected to the joke once too.
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “You know damn well what!”
 
Cercyon just laughed harder.
 
Mirthful Antediluvian: “Are you gonna cry? Oh wait-!”
 
Thunderous laughter resounded through the room. The servants were mostly lower class Antediluvians whose grasp of the Atlantean language was rudimentary and mostly limited to the requests that would be barked at them. When they failed to understand, they were normally berated with common phrase “po’idot” that derived from ‘poor idiot’, commenting on both their lack of wealth and education. They continued to run around the guests mutely and without reaction to the increasingly rowdy patrons.
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “You buffoon! Stop it! Leave me alone!”
 
Cercyon Eleusis:Buffoon is it!? Can’t you do better than that!?”
 
Some of those laughing were laughing with the most manic of malicious grins and even pointed straight at the parched man. The man’s plight was bringing immense joy to the closest friends of the magistrate, who were used to the display.
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “Am I the only one going to stand up to this cretin!?”
 
The tiniest silence followed, which ended with more glee and even a few knee slaps.
 
Mirthful Antediluvian: “Oh no! He has no friends! And still he can’t cry!”
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “You asshat! Whoever made you a magistrate must be blind!”
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Hey now! That’s my wife you’re talking about!”
 
Mirthful Antediluvian: “You’re in for it now!”
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Fight me, bro!”
 
His friends built up the chant: “Fight! Fight! Fight!”
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “You must be joking!”
 
The men around Adai Theos and Benem also joined in the chant, happy to get a spectacle. Only the dubious Antediluvian seemed unimpressed and he was wise enough to keep his head down. Benem was baffled by the scene before him while Adai kept a quiet, though uncomfortable, smile.
 
Cercyon jumped to his feet and roared to the guests. With their applause he swept up a goblet of wine and poured it into his mouth, spilling most of it over his fine clothes and onto the food on his plate. One of his friends leaned over to try to catch some in his own mouth below. Another then excitedly shook his friend so that the wine splashed further still.
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “C’mon then, ya worm! Get up!”
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “This is absolutely stupid. I’m not playing this game with you.”
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Uuuuup!”
 
Between him and his friends, they got the unfortunate man to his feet. The friends shoved the man into a clearer space where Cercyon joined him. The man stood, downcast and humiliated. He held the elbow of his other arm and stared at the floor, sullenly.
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Okay. Come at me, bro! I’ll give you first punch!”
 
The big man spread his arms openly. More laughter followed as they all knew there was zero chance the small, dehydrated man could harm the superpowered demi-god.
 
Cercyon was always careful to keep his chiselled face smooth and soft, displaying the angular chin and sharp cheekbones of a handsome man. His hair was short and blonde, much in the style of an Antediluvian, and shaved closely around the ears but longer from the crown. His bright blue eyes were as fierce as the oceans his father commanded. His opponent was short, balding and pug-faced. ‘Punchable’ would be the word Cercyon used to describe such a face.
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Come on, bro, this is your chance! I tell you what. Land a hit and I’ll give you all the water you want!”
 
Thirsty Antediluvian: “I am not going to fight you. Please just stop this.”
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Don’t be such a sissy! Come on! This’ll toughen you up!”
 
Cercyon was suddenly on the man and grabbed him in a headlock. He held it for just a moment, getting himself a few cheers from his fans, before he then knocked the man over and wrapped him up in a few wrestling locks.
 
Mirthful Antediluvian: “Careful, Cercyon! He might get a bit too excited!”
 
Lots of laughs.
 
Eventually, after a lot of rolling around, Cercyon got bored of knocking the weak man around and drew himself to his feet. There was an applause while the dejected man glared at the floor in silent anger and embarrassment.
 
Cercyon Eleusis: “Come on, bro! Just a bit of fun! Here’s the water you wanted!”
 
The water molecules in the air suddenly slapped to a single point above the miserable man and, in less than two second, a large bubble of water had formed and burst and rained upon him. Adai sucked on his teeth while everyone else laughed. A couple of servants showed up to start drying the floor around the man. Adai noticed a young woman speak to another servant and soon the formerly thirsty man was quietly led away by servants while the rest of the guests forgot about him. Though he would likely remember it for the rest of his life.
 
The young woman seated herself back down and glanced down the table at Adai, Benem and the dubious Antediluvian – the only people not merrymaking by this point. Adai had a certain skill with faces and he instantly knew she was related to Cercyon himself and he was certain she was probably the man’s daughter.
 
Dubious Antediluvian: “That’s Alope Eleusis. She’s the magistrate’s daughter. She has a more empathic head on her shoulders than her father.”
 
She had the same set chin that looked rugged and handsome on the father but elegant and graceful on the daughter. Her hair was equally blonde and, like most Antediluvians whether male or female, she had short hair. She had not inherited the oceanic eyes of Poseidon, however, and instead got her green eyes from her mother. She had decorated the side of her face with a painted pattern of lines and stars that went further down the body than Adai ought to consider.
 
Adai Theos: “Well now I think I know what kind of an experience we’re in for during this visit…”
 
Benem: “Can you tell me why that man made the other man do something he did not want to do?”
 
Adai sighed.
 
Adai Theos: “Because he’s a bully, Benem.”
 
 
Two months later and Adai Theos and his friend Benem were still enjoying their tour of Antediluvia. Because the Atlanteans were lazy, they used the term Antediluvia to describe both the continent and the civilisation; the same as using Atlantis for their own civilisation and continent. The occupied region of the continent was small and contained to the east, while the rest of the gigantic landmass was ripe for exploration and adventuring.
 
A cruise ship was cutting through the sea’s waves with the two males onboard, along with their old friends from the airship tour. The cruise ship was merrily sailing along the coast of Antediluvia and spotting for wildlife.
 
There were also several ‘prospectors’ onboard. Since the acquisition of Antediluvia, Atlantis had found that there weren’t many other civilisations within conquering distance and yet there was still a lot of land to be occupied. To this end they set their sets on colonisation, spreading their people and culture away from their homelands and into parts unknown. There was still a lot of the Antediluvian continent left uninhabited, but there were also lands further south where the climate was much warmer. The current glacial period meant that the northern lands were frozen over, including the northernmost reaches of the Atlantean continent (which would later separate from the main continent during the Great Calamity and form the island of Great Britain). Magitech was crucial to the survival of those Atlanteans in the northern lands and after decades of rule, the Antediluvians were finding the benefits of this magitech too.
 
Adai Theos and Benem were lounging by the pool.
 
Some guests were too proud to splash about in the water, while others were excessive in their challenges for attention to their bare bodies. Several men acted like children and leapt into the pool in a competition for the biggest splash. As Adai watched with amusement he spotted a woman slip into the pool at the far end. She flinched at the coolness of the liquid, which made Adai chuckle.
 
Adai Theos: “There’s that Alope girl. The magistrate’s daughter.”
 
Benem: “Is it? I don’t remember her.”
 
Adai Theos: “You barely remember me, Benem. It can’t be that difficult to tell us all apart.”
 
Benem: “I’m just not used to recognising people by sight. It really can’t be helped. At least I could tell you apart from that crowd yesterday.”
 
Adai Theos: “They were all children.”
 
Benem: “Yes! I could tell that! They were very small. So I could see which was you.”
 
Adai Theos: “The height alone gave me away?”
 
Benem: “That, and your deep voice.”
 
Adai Theos: “My voice is not that deep. Children just have high-pitched voices!”
 
Benem: “Oh, I see. I thought they might be fairies.”
 
Adai Theos: “Fairies are even smaller!”
 
Benem: “Yes, I thought they were unusually tall fairies.”
 
Adai Theos: “Fairies also have wings.”
 
Benem: “Unusually tall fairies with their wings mutilated by savage animals!”
 
Adai Theos: “You’re not talking about your supposed cats again, are you? I’m telling you, they weren’t cats. Cats aren’t that big.”
 
Benem: “You weren’t there. You didn’t see them.”
 
Adai Theos: “Cats cannot eat a full grown human, Benem.”
 
Benem: “You didn’t see it. I’m telling you, it was a cat.”
 
Adai Theos: “If you can’t tell fairies apart from children, I’m sure you mistook a bear or something for a cat.”
 
Benem: “You think you know everything, Adai.”
 
Adai Theos grinned.
 
Adai Theos: “Whatever I don’t know, isn’t worth knowing!”
 
Benem: “Maybe you’ll change that statement when you’re a bit older.”
 
Adai Theos: “Because I’m not already old?”
 
Benem: “I find that a lot of beings who live for very long cycles are usually much slower to mature and grow.”
 
Adai Theos: “Does this include you?”
 
He said this accusingly.
 
Benem: “I suppose so? I don’t really know. Boreans don’t experience existence in the same physical manner that you do. I have seen some truly powerful beings, able to exist on multiple planes of existence and through space-time. Yet they still act like fleshy things with brains encased in bone.”
 
Adai glanced at Benem’s skull and his own brain wanted to recoil in horror at the thought of there being nothing inside there. He decided to avoid an uncomfortable discussion about brainless, yet sapient, creatures and went back to observing the people in the pool.
 
There was a sudden shout that grabbed their attention and from the other side of the pool came a large-bodied man wearing a wide grin.
 
Poseidon: “My son!”
 
Cercyon: “Dad! You old scallywag! What’re you doing here!?”
 
The two big men bro-hugged and gave each other firm slaps on the back. Adai considered himself a rather masculine man but he had never understood the need to hit someone you like. He glanced at Benem and considered giving him a smack on the back too, but the alien could read this action as anything from an unprovoked attack to a sexual overture – both of which would probably delight him immensely as an impending ‘human experience’.
 
Poseidon: “I was in the area. I was about to make a fun little tidal wave but I sensed you were onboard, so I thought I’d come up and crash your party. How’re you doing, my boy? Magistrate of some kingdom, I hear?”
 
The two men engaged in a quieter conversation for a few minutes as they slowly strolled around the pool.
 
Benem: “Isn’t that one of your supposed gods?”
 
Adai Theos: “Not mine! But yes, he’s a god. I don’t really understand religion.”
 
Benem: “Me neither.”
 
Adai Theos: “Aren’t you, basically, an extension of your God?”
 
Benem: “That’s precisely the problem. I don’t have faith or worship or… whatever religion is. Why would I worship something that already knows I exist and needs no worship? These creatures, like this one, need to be fed with faith and love, but I do not know why. I think it is just for the purpose of congratulating their ego.”
 
Adai Theos thought of the WriterGod, and he thought of the three cosmic deities that had created him.
 
Adai Theos: “I think you might be right.”
 
Benem: “Oh really?”
 
Adai Theos: “You’re surprised?”
 
Benem: “I doubted I understood the point of religion and you would enlighten me. How disappointing.”
 
Adai Theos: “You’re disappointed that I think you’re right? I have never heard anyone say such a thing in my entire, long, life.”
 
Benem: “Being wrong is how I learn. If I’m right, I didn’t learn anything, I just had my thoughts confirmed.”
 
Adai Theos: “I admire you, you know? Always striving to learn.”
 
Benem spread his palms towards the crowd of people.
 
Benem: “I have such interesting teachers! Without humans, I guess I will find something else to do.”
 
Adai looked again at the people. He found it difficult to see what Benem saw in them. He mostly saw children. Sometimes they were fun to be around. He liked to impress them. But he doubted he could ever learn anything from them. He had seen and experienced so much more than any of them. What could they possibly teach him?
 
Cercyon: “Alope!”
 
Alope: “Oh! Father!”
 
Adai noticed how Alope had suddenly, quite sharply, became shy and disturbed. She hung her head from her father’s gaze. He thought it odd since she had been very open with him aboard the airship. He looked from her to Poseidon and wondered if she was one of the religious kind that Benem was talking about.
 
Cercyon: “Come now, Alope! Don’t you recognise your grandfather!? It wasn’t that long ago you last saw him, surely!?”
 
Poseidon: “No worries, Cercyon! We know each other very well!”
 
He grinned, Adai thought, like a cat with a mouse. Alope stiffened and her stare was squarely aimed at the sandals of her father.
 
Cercyon: “Oh? I didn’t know about this! You met in Atlantis, I suppose?”
 
Alope: “That’s right. Posei—grandfather comes to visit my apartment sometimes.”
 
Cercyon: “I suppose that’s good! I can’t believe you never mentioned it though!”
 
Alope: “Well—”
 
Poseidon: “Come now, son! What happens in Atlantis, stays in Atlantis! Isn’t that what they say?”
 
He laughed loudly and led Cercyon by the shoulder, away from Alope. The magistrate, however, cast a frown back at his daughter before he continued on. Alope’s eyes were wide with panic and she grit her teeth. Nobody was paying her any attention, save for Adai, so she just stood there, in the pool, like a water-logged statue.
 
 
Later that night, Adai was in his cabin. He had a pipe lit up with a whiff of blue smoke trailing out of the window into the cool night air. A small music player was pumping out gentle tunes, using a small tank of vril to power it. The vril bubbled away energetically, the bass of the song keeping rhythm with the pounding bubbles.
 
A new, light, pounding joined the beat. At first he thought it was the music, but when the knock repeated he realised it was the door. He speculated that Benem got himself into trouble with another passenger, again, and needed to be rescued.
 
He pushed a button on the wall and the door slid open with a smooth hiss. He found himself looking into the wide, green eyes of Alope Eleusis. He blinked with some surprise.
 
Alope: “Are you Mr Theos?”
 
Adai Theos: “That’s correct.”
 
Alope: “I’m Alope Eleusis. It’s a pleasure to meet you.”
 
Adai Theos: “Yes, I know who you are. What can I do for you?”
 
Alope: “I was hoping you might help me. May I come in?”
 
Adai Theos: “Oh. Yes. I suppose so… I mean, yes, of course.”
 
He stepped back and sat upon the sofa of his cabin. The sofa could be transformed into a bed, should the need arise, but the room was already equipped with its own, separate bed and he was a single man, travelling alone. Benem originally wanted to share, but since he didn’t sleep, Adai refused. Last time they did that, he woke to find Benem staring at his nostrils. Apparently, they flared during sleep and this was fascinating to the Borean. What had followed was a day of discussion on all the little nuances of Adai’s bodily functions during sleep mode.
 
Alope: “Thank you.”
 
She sat down on the sofa, exactly where he had been sitting himself. He didn’t feel comfortable sitting next to this intruder and there were no other seats available, so he stood next to the door and didn’t move.
 
Alope: “I believe that you reside in Atlantis, is that true?”
 
Adai Theos: “Yes…”
 
Alope: “And when do you plan to return there?”
 
Adai frowned.
 
Adai Theos: “This is a little personal. Can we skip the small talk and get to the point? I don’t like having strange ladies in my bedchambers so late at night. Sorry for being so rude. It’s just how I feel.”
 
Alope: “Oh! I’m sorry! I honestly didn’t think—I just need someone to help me get back to Atlantis as soon as possible. If you were travelling soon, then I was hoping I could accompany you?”
 
Adai Theos: “Okay… I see… why do you need to go with someone? You’re rich, I believe, you could afford to get a flight alone.”
 
Alope: “That would—”
 
She hesitated.
 
Alope: “Look suspicious. If I’m travelling with someone of renown, such as yourself, then it would appear quite reasonable that I should go back to Atlantis so suddenly.”
 
Adai Theos: “And why do you need to go back so suddenly? And why would it look suspicious for you to go alone?”
 
Alope sighed with frustration.
 
Alope: “It’s private, Mr Theos. Just know, you would be doing me a great service if I could travel with you.”
 
Adai Theos: “I wasn’t planning on going back to Atlantis for some time. I’m travelling with my friend and he wants to ‘see the sights’, so he says.”
 
Alope: “Then I have wasted my time, yet again.”
 
She sighed again, this time with resignation.
 
Alope: “I’m really sorry to have troubled you, Mr Theos. I didn’t mean to cause you any discomfort.”
 
She rose and gave him a bow. He flipped the switch and the door slid open to let her out. He watched her back as she left, though her words still turned in his mind. The door clicked shut and he ran a hand through his hair.
 
Guilt.
 
He groaned at himself and opened the door again. He stuck his head out and saw the retreating figure of Alope down the corridor.
 
Adai Theos: “Ms Eleusis!”
 
She spun with a jump, startled by her own name. He beckoned her back into his cabin and went inside. He waited just a minute before she reappeared. He saw her eyes were red where she had quickly rubbed tears away. That only confirmed that he was about to get himself involved in something he should leave alone, but he couldn’t ignore the matter, even if he wanted to.
 
Adai Theos: “I can make arrangements to return to Atlantis. My friend will probably be a little disappointed that he won’t get to see more fish, but he likes Atlantis too, so he’ll soon get over it.”
 
Alope breathed out a long, released breath and, though she tried not to, a gulp of sorrow blurted from her mouth and tears flowed down her cheeks.
 
Alope: “Thank you! Thank you, Mr Theos! I’m so sorry, I’m not usually like this! Normally I would never ask or accept such a favour from someone, even if I know them well, but I truly am desperate. From the bottom of my heart, I am honestly tremendously grateful for your kindness, Mr Theos.”
 
Adai Theos: “I… well, you’re welcome. I’m sorry, I’m not much of an orator unless I’m telling stories.”
 
Alope: “Your friend. Are you sure—did you say fish?”
 
Adai Theos: “The best word to describe my friend is ‘quirky’.”
 
Alope: “Right. I’m not sure if I could provide… fish… but I will find a way to repay you both. Tickets to exclusive theatres or clubs or restaurants, I can procure them! I know you are well known already, but I am sure I can introduce you to many fine nobles to enhance your prestige.”
 
Theos found that a little amusing. His own fame tended to grow and ebb over the centuries. Sometimes he was the most famous of celebrities, other times he was the most lowly of commoners. He preferred not to be in the spotlight, but he had to confess that the most useful people were often basking in the limelight with all the power to make change happen.
 
Adai Theos: “No need of a reward, Ms Eleusis. You seem genuinely distressed and that’s enough for me. We’ll catch a flight in the morning. Is that suitable?”
 
Alope: “It is. I shall pack my things immediately. Thank you again.”
 
When she left, her spirits clearly renewed, Theos slumped onto the sofa. He picked up his pipe and turned the music back on. He leant his head back and closed his heavy eyes.
 
 
Alope: “I’m ashamed of myself, Adai. I truly am.”
 
They were sat in the small common room that linked the four bedrooms. The only airship available was a standard commercial class vessel, so a dormitory style system was in place. They were lucky enough to get the expensive dormitory, so they all had separate rooms and shared only a common room. He wouldn’t have minded a standard room, sharing a bedroom with some strangers, but he was horrified what Benem might get up to. The fourth bedroom for their domicile was empty, so the three of them had the room to themselves.
 
Benem was trying to learn a boardgame. The pieces were all in front of him and a hologram was seated opposite him. It was set to tutorial mode and it kept teaching him the rules, but, in true Benem fashion, he couldn’t understand why the rules existed.
 
Benem: “But I can put the piece here.”
 
Tutorial Hologram: “That is against the rules. You must role the dice first.”
 
Benem: “But why should I do that if I can just put it here? Watch.”
 
He moved the piece to the goal.
 
Benem: “I win!”
 
Tutorial Hologram: “You are disqualified. You broke the rules. You must roll the dice.”
 
Benem: “But it is easier to just put it here. Why should I roll dice? That will take longer to get there.”
 
Adai rolled his eyes and turned back to Alope.
 
Adai Theos: “I admit, I’ve never been in your position, Alope. So I can’t really comment on who you should or shouldn’t be with.”
 
Alope: “But I—He was so… it was like I didn’t have a choice!”
 
Adai Theos frowned with sudden seriousness.
 
Alope: “I mean… he didn’t… but I felt like… he was always there. He always pressured me and he’s a god, so…”
 
Adai could imagine such a man as Poseidon coercing people into doing things they didn’t want to do. The more he learnt of these gods, the less he liked them. It made him look at himself and reflect on his own behaviour. He was stronger, more powerful and more knowledgeable than anyone else around him. Had he used that strength to his advantage over others? With great power, comes great responsibility, someone called Uncle Ben once told him. Why people called him Uncle was anyone’s guess because he certainly wasn’t Adai’s uncle.
 
Adai Theos: “Do you plan to run from your father forever?”
 
Alope: “I really don’t know. I don’t know what I’m supposed to do. I just kept it all quiet and look how that turned out…”
 
Benem: “Those are bad numbers. I should roll the dice to get better numbers!”
 
Tutorial Hologram: “That is against the rules.”
 
Benem: “But why? If I need to get around the board as quickly as possible and I must use dice, then I should get good numbers! If they’re bad, I should try again until they are good!”
 
Tutorial Hologram: “That is… My programming cannot keep up with this…”
 
 
Most of the streets of Atlantis were narrow as they were designed only for walking and not for large vehicles. The streets around the grand temple, however, were very wide boulevards. They were designed not only for the additional foot traffic that the temple attracted, but also for the decorative view that the temple would provide – wider streets meant wider views.
 
Benem: “What is the purpose of this temple?”
 
Adai Theos: “It’s for worshipping the WriterGod.”
 
Benem: “WriterGod? Is that a god of writers, then?”
 
Adai Theos: “Yes?”
 
He answered tentatively.
 
Benem: “Then why are all these non-writers worshipping it?”
 
Adai Theos: “I think I’m not qualified to answer this question.”
 
Benem: “That is disappointing.”
 
Adai Theos: “You know, I don’t know everything, right?”
 
Benem: “I have learnt that, yes. It is quite inconvenient. But I suppose being limited by a brain will do that.”
 
Adai Theos: “You think brains are limiting?”
 
Benem: “They only have a certain amount of storage capacity, you know? Eventually old knowledge will need to be overwritten.”
 
Adai Theos: “That is… I had never thought of that.”
 
He realised he might have to consider that one day. How many memories could his brain hold? Had he already forgotten important memories? He may have forgotten days or weeks or months or years or even more and he didn’t notice because he didn’t remember!
 
Benem: “Oh look. Isn’t that one of those hologram machines?”
 
Whizzing past the white-spired cityscape was a small drone. Its propellers whirred and a small cloud of magic vapour puffed out behind it in a long, thin trail. It stopped before them - much to Adai’s surprise because nobody ever sent him mail – and proceeded to activate. A holographic woman appeared.
 
Alope: “Help me, Adai Theos! You’re my only hope!”
 
Adai Theos: “If she didn’t seem so sincere, I’d think this was a joke.”
 
Benem: “Who was that?”
 
Adai Theos: “Alope Eleusis. The woman we spent several weeks with, remember?”
 
Benem: “Oh! Yes. I thought she was that priest you introduced me to.”
 
Adai frowned.
 
Adai Theos: “You mean the old man?”
 
Benem: “That was a man?”
 
Adai Theos: “The beard.”
 
Benem squinted at the hologram.
 
Benem: “Oh yes! You’re right! This one has no beard! That’s a keen observation! I will keep that in mind in future. Beard or no beard! I’m sure I will recognise her next time.”
 
Adai Theos: “Yes, but just because someone has no beard, doesn’t mean that they are definitely Alope…”
 
Benem: “Good point. I suppose this will not be so easy after all…”
 
Adai Theos: “We had better go. There’s an address written on the hologram. It must be her apartment. She doesn’t live far from here. Impressive to live in the holy district.”
 
They worked their way along the streets. Adai had to pull Benem away from interesting things, such as sewer pipes and cockroaches, to hurry to their destination. They had to take a short cut across the outer grounds of the Basilica Numenaedes, to which he cast a dubious glance and thought of the WriterGod. The apartment building wasn’t far away and when they arrived they found it to be a grandiose affair. The peak of it was a tall, white spire that pointed to the sky like a needle. The walls were painted white and were curved in cylindrical towers. They used the elevator to reach her floor, but when they found her apartment the door was already open.
 
Adai Theos: “Hello?”
 
Benem: “Hello.”
 
Adai Theos: “I wasn’t talking to you, Benem.”
 
Benem: “Oh. But there’s nobody else here.”
 
Adai Theos: “I know that now!”
 
The apartment might have been a luscious and decorative site once but was now a mess. Everything was smashed up and ruined. Plants, water tanks, furniture – all broken. They trod carefully through the domicile and listened intently.
 
Benem: “This is a very unusual taste in décor. I don’t think I’ve seen anyone else with such fashion in their homes before.”
 
Adai decided a long conversation would follow if he tried to explain the situation to Benem, so he decided to just remain quiet. Adai went from room to room until he reached a small room, which appeared to be a bedroom, towards the back of the luxury apartment. He heard a faint noise from the walk-in-wardrobe and he carefully approached it. He hoped it was Alope in there and not an intruder, though he wasn’t sure why an intruder would be hiding in the closet.
 
He thrust it open.
 
He was met by a terrible scream.
 
Adai Theos: “Alo--!? Who’re you?”
 
The boy stared up at Adai with panic-stricken eyes that were filled with tears.
 
Adai Theos: “Where’s Alope?”
 
Boy: “Are you the police?”
 
Adai Theos: “Let’s say yes.”
 
Boy: “They came. They took her! They hit her!”
 
Adai Theos: “Who did? Did you recognise them?”
 
Boy: “No, but she said granddad sent them to take her away and made me stay in here.”
 
Adai closed his eyes. The boy was her son and he had a good guess who the boy’s father was.
 
Adai Theos: “I’ll see if I can find her. When the police arrive, they’ll take care of you.”
 
Adai turned to leave but the boy was suddenly on his feet.
 
Boy: “Wait! Wait! Are you Mr Theo!? Mum said I need to go with Mr Theo if I’m in trouble!”
 
Adai groaned. He knew helping Alope was going to land him into more trouble than he needed. He slowly turned and looked down at the kid. He was around eight years old and he had the same, big, green eyes that his mother had and not the blue oceanic eyes of Cercyon. A big part of him wanted to turn and walk away and forget all of this. The petty troubles of individual humans was not his business and there were many of them all over the planet. Humans had evolved their own set of social problems and every generation, in every nation had them. Alope and her son would be forgotten in a hundred years. Even mighty Cercyon would eventually be forgotten about by time. Helping the boy would be pointless in the long run. The world wouldn’t care.
 
Adai Theos: “What’s your name, boy?”
 
Boy: “Hippothoon. Hippothoon Eleusis.”
 
Benem: “That’s a funny-sounding name.”
 
Hippothoon: “It’s my name! It’s not funny!”
 
The boy wanted to stand up for himself now, as though it would make up for hiding before.
 
Adai Theos: “You’d best come with me.”
 
They waited for the police to arrive outside the apartment complex and Hippothoon related his tale in detail. The police appeared to make a great deal of effort on the boy’s behalf but Adai wanted to make his own efforts. He searched high and low and drew on information from his fellows. He eventually discovered that Alope had been taken aboard a private airship several hours ago and he alerted the police so that they could arrest the kidnappers when the airship landed in Antediluvia. He booked passage on another airship so that they could meet Alope on the continent.
 
 
Adai Theos: “This seems very far out from the city. Are you sure you know where you’re going?”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Yes, yes. This way.”
 
He had made the simple request that he wanted to see Alope Eleusis at the police station and one of the younger officers agreed to take him to her. Adai, Benem and Hippothoon followed the officer long out of the town where she had landed. Their passage had taken a few days, first by airship and then by roads that were drawn within the kingdom. Now they went by foot.
 
The land began to get steeper, forming grassy hills.
 
Adai Theos: “Are you joking with us? You won’t like me when I’m angry.”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “No? Why would I be joking with you? I think that would be unprofessional! I take my duty very seriously, Mr Theos.”
 
Hippothoon reached out and grasped Adai’s hand. Initially he tried to withdraw his palm from the boy’s, but the child held fast and so he relented.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Here she is.”
 
Down the hill was a small cottage. It was small, tidy and even pretty. A light plume of smoke drifted from the chimney, created the old-fashioned way with fossil fuels rather than magitech. The windows were tinted out to conceal whoever was inside.
 
Adai Theos: “How long has she been here?”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “I think she was brought up here as soon as she landed, sir. The magistrate himself showed up.”
 
Adai Theos: “A couple of days then?”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “I’d say so.”
 
Adai Theos: “Has she been taken care of?”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “What do you mean?”
 
Adai Theos: “Has she been treated well?”
 
The officer hesitated with some confusion.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “I’m not entirely sure I understand what you’re trying to suggest, Mr Theos. Everything was done as respectfully as possible, I suppose. The magistrate was irate though and they got into a very nasty confrontation. Lots of shouting. But it’s not our duty to get involved. We don’t make the laws, the magistrate does. There were a lot of holograms with the Atlantean police, I recall. Initially they were keen on chasing the lady down, but in the end the Atlantean government ordered them down, I believe. I think the magistrate must have pulled a few strings with his wife. She’s one of the councillors, you know?”
 
Adai Theos: “Yes I know. Okay.”
 
He started down the hill towards the cottage.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Hold on! Where do you think you’re going? You can’t go in there!”
 
Adai was struggling to keep his anger in check.
 
Adai Theos: “I go where I please!”
 
He caught himself and forced his temper to simmer down. He realised that he might have become that which he had criticised and used his strength against someone weaker than him.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Now, Mr Theos! I’ll ask you to remember that you speak to an officer of the law. Sanctioned by the council. You can’t just go wandering into the digger’s home without permission.”
 
Adai Theos: “Digger’s home? Why is Alope being kept in there?”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “What? She’s not! What do you mean?”
 
Adai’s anger began to resurface.
 
Adai Theos: “I am here to see Alpoe Eleusis! I want to see her this instant!”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “See her? You can’t—oh. Oh. I see there seems to be some misunderstanding…”
 
Adai Theos: “What do you mean?”
 
The officer stepped back from the hill.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Her sentence was carried out without delay, Mr Theos…”
 
They looked down at the hill. Signs of digging could be seen.
 
Adai Theos: “She was… she’s been… executed?”
 
Hippothoon wailed, startling the officer.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Well… yes. In a manner of speaking.”
 
Adai Theos: “And what does that mean?”
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Orders from the council were very exact on the sentence. She was…”
 
The man hesitated, very uncomfortable with the unexpected position he found himself in.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Well, she was buried.”
 
Adai frowned, thinking ‘of course she was buried’. That’s the only respectful way to deal with the dead. The officer saw that thought cross the man’s face and clarified, carefully.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Alive.”
 
Adai Theos: “Wh-what!? She’s still--!”
 
He made to leap at the ground and claw at the dirt but the officer put his hand upon Adai’s chest.
 
Antediluvian Guide: “Sir, I am very sorry. As I said, it’s been days.”
 
Adai felt a hollowness form in his chest. He looked at the boy. Hippothoon was wailing and wailing for his mother.
 
 
Adai Theos: “They never cease to disappoint me, Benem. Humans.”
 
Benem: “You are human.”
 
Adai Theos: “It’s hard to remember that.”
 
They alighted on the soft beachhead. Their boat was a light vessel designed for short-range journeys. They had taken a ferry across the ocean from Antediluvia and then disembarked with their own, small boat. Adai didn’t want anyone else to set foot on his precious, secret island. The trees were tall and ancient and was filled with dodo birds, who couldn’t fly away from the small island.
 
He led Benem and Hippothoon through the forest until they finally reached a small, stone building.
 
Adai Theos: “I built this… well, I built it a long time ago.”
 
Benem: “For your wife?”
 
Adai nodded slowly. It was strange that time did not seem to ease the pain of this loss.
 
Adai Theos: “This is her shrine. There are rooms here though. I will have to think about expanding it since we’ll be staying here a while. Benem, you can stay as long as you want to too.”
 
Benem: “I might stay for some time. But I do miss the proximity of God. I will leave one day, I believe.”
 
Adai Theos: “Anytime. Hippothoon. This is your home now. You are free here.”
 
Hippothoon: “Are there any other kids?”
 
Adai scoffed.
 
Adai Theos: “Of course not! There’s no one here but us!”
 
Hippothoon: “Who will I make friends with?”
 
Adai Theos: “Me?”
 
Hippothoon rolled his eyes but he didn’t seem to be in good spirits. It had been over a month since they found Alope buried on the hill in Antediluvia. More time would need to pass to mend that wound. If ever it did. He and the boy could wallow in their own misery here on Morchazima together, Adai thought. Hippothoon couldn’t return to even to Atlantis as the council might find him and execute him, as they had his mother.
 
Instead Adai would train the boy and should the boy seek out revenge against Cercyon and the council… then he would be well trained.
 
 
Aman Tabiz looked at the island.
 
He remembered training Hippothoon on these very shores back in 900,000BC when humanity was still young. He remembered how he had had to expand the building more and more to suit him and his protégé, and further still in the millennia after that. Now the central temple was new since then, but old by now. He would need to give it a new update now that it was 1198BC. Give it a more modern look. And definitely clean away the gigantic spiders that had taken home inside the place, fuelled by the ample amounts of magic stored on the island.
 
He found a few traps had been sprung and, eventually, he found that one of the traps had hit its mark. Some random adventurer, no doubt, had stumbled on the island in search of treasure.
 
Aman, with his newest acquisition for the island, walked towards the building. The Cornucopia that he had stolen from Achelous, with the information from Pirithous, was sprouting all manner of sea creatures in the water’s of the island. Tiny, microscopic, vril-laced plankton sprang to life within the ocean around the island and created a mesmerising diamond-sheen to the sun-baked waters. Algae of all colours, pink and blue and green, grew in the ponds and frogs burst into existence. His quiet island became ever more alive. The dodos now had company, at least, and he imagined his long-lost wife would appreciate the beauty of nature around her gravesite.
 
He leant down and clutched a clump of sand.
 
He had been right all those millennia ago. These gods and their offspring did not use their power with responsibility, and he knew he was justified in his actions. He would do whatever it took to remove the stain of the gods from humanity. Steal or kill.

19744
Site Admin
19744

PostSep 05, 2019#87

A THOUSAND AND ONE TALES

The young woman kneels before the stoic-faced man, whose lined face is old beyond his middle aged years. His eyes are rimmed red, as he places the tiara upon that head of dark curls. The woman looks up at him, and rises, turning to face the crowd.

Vizier: "Behold, your new queen!"

The crowd dutifully cheers, but most look forward more to the bloody spectacle to follow on the morrow, when at dawn the new queen shall be executed.

The shah, cold-faced, takes his new bride's hand, and they depart to the banquet. Behind them, the old vizier clenches his fists, and then forcibly unclenches them.

Vizier: "Sahrazad...surely a worthless suitor would have been better than a murderous one..."

No one hears him, of course. His daughter, now the queen (albeit destined to be so for scant hours), had fewer suitors than one might expect of the royal vizier's daughter.

Normally there are many who seek to marry into power and influence. But Sahrazad, while not homely, can not be necessarily called beautiful either, not by the exacting standards of society. She keeps herself clean and neat, and wears the minimum amount of makeup necessary for propriety. She might be very beautiful indeed if she artfully painted her face as so many women do.

But her mind is far lovelier. She is sharp and witty, learned and well spoken. And this is not always a desirable trait in the eyes of suitors in this land, in this age. One suitor however, charmed her greatly, speaking softly and bringing her gifts that were meaningful rather than hollow tokens like jewelry. Sahrazad had accepted his suit, only for his demeanor to change - he expected her to be silent and be a dutiful wife. She would have none of that, of course, and broke things off, to the scandalized shock of everyone.

Shahryar: "You have more light in your eyes than my brides normally do."

The king speaks to his new wife, next to him at the head of the table, as the banquet carries on.

Sahrazad: "Is it not a great honor to be your queen, my lord, may you live forever? Even if only for a time?"

Shahryar: "Quite. You are wise."

Thus mollified, Shahryar speculates that all of his brides should be so cooperative. Perhaps this one might be worth keeping? But  no. Women were witches, and could not be trusted, for his first queen had presented fair facade as well.

After the feast, they retire to the king's royal chambers, an expansive and luxurious suite.

Sahrazad: "My lord, may you live forever, might I be so bold as to request a small boon?"

Shahryar's eyes narrow.

Shahryar: "Ask it."

Sahrazad: "I only wish to see my father and sister one last time, and to bid them a proper farewell, so that they may see me as a splendid queen before I die."

Mollified again, Shahryar nods, again surprised. Most of his brides beg for their lives, whether directly or manipulatively.

Shahryar: "That is no small boon to you, but it is a small boon for me to grant. It is done."

Shortly, the old vizier and his older daughter Dunyazad arrive in the antechambers of the suite. The vizier has clearly been crying, but his eyes are dry now, albeit still red. He clasps his daughter to him, and then leaves before he can break down. Dunyazad looks suitably sorrowful, but looks worried more than upset. Shahryar does not notice this curious expression.

Dunyazad: "O my sister, I shall miss the wondrous stories you tell!"

Shahryar: "What is this?"

Sahrazad: "I beg pardon, my lord, may you live forever. I spin petty tales as entertainment, and my sister enjoys them greatly. I confess, I enjoy telling them."

Intrigued, Shahryar gestures for both Sahrazad and Dunyazad to sit.

Shahryar: "I would hear one of these so-called petty tales."

Sahrazad: "As my lord, may you live forever, wishes."

Dunyazad: "A thousand blessings upon you, your majesty, may you live forever! I am most grateful to hear one last tale from her lips."

The king does not respond, but merely looks at Sahrazad, who adjusts her gown and clears her throat.

Sahrazad: "Once upon a time..."

The tale that follows is one of adventure and madness, and Shahryar is utterly enthralled. Sahrazad's voice enunciates and emphasizes each syllable in just the right way to stoke excitement and fear in his heart at the proper junctures. The night passes, though the king is scarcely aware of the time, until Sahrazad pauses.

Shahryar: "Well? What did he do?"

Sahrazad: "I apologize, my lord, may you live forever,, but dawn has broken."

Shahryar's head whips around to see the sliver of soft light shining through the curtain. Where has the time gone?

Dunyazad: "Farewell, my beloved sister. I wish I could have heard the end."

Shahryar: "You will."

His words are so sudden they almost surprise him.

Sahrazad: "My lord, may you live forever?"

Shahryar: "I must attend to the business of the court. But there shall be no execution until the morrow. I must hear how this tale transpires!"

Dunyazad: "A thousand blessings upon you, your majesty, may you live forever! You are generous indeed."

Shahryar: "Now leave. You may return in the eve to rejoin us."

Dunyazad curtsies and slips out. Shahryar fingers his beard, musing a moment, as Sahrazad remains quiet. Then he stands, stretching his limbs, and goes out.

Behind him, Sahrazad allows herself a small smile.

That evening, Sahrazad finishes her tale, to the king's great delight, but the night is only half gone, so he bids her tell another. It is not over at dawn, so again Shahryar stays her execution. And so this continues, night after night, as Sahrazad spins tales, ending on cliffhangers at dawn.

The king conducts his business during the day, but his mind wanders to the tales that engross him so, and he is often distracted.

Sahrazad takes on some of the duties that were once the queen's, back before no queen survived longer than a day. She is careful about it, not overly presuming, and Shahryar is pleased to have the burden taken off him. Court business is so tiresome compared to the stories he hears every night!

For over two years, this continues. And finally, on the thousandth night, just as dawn breaks, Sahrazad concludes her latest tale.

Sahrazad: "...and they lived happily ever after."

Dunyazad: "Splendid! O my sister, you are an artisan!"

Shahryar hesitates. It is dawn. The time for execution has come, and there is no unfinished story hanging.

Shahryar: "You shall not be executed, Sahrazad."

Sahrazad: "My lord, may you live forever?"

Shahryar: "I have fallen in love with you, with your wisdom and your stories. I will have thee as my queen forever!"

He rises, opening his arms to embrace her. Sahrazad folds herself into his arms.

Sahrazad: "Your generosity and mercy know no bounds, my lord..."

Shahryar grunts in pain as a dagger pierces his vitals.

Sahrazad: "...may you live forever."

He clutches at her, but her strike was true, and the light is already fading from his eyes.

Shahryar: "W...why?"

Sahrazad: "You are a killer and a fool. The latter may be suffered, but never the former, most especially not when he is meant to be the protector of his people."

And then he is dead.

Dunyazad: "Sister...it worked! But...will there really be no reprisals?"

Sahrazad smiles tightly.

Sahrazad: "You have trusted me this far, sister. Trust me a little more."

Indeed, there is no reprisal. Due to the vizier's intervention, the physician states that the king died of a heart attack. Many people don't actually believe that, but no one has any love lost for the king who had become cruel since his first wife was unfaithful to him. Sahrazad has become ruler in all but name over the past thousand days, under the guise of being a dutiful queen helping her distracted king with the burdens of state. She is wise and just, and everyone loves and respects her.

Thus is the thousand and first tale...that of how Sahrazad became Queen of the land known as Sheba.



***

NSP: I do have a follow up post in mind for the Queen of Sheba and Solomon (no promises when it will be written), so I ask that this thread not be picked up and run with just yet, please :) Thanks!

PostSep 05, 2019#88

WISDOM AND VANITY

946 BC.

The grand temple of Solomon, just constructed, is a spectacle in the night sky, lit up by starlight and torchlight. Guards and priests bustle within, but they are deaf and blind to the impressive personages currently touring the place.


Zeus: "This is impressive! My Greeks never built me anything like this!

Odin: "Bah, in my day, wooden longhuts were enough!"

Apollo: "Don't you live in a golden utopia in the sky?"

Odin: "You watch too many movies!"

Osiris: "What's a movie?"

Odin: "...I have no idea."

Yahweh: "Well, what can I say? There are perks to being Earth's chief god!"

The other gods level their gazes at him.

Yahweh: "Don't give me that. It's on my badge and everything."

Vishnu: "You're not controlling or anything."

Yahweh: "Hey, I didn't try to edge in on your peoples once the WriterGod vacated the position. I just took this nothing tribe and forged them into this!"

Thoth: "I have to admit, it's a pretty big achievement. Reminds me of that one goddess with the turnips."

Quetzalcoatl: "...Turnips?"

Thoth: "You probably don't want to know."

Bacchus: "Why are we skulking around with a perception filter anyway? Let's have a party, break this place in!"

Yahweh: "Absolutely not! You are not wrecking this place! I see what your favorite party planner does to Olympus all the time."

Brahma: "Heeeey, don't knock the HorseGod, man. He's actually a pretty chill dude."

Zeus: "Besides, you don't want anyone getting a look at your face for some reason. It's always flames and thunderstorms with you. What's with that, anyway?"

Yahweh: "Tradition. The WriterGod never let anyone see his face either."

Osiris: "Waaaait a second...are you hoping mortals won't notice you're not the same guy? Dude, most mortals don't even know about the WriterGod any more! Nine thousand years of history's passed since his abdication, and the locals have only redeveloped writing a few centuries ago."

Yahweh: "ANYWAY. My man Solomon built this. True blue Israelite! His old man was super cool, so I offered Solomon any blessing he chose, and he asked for wisdom to guide his people in my name!"

Odin: "...No Viking chief ever asks me that."

Zeus: "Same here."

The other gods are looking a bit put out at the fact that Yahweh has a servant who asked that of him.

Yahweh: "So I gave him wealth and power and long life and magic too! Just watch, Israel will become a global power before you know it!"

Hermes: "Only took you 9,000 years to get them to this point..."

Yahweh: "What was that?"

Hermes: "Nothing."

Bacchus: "Heeeey, my god-senses are detecting a party in the palace next door! Looks like some dude is carousing with a bunch of chicks. And they are hotties!"

Yahweh: "Do not speak that way of them! The noble king Solomon is communing with his wives!"

Zeus: "I'd sure like to commune with a few of them myself."

The other gods snicker. Yahweh is oblivious to it.

Yahweh: He has made several political marriages to secure power, and to lead other countries into worshiping me!

Thoth: "I think you misapprehend the likely outcome here."

The gods continue their tour, and in the morning the 65 year old king is holding court, when the fabled Queen of Sheba's retinue arrives. The city is bustling with excitement, for she is legendary even here for her grace and splendor, and has been expected here for some time.
She is a dark-skinned women with dark curls held tightly in place with a glittering crown. Her dress is made of fine silks and does not parade her body. Camels bearing magnificent spices and servants bearing priceless treasures accompany her.


King Solomon is quite taken with her upon sight. To be fair, he's a randy old fellow who is taken with any likely lady.

Solomon: "Your majesty, Sahrazad of Sheba. Welcome to my realm."

Sahrazad: "I shall be most welcome indeed, if I may partake in that for which you are most famed."

He arches his eyebrow.

Solomon: "My God-given wisdom is not a party favor to be trotted out at banquets."

Sahrazad: "What is vanity that cloaks itself specifically for the purpose of being drawn out?"

There is a stirring in the court. Most are confused by the queen of Sheba's sudden question, but others understand it and see it as a challenge. Solomon smiles.

Solomon: "Some might call it a party favor to be trotted out at banquets."

There is some general laughter, and Sahrazad favors him with a slight smile.

The visit lasts for several days, with court appearances, banquets, and private meetings. In one such private meeting, Solomon answers the latest of the many riddles the queen of Sheba has posed him, then pauses.

Solomon: "We share a gift for statecraft, and you have tested my gift of wisdom with your riddles. But I hear that you too have a gift, that of storytelling."

Sahrazad: "Shall I tell you a story then?"

Solomon: "If it pleases you, I would much like that."

Sahrazad: "Once upon a time, there was a man who had nothing..."

The story continued for two hours, and Solomon was enthralled as he had been by nothing else before, not even by the graceful dances of his courtesans.

Sahrazad: "...vanity, he cried, all is vanity! And so it was, though others thought he had everything, he still had nothing."

The hush is palpable. Solomon is so starstruck he pays no mind to the niggling part of his brain that tries to tell him Sahrazad just told him a story about himself. His infatuation, coupled with the fact he does not believe himself to have nothing, lets him ignore this however.

Solomon: "Splendid! Beyond splendid...as are you, my dear Sahrazad. I ask your hand in marriage. Let us unite our kingdoms, as one. Together we shall reign over a matchless golden era!"

Sahrazad favors him with another small smile.

Sahrazad: "Once upon a time, a man owned many birds, of fine plumage and rare pedigrees..."

Solomon already knows he is being rejected, though he cannot imagine why. He does not interrupt the story, however, just as enthralled as before.

Sahrazad: "...and in the end, the caged nightingale never sang again."

Solomon: "Magnificent tale! But tell me - why do you see my love as a gilded cage?"

Sahrazad: "You are the wisest of men, and yet you cannot tell me?"

Mystified, Solomon shakes his head. They seem perfectly suited for each other, their wealth and intellects a match.

Sahrazad: "It is because it is not love which you bear for me."

Solomon: "What? I-"

Sahrazad: "Your lusts desire my body. Your vanity desires my intellect. What better trophy for you then a wise queen?"

Solomon: "That's not true!"

His words ring hollow, and he knows it, though he will not admit it to himself.

Sahrazad: "And why would a nightingale sing for a man who keeps many songbirds?"

Solomon: "But I am the greatest of kings! My wives part of my splendor, and through these marriages I bring others into Israel's fold!"

Sahrazad: "Vanity, vanity, all is vanity."

Solomon looks at Sahrazad astutely.

Solomon: "No man will ever be good enough for you."

Sahrazad: "Ah, it took the wisest of men only this long to figure it out."

Solomon: "My splendor and wisdom shall ever continue to wax. Soon you will see that I am good enough, and more than good enough, for you."

Sahrazad again gives him that small smile that is so well-practiced.

Sahrazad: "Once upon a time, there was a huntsman..."

Another hour passes, and Solomon finds himself alternately tearing up and gripping the edges of his throne.

Sahrazad: "...and they lived happily ever after."

Solomon lets out a breath he hadn't realized he'd been holding. Her storytelling is utterly brilliant, utterly transporting her listeners.

Solomon: "But...how does that follow our discussion?"

Sahrazad: "You hear, but do not understand. Hear again, and perhaps you will come closer to understanding. Once upon a time, there was a witch..."

Still another hour of breathtaking storytelling.

Sahrazad: "...and they lived happily ever after."

Solomon blinks tears of emotion out of his eyes, the story was that good.

Solomon: "But...these stories are happy. The man and the woman marry!"

Sahrazad: "Ah, but what happens when they marry?"

Solomon: "They live happily ever after, of course!"

Sahrazad: "And...?"

Solomon stares at her, gears whirring in his mind.

Solomon: "The story ends?"

Sahrazad: "Exactly."

Solomon: "Why is that a bad thing?"

Sahrazad: "When I am telling you a story...do you ever truly want it to end?"

Solomon opens his mouth, then closes it, considering for several moments.

Solomon: "...No. It is a beautiful experience. But all stories must have an end."

Sahrazad: "Must they? I am far older than I look, you know."

Solomon: "I, too, am learned in magic, hence I look thirty years younger than I am."

Sahrazad: "Once upon a time, a queen ruled with no king, and all was well. But one day, a sage unlike any other arrived at her court..."

Though Solomon knows he is being told a true story, if perhaps embellished in some aspects, it does not stop the delivery from being just as enthralling as always.

Sahrazad: "...and the queen became his disciple."

Solomon: "Who is this sage?"

Sahrazad: "Perhaps one day, I will tell you. Farewell, King Solomon of Golden Israel."

He is wise enough to know that no words or actions will stay her, and so sees her off with a splendid retinue and parade, as she returns to Sheba.

Life continues for Solomon. His wealth balloons still further. His harem grows constantly. In mysticism he is superb, even binding no less than 72 djinn - creatures of raw chaos from another plane - to his service, fueling his magicks with unlimited energy, such that he never need worry about a depletion of aether or other magical resource.

Yet he misses Sahrazad. She tantalizes him, the one thing he has never obtained, the jewel more precious than any other, made so in part by the fact that he does not have her...

*****

931 BC.

Solomon sits stooped on his throne. Wrinkles line his face. Although he has staved off the worst effects of age, he cannot stave off the decline brought by bleakness and longing.

Solomon: "Vanity, vanity, all is vanity..."

He looks around at the splendor surrounding him: wealth, power, wives, talismans, and they are hollow to his eyes. He sighs.

Solomon: "She was right. And without her..."

The king of Israel vanishes that night without a trace. With no other alternative, the highest officials of the court pronounce the king dead and anoint his successor, in order to prevent a panic. They know of Solomon's growing disillusionment, and do not expect him ever to return. He took nothing with him, save his rings, in which he bound the 72 djinn.

Some time later, in the land of Sheba, Solomon arrives in the royal court. He wears a fine robe, but no royal accoutrements, and so no one knows who he is - save Sahrazad, sitting on her throne, who doesn't look a day older.

Sahrazad: "The court is dismissed. Leave us."

Everyone obeys, and Solomon approaches the queen of Sheba, who is no less beautiful than he remembers...perhaps even more so. She is silent, waiting.

Solomon knows her reaction to him will depend on what he asks her. He desperately wants to ask her again to be his, or at least for him to be hers, but his vanity has been at long last tempered by wisdom, and he knows what her answer to that will be.

Solomon: "Who was the sage who taught you of a story that does not end?"

Sahrazad smiles.

Sahrazad: "He was called...an NeSorcerer."

*****

NSP: Okay, that's all I've got planned at the moment, lol. Basically, Sahrazad become NeSorcerer (NeSorceress?) at sometime during her reign, due to her appreciation for stories, despite having no prior magical affinity.

Eventually, she will pass on the mantle to Solomon. So yeah, these two posts were basically my way to make Solomon part of the NeSorcerer lineage, lol.

I do NOT intend for her to ever get romantically involved with Solomon, or probably with anyone, though if anyone wants to write something like that, I won't stop you.

39819
Site Admin
39819

The Founders Table

PostSep 10, 2019#89

In the year 999,984BC, human civilisation is just finding its footing. The fledgling city of Atlantis is being built, governed and enhanced by the diligent work of the original twelve founders – the chosen ones of the city’s deity, the WriterGod. Attracted to the beauty and wealth of the city, humans from small settlements across the Atlantean Continent begin to migrate into the city. With them come a slew of exotic ideas, goods and behaviours. While most are enriching to the young Atlantean society, some practices have struck up fierce debate amongst the original colonists. The Founders have crafted a Round Table, to be held within the recently constructed Basilica Numenaedes where they conduct the affairs of state.
 
Shadi the Poet: “I’m not convinced on this concept. Forcing people to obey rules will stifle creativity and impede freedom!”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “There are many of these outsiders who practice ritual sacrifice. Should we allow this?”
 
Shadi the Poet: “We can show them a better way!”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “And how many will have to be sacrificed before they listen? Is even one death worth such tolerance, Shadi?”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “And what if they do not listen at all? How many children are eager to learn poetry? All of them?”
 
Shadi the Poet: “But there is so much culture to be gained if we allow freedom of expression and thought. If you force people into rules, then they all become homogenous.”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “People can do what they want, within the boundaries of what is acceptable in a civilised society. I know you don’t condone murder and violence, Shadi.”
 
Shadi the Poet: “Those who would give up liberty to purchase safety would deserve neither, and lose both.”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “How… poetic. It is fortunate for you that you are alive to spout such empty platitudes, isn’t it? If you had been sacrificed to the god of - what was it again? – god of cannibalism… well the proof is right there, isn’t? They certainly don’t mince words. Unlike someone.”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Now now, let’s not be rude to Shadi. He has a higher opinion of humanity than you do, Simon.”
 
Luros the Magician: “Perhaps we should consult the WriterGod on this matter?”
 
The twelve of them fall into silence and use their minds to consult with their deity. Within the Basilica Numanaedes, the connection between a mortal and the WriterGod was much stronger and the permanent bond within each of the Founders to the god was empowered. The WriterGod once aided them in founding this city and, in return, the WriterGod needed to be praised.
 
Shadi was dressed in foreign garments that he had been donned in by a new group of immigrants from across the Atlantic Channel. All right colours and sparkles, quite strange in the eyes of the early colonists. They had taken to refined linen with thick and complicated layers to form robes of simple colours. Luros, the magician, wore such robes himself, though the black-stained linen was trimmed by delicate gold with an intricate weave of little stars and moons. Unlike most humans, who were born with sensible colours for the hair like black or blonde, Luros had been born with pastel pink hair. He kept it long and washed it every day, so it was beautiful and shiny. He liked to think his hair was a sign of his divine gift for magic, though he knew full well he was just looking for an excuse to explain why he happened to be born different to everyone else. Shadi kept saying difference was a virtue, but he always felt like the lonely outsider.
 
Shadi’s unkempt beard and long, scraggly hair was prone to criticism from several of the other Founders, who believed they should ‘look the part’, but Shadi always had a way to calm everyone down and get them to see things from his point of view. Messy body hair included. Today, however, Shadi was losing the verbal battle and, Luros was certain, it was because Shadi was not fully convinced of his own position. There was no true victory whether Shadi won the debate or not, because either path would lead to some form of detriment to the social order that was being created in Atlantis. There were days that Luros, sometimes, regretted being chosen as a Founder and wished he could join the common magicians outside, performing tricks for everyone. So much was expected of him and he doubted he would ever be able to deliver. The WriterGod held the three principles of science, words and magic in the highest of esteem – placing Luros, and Shadi, into the first estate of society’s roles and automatically making him the Priest of Magic. He couldn’t see the point. He had to admit his magic was getting better and better everyday, but he couldn’t conjure up anything better than nature provided. Orichalcum, vril and aether were all still the most potent magical forms known to Atlantis and he considered himself no expert on any of the states of magic.
 
As he sulked to himself and played with his long hair, the voice of the WriterGod came through to them. As Luros had expected, the WriterGod told them to deal with it themselves. This was the response that the deity usually gave. Luros always found it confusing to be guided into creating an entire civilisation, told to worship and then told to stop bothering him. Why the WriterGod didn’t give more directions, especially on difficult issues that could lead, even, to the deaths of humans, was beyond Luros’ understanding. The WriterGod works in mysterious ways – that was the excuse he always gave to people that asked him the same question. Shadi, of course, had an answer.
 
Shadi the Poet: “Naturally, this is an issue for the human condition and we must behave to the utmost standards.”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “Quite right! So, the new laws!”
 
Shadi the Poet: “Heeeeeey!”
 
Renat the Scientist: “I’m sorry, Shadi, but I also believe that rules and regulations are necessary. Science is, essentially, figuring out the rules by which the universe works. Why should it be different for our social interactions? And make no mistake, that is what laws do. They allow us to govern our minds. I don’t think laws would have such a negative impact on the freedoms or the creativity of people as you believe. Unless you mean the freedom to maim or the creativity to find new and inventive means of murder?”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Luros? What do you think?”
 
Luros the Magician: “Uuuuuuuh…”
 
Although all of the twelve members were of equal political clout and all opinions and thoughts were of equal value, often the opinions of the first estate were considered more important – even by the twelve themselves. There was no rules to enforce this system, it simply fell upon them naturally. Unfortunately, this only added to Luros’ burden.
 
Luros the Magician: “Well, I’m not really sure. I can understand Shadi’s point of view… but if lots of cannibal people come to live here then I guess our whole society will be a cannibal society?”
 
Shadi the Poet: “Then, it seems I have no choice but to relent!”
 
Luros the Magician: “Sorry, Shadi.”
 
Shadi lifted his long pipe from the table. It was half-a-metre long and he heated up the base.
 
Shadi the Poet: “No need to apologise. It’s not like I don’t accept the prevailing point of view. I am just lamenting the loss of freedom, whether that freedom is lost for a greater good or not is irrelevant. It is still a loss, all the same.”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “Stop being so melodramatic! I’m a lawyer anyway! It’s what I’m here for!”
 
There’s a long pause. Nobody had ever considered what Simon was supposed to be doing before. Now it seemed the WriterGod’s true intentions were made clear – though why he didn’t just tell them this in the first place was a frustration to Luros. Simon seemed satisfied with the result.
 
Luros the Magician: “Well, now that we’re on the subject of our roles – Kaesar, what is your role? I don’t think killer is a job. In fact, aren’t we about to have laws against killing?”
 
Kaesar the Killer knit his brows together and looked at Luros.
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Where does your meat come from, Luros?”
 
Luros the Magician: “Well, actually, I conjured myself a stake yesterday! With magic! Can you believe it!? Magic steak!”
 
Shadi the Poet: “Well done, Luros.”
 
Shadi was the only one impressed.
 
Tennant the Doctor: “I think Kaesar is telling us, hunting is part of his role.”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Exactly. Where do you suppose Darji gets his furs from? His leather? And now my role will expand.”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “What do you mean?”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “We will need to ensure that people follow these laws and what punishments are to be carried out. I will govern a body that will do the latter. The former will need strong people to catch those who would break the laws.”
 
Shadi the Poet: “Oh! Is this really necessary!?”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “You spend too much time with the fairies, Shadi. If a human breaks the law, they will try to escape punishment. And, better yet, we want to stop people before they break laws at all!”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Doesn’t seem like a killer would be required for that.”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “There might be. A person comes to town with a weapon and starts killing people in the street. What do we do?”
 
Shadi the Poet: “How you can think that will ever happen…”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Hopefully it won’t. But if it does. We need soldiers. We need guards. We need protectors. The people of Lemuria have a strong system of soldiers to keep everyone in line. The template is already laid out for us!”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Isn’t Lemuria constantly embroiled in war?”
 
Shadi the Poet: “I suppose then your role would really expand, wouldn’t it?”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “I will do whatever is necessary. Whatever is necessary by the laws that we all choose.”
 
He pointed a finger and swung it across the room to include everyone.
 
Kaesar the Killer: “We all want what’s best for Atlantis. When we were small, that was easy. But as we grow ever larger, it will become more complicated. We need a system to help us. WriterGod has seen to it that we should judge and govern ourselves in our mortal lives and that’s what we’re doing.”
 
Templemont the Builder: “And we must build foundations for our descendants to follow.”
 
Shadi laughed.
 
Shadi the Poet: “You just had to work in a building line in there somewhere, didn’t you?”
 
Templemont the Builder grinned from ear-to-ear.
 
Templemont the Builder: “I thought it was quite clever!”
 
Shadi the Poet: “Yes, well done Templemont.”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Although, best leave the words to Shadi, eh?”
 
Tennant rolled his eyes. Though Luros knew Tennant was a man now, he couldn’t help but see pretty eyes in the man’s face. When they had originally come to the Atlantean Continent, Tennant had been a female. But with the scientific knowledge of Renant, the magic of Luros and Tennant’s own skill with biology, she was able to transform herself into a man. He felt much more comfortable with who he was now that he was male and, therefore, much happier for it. He was very skinny and had a long neck, which hadn’t been noticeable when he wore his hair long, and he had grown thick layer of stubble across his jaw like a black carpet. For some reason, he insisted on wearing a white coat. Renat also wore a similar coat and this made everyone else begin to wonder if they were supposed to be wearing matching uniforms.
 
Tennant’s hair was now shaved close to the scalp so that the stubble ran into the hair seamlessly. He was frowning at Shadi. Tennant had come to the conclusion that smoking magic vapours was bad for your health, and even for the health of everyone around you. So Shadi’s habit of indulging in his pipe, even at the Round Table, was frustrating Tennant to a great degree. Luros wouldn’t be surprised if smoking such things was deemed illegal by Tennant if he was able to influence the laws they were about to make.
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Well now, I just want to ask about these laws. I know they’re being made to stop evil acts, like killing and eating people – though I wonder what a human pie would be like? – but can they be made to help us protect our creations?”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “What do you mean? Stop people stealing? Seems good.”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Well there’s that. But I saw, just yesterday, that Mr Smith, down the road, had stolen my recipe for hazelnut baguettes! I thought, you can’t do that! That’s my idea!”
 
Luros the Magician: “Baguettes aren’t cakes. Why were you making breads?”
 
Possipher growled at Luros through his chubby face.
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “I am Possipher the Baker! I bake more than just cakes, dammit!”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Cakes are bad for you anyway.”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Hold on, now. Just because I’m more than a cakemaker, doesn’t mean I don’t bake cakes at all!”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “You haven’t been following my diet regimen, I noticed.”
 
Possipher’s eyes bulges with guilt and he squirmed in his chair.
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “I have to sample my own dishes, else I don’t know if they’re good enough for others!”
 
Tennant leaned onto the table.
 
Tennant the Doctor: “You also need more exercise.”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Perhaps you can take about trivialities later?”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Health is not trivial! Especially for Possy!”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Don’t call me that.”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Not everyone is suited to an active lifestyle, like you Kaesar. Some people need help and guidance to remain healthy.”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “I hope you’re not saying we should have laws to tell people what they can or can’t eat?”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Why not? I guarantee, sugar kills more people than a blade.”
 
Possipher blanched at this.
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “B-B-But then nobody can eat my cakes!”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Within moderation.”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “B-b-but they’re really good!”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “…”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Really, really good!”
 
Tennant the Writer: “…”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Really, really, really good!”
 
Shadi the Poet: “Forcing people to live by your health standards is probably not going to endear you to anybody, Tennant.”
 
Tennant slowly turned his menacing gaze to Shadi and his pipe. The poet faltered for a moment, pipe frozen en route to his mouth, but he then smirked with mischief and drew a long, powerful drag on the pipe.
 
Simon the Lawyer: “We can address less important issues at a later date.”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “We are considering theft as one of the important issues, right? More stealing happens in this city than murder, right now. I gotta protect my gold!”
 
The other eleven all groan with frustration.
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Nobody cares about your pointless, shiny metal, Stirling.”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Yes! And stop giving it to people! I had one woman come and try to trade me gold for a cake a few days ago! I asked, what on earth am I supposed to do with that!? It was very embarrassing!”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “You take it from her and give her the cake. Then you can give the gold for something else you need!”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “But why!? I can just give them a cake in return for something else!”
 
Stirling narrowed her eyes at him.
 
Stirling the Merchant: “Now, I know this will be an alien concept to you, but, what if… someone doesn’t want one of your WriterGod damned cakes!”
 
Possipher gasped with horror and held a hand to his weak heart. His lower lip wobbled and he turned to look at the others for emotional support. Tennant reached over and stroked his back.
 
Tennant the Doctor: “It’s alright, Possy…”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Don’t - *sniff* - call me that…”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “Okay, we can put laws against theft right at the top too. Whether it’s gold or anything else.”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “And I want to do something I’m calling taxation!”
 
Simon frowned. He knew this session was getting way off track and Stirling had a cruel habit of running every conversation into conversations of mathematics and something she kept calling ‘economics’. He hated it.
 
Stirling the Merchant: “We are running this city on behalf of the WriterGod, right? Right now we work with people to get the stuff we need to help improve the city. But we can’t always get what we want, right? What do we do?”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Kill them.”
 
Awkward silence.
 
Kaesar the Killer: “If some settlement won’t give us the resources we need, we go and kill them and take what we need. Simple.”
 
Luros was reluctant to be the first to pipe up;
 
Luros the Magician: “Um. I thought we were about to make laws against killing people?”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Our people! If some far off settlement doesn’t follow our laws, then our laws don’t apply to them. We can kill them all.”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “Barbaric.”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “Even I’m a bit perturbed, Kaesar.”
 
Kaesar the Killer: “Fine. Whatever. You asked a question, I answered it.”
 
Kaesar was a well-built man with strapping muscles. He liked to have them on display so his body could intimidate others into behaving when in his presence. He was a serious man with a very practical mind. If a problem presented, he sought the best solution to that problem – morality and philosophy were secondary concerns. He was a man of action. He often worked with Templemont for construction purposes, crafting physical works to great affect in improving the wealth of food. Fisheries, hunting lodges, hunting tools, protective walls. When monstrous creatures threatened the city, it was Kaesar who was first into battle to protect everyone and he did so without ever asking for respect, praise or wealth. He considered it his duty to keep everyone safe, well fed and happy. He was willing to do bad things so that others wouldn’t have to. Many were often weary over his status as ‘killer’ but he was never evil or cruel and never revelled in death. He was secure in the knowledge that mortals would go on to the next life with the WriterGod. Death was not the end and was nothing to fear. When he reached the WriterGod’s side, he would be satisfied that he had died protecting the WriterGod’s chosen people.
 
He kept his head bald. Long hair was often a liability in battle. As was any body hair. In a wrestling match, armpit hair could be yanked out. A trick he remembered using a few times. He had quite gotten as far as grabbing nose hairs yet.
 
Stirling the Merchant: “Well, yes… killing and taking resources won’t be necessary if we use taxation! The people give us stuff.”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “In the laws?”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “Yes!”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “Why would they agree to do that?”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “If they don’t, we can’t provide adequate services. For example, right now the doctors are paid directly by patients. But what if we paid the doctors? People pay us, we pay the doctors.”
 
Tennant the Doctor: “And then people who cannot pay a doctor can still be treated!”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “Yes! Wait, I mean, no! We can’t be giving free stuff away, come on!”
 
Renat the Scientist: “How would people pay us? We need a lot of building supplies, some food supplies but the clockmakers cannot pay us lots of clocks.”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “GOLD!”
 
There was a lot more groaning. Except from Simon.
 
Simon the Lawyer: “We get people to pay us gold. Then we use that gold to pay someone for their bricks. They pay us the gold we just gave them. Free bricks!”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “That’s not quite right…”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “People pay us gold, we pay doctors gold, people get treated. People pay us gold, we pay fishermen gold, people get fish. It’d all… all be free! That’s genius!”
 
Stirling grinned.
 
Stirling the Merchant: “Well, yeeeeeeees~! I am a bit of a genius, I must say.”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “I can see a lot of… craft would need to go into this. There would need to be rules. Laws. Lots and lots of regulation. Taxation. A wonderful, wonderful word.”
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Does this mean I will need to accept that heavy metal when I sell a cake!?”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “Yeeeeeeeeeeeeees~~!”
 
Her enthusiasm was infectious, apparently, because Simon was also grinning, and he never grinned.
 
Li the Toolmaker: “If you are going to use gold to trade, it will need to come in exact measurements. You can just hand over any old piece of gold and expect it to be worth the same amount as a small or large piece.”
 
Stirling clapped her hands together excitedly.
 
Li the Toolmaker: “I could craft them into, say, circles. Each circle would be precisely measured to contain the exact same amount of gold as the next. So one circle is always worth the same amount of gold. Then you can measure the worth of something. One cake is equal to one gold circle. Two cakes, two circles. But a whole cow, maybe that’s worth several circles.”
 
Possipher was affronted.
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Why would a smelly, old cow be worth more than one of my delicious cakes!?”
 
Stirling the Merchant: “Well, by weight alone... but, it doesn’t matter, because worth would also include talent and skill! The better someone’s cake, the more they can charge! Mrs Smith’s cake might be worth just one circle, but yours is worth two! Or three! Or more!”
 
Possipher mobbed his brow, placated.
 
Possipher the Cakemaker: “Well, that’s only natural. Of course.”
 
Li the Toolmaker: “Of course, the circles should be embossed with something to make it clear the circle is our circle. An Atlantean circle. Maybe a picture of the WriterGod?”
 
They all considered.
 
Luros the Magician: “What, uh, does the WriterGod look like, again?”
 
Simon the Lawyer: “How about a picture of the grand temple instead?”
 
Li the Toolmaker: “That could work.”
 
Li was writing notes down. Atlantean writing consisted of complicated drawings to create meaning. Some pictures were phonetic symbols, representing certain sounds, while others were literal, albeit stylistic, drawings of objects or actions. When a mistake was made, there was even a glyph that meant ‘please forgive the mistake I just made’. Li wasn’t the best writer around and so her parchment was quickly covered in a lot of the ‘please forgive the mistake I just made’ glyphs.
 
Li was a short woman with a face that always appeared to be angry, even when she was happy. Her body was small and slim. Some were surprised that she could craft weapons in a blacksmith with such a small frame, but she was not one for crafting such basic constructs. Swords were far below her skill level. Her fingers were used on the fine crafting skills required for intricate and complex devices. Almost every day, Renat had a new brainstorm of ideas and many of them resulted in incredibly sophisticated prototypes of machines and gadgets from the nimble fingers of Li. Her skin was bronzed yellow and her black hair short and tatty. She worked extensively with Darji, the tailor, to create smart and practical work-friendly clothes that were soon used by craftworkers across the city.
 
Simon the Lawyer: “Seems we have a lot of work cut out for us today! Laws upon laws!”
 
He rubbed his hands eagerly.
 
Simon the Lawyer: “Let us get down to business.”
 
 
The framework of Atlantean society was fashioned by the Twelve Founders and continued to be built upon by the ever-growing city. It was unlikely that any of them could have truly imagined how their work would grow into an empire that embraced complex laws and used their concept of gold to create the world’s first currency. The Atlantean circle was the predominant currency until its demise, even when rival nations, such as the lands of Lemuria and Antediluvia, tried their own currency.
 
As pure as the Founders may have intended their systems to be, laws and money would become the bedrock for corruption within Atlantean society. There was always someone willing, and able, to take advantage of the system and bend it for their own gains. Those in power used the law to exert their dominance, while those seeking power used their wealth to close the gap.
 
Centuries later, Hippothoon was studying the mechanics of these systems. It was clear to him how they had been perverted but he couldn’t understand why nobody else saw the problems. Ultimately it was Addai Theos, his mentor and guardian, who pointed out that only those affected by these problems will voice their concerns. Those who are not affected will remain quiet. It’s not their problem.
 
Hippothoon realised he was much the same. He was affected by the corruption and contempt of those in power, so he had to act. Would he have ever even considered these problems if his mother had not been murdered?
 
The legacy of the Founders had been watered down and they were the most corrupt in all the land. Whatever honour their forefathers once had, their descendants had lost. The only reason they were entitled to their position on the Atlantean Council, which was the term now used to refer to the twelve men and women in charge of the land, was their supposed connection to the WriterGod. And yet nobody, save those twelve, had never had confirmation that the WriterGod acknowledges this hereditary claim. There were no documents that Hippothoon could find to suggest that a seat on the council was ever meant to be passed from parent-to-child. It was merely tradition, Hippothoon was certain.
 
The best way to claim his vengeance was to bring down the Atlantean Council and expose their misdeeds so that even those with no steak in the issues could not be left ignorant. He couldn’t simply kill them all, as Addai had suggested. He knew enough of Atlantean history to understand that the culture was built on rules. There had to be legitimacy behind his actions. He had to use the law against them. He would have to begin small and build up. He would deal with his treacherous grandfather, Cercyon, before he would then deal with Cercyon’s wife, the councillor, who gave him the power to behave as he did. Of all the Atlantean Councillors, she was the greatest threat against his efforts to expose them. It would not be the Lawyer. The Lawyer could only act according to the laws. The Lawyer was regulated by the written word. And that was were the battleground for legitimacy had to be fought. It was the written word and the well-written speeches that would draw the crowds to his side. Or to theirs. She was the Poet. She was the writer. The songwriter. The master orator. Her words brought the hardest of hearts to emotional turmoil. He had to win the hearts and minds of Atlanteans.

King of Atlantis

PostSep 12, 2019#90

Hippothoon: “Cercyon—Lord and Master Cercyon – he takes everything from you. He takes your money. He takes your food. He takes your children to serve. And who does all of it go to? To Atlantis! Your money becomes Atlantean money! Your food becomes Atlantean food! Your children serve the Atlantean military machine! And what do we, Antediluvians, get in return for our sacrifices? Nothing. We gain nothing. What have the Atlanteans ever done for us!?”
 
There was a moment of silence as people actually thought about this rhetorical question.
 
Random Guy: “Aqueducts!”
 
Hippothoon blinked.
 
Hippothoon: “What?”
 
Random Guy: “They gave us aqueducts.”
 
Hippothoon: “Right, well, except for aqueducts, what have the Atlanteans ever done for us!?”
 
Random Guy: “The sanitation!”
 
Hippothoon: “Alright, yes. They built the sewers too. Aqueducts and sanitation are the two things the Atlanteans have done.”
 
Random Guy: “Roads!”
 
Hippothoon: “Well, okay! Yes. But the roads go without saying!”
 
Random Guy: “Irrigation!”
 
Hippothoon: “Right…”
 
Random Guy: “Medicine!”
 
Hippothoon: “Yes…”
 
Random Guy: “Education!”
 
Hippothoon: “Uh…”
 
Drunk Random Guy: “The wine!”
 
Random Guy: “Aye!!”
 
Hippothoon: “Wine… right…”
 
Random Guy: “Public bathhouses!”
 
Hippothoon: “Really?”
 
Random Guy: “And it’s safe to walk the streets at night!”
 
Hippothoon: “Good grief! Okay, fine! Except for the aqueducts, the sanitation, the roads, the irrigation, the medicine, the education, the wine, the bathhouses and order on the streets… what have the Atlanteans ever done for us!?”
 
Another pause.
 
Random Guy: “Brought peace?”
 
Hippothoon: “Oh fuck off!”
 
Some of the Antediluvians shove the know-it-all.
 
Hippothoon: “My grandfather, Cercyon, has abused his position. He takes wealth and power without providing for the people. How many of you have lost, or know of loss, for petty crimes? You talk of the benefits from Atlantis, but have you seen Atlantis? Antediluvia is a wasteland by comparison. Yet they still take from us! If they are so rich and powerful and want us to follow them and make us their subjects, then they have the responsibility of provision!”
 
There were a lot of consenting murmurs. A lot of people agreed they had heard of the wealth and beauty of the capital city. What they had given to Antediluvia was merely the scraps from their plate.
 
Hippothoon: “As a member state of the Atlantean Empire, aren’t we entitled to the same lifestyle and privileges as Atlantis itself? Why are Antediluvians to be treated as peasants?”
 
And so ran Hippothoon’s rhetoric. He travelled Antediluvian cities, where the people were most oppressed by regulations and corrupt officials and stirred up the sentiment of the desperate. It wasn’t long before they flocked to his cause. A rightful heir to Antediluvia that actually cared for its people. A powerful sentiment that Hippothoon used to gain himself followers. He and his inner cadre were constantly avoiding the authorities and their rallies were often ended in bloodshed as police would descend upon them in anger.
 
But the momentum couldn’t be stopped, and before long Hippothoon was the leader of the Liberation Army. Addai Theos became an official commander of the army and trained Antediluvians to harness their physical strength. At this time, it was rare for an Atlantean to join as the issue was largely presented as an Antediluvian rebellion, but those that did, recognised the cause to unsettle the political establishment that abused their authority over the common people.
 
The ragtag army began to ‘free’ various, small settlements throughout Antediluvia. Only when their territory claimed half of the total landmass of the nation, did Atlantis begin a greater effort of retaliation. Cercyon was humiliated before the Atlantean Council for his inability to contain the situation and was, eventually, demoted. His wife retained her position, though she, too, was embarrassed and the Atlantean elite openly criticised her and even questioned the wisdom of magistrates being wed to councillors.
 
This, Hippothoon understood, was his true victory. The cracks were showing. The establishment was under question.
 
Their victories drew interest from outside parties. Soldiers from the Lemurian nations signed up, mostly because their own wars had dried up for a time. A small group of nacaal people, from the distant and ancient Kingdom of Mu, arrived. They refused to take part in combat unless absolutely necessary, but they worked on providing health and agricultural benefits – the likes of which outstripped even the Atlanteans. The Kingdom of Mu was a massive land filled with magical marvels and their populous revolved their ideology around nature and being a part of the natural world, rather than subduing it. Their innate power of nature magic, which didn’t rely on the abundance of aether, meant that their lands were rich with life and their ability to help and nurture life was insurmountable.
 
The true victory came when several military officials deserted their stations within the Atlantean military and sided with the liberation. Bolstered by these forces, holding the moral high ground and the Atlantean forces in disarray, Antediluvia was declared independent.
 
Hippothoon, however, still did not have his vengeance.  Cercyon had fled to his wife’s side, and she still held power within the Atlantean Council.
 
He made promises of great riches to any of the Lemurian nobles that aided him and so large armies from across the world came to join him in his conquest of Atlantis. Their combined forced swept over Atlantis with ease. The great city was underdefended and underprepared. Never did the Atlanteans expect that their own, beloved, city would be attacked directly. Wars were such a distant thing to the population of Atlantis. Hippothoon, backed up by Addai Theos and several other leaders of the liberation, marched into the Basilica Numenades to confront the Atlantean Council.
 
Within the meeting chamber, eight of them stood. The rest had fled before the city was even under siege. They were placed in gaol, but still Hippothoon did not have his revenge. Cercyon and his wife were not there.
 
Hippothoon was originally declared Chancellor of Atlantis and he began to format the political system. His supporters were all granted great roles within the government and many nobles lost their titles and wealth. Only the most corrupt of them were executed, the majority were imprisoned. The eight were all doomed to gaol for life, though none were deemed evil enough to be slain. All executions were to be as ‘humane’ as possible – instead death without pain or suffering. Many within his government argued against the death penalty under any circumstance, but Hippothoon knew some changes would take longer to enact and many wanted to ‘see justice’.
 
In time, several of the missing twelve were hunted down. For their cowardice, they were executed. And yet, still, Cercyon and his wife remained elusive.
 
Years went by. Hippothoon was so popular that the people made him king of Atlantis and he donned the ceremonial title of ‘Atlas’. He commissioned the construction of a new palace that was dubbed Edras Magnaulam. It doubled up as a political residence for visiting ambassadors or leaders from across the world. To commemorate the contribution of Antediluvia, a great golden gate was constructed along the eastern shore of the Atlantean Continent. A massive bridge was extended from the shore to the Antediluvian Continent, where a second golden gate stood. This Golden Gate Bridge became a means for people of the Atlantean Empire to travel between lands quickly and efficiently and celebrated the unified empire under its new monarchy.
 
Decades later, news reached the king. He received the letter from his wife, who he had met many years ago and bore children together. She had once been a shop clerk when he happened to meet her, and they fell in love. Atlas was determined not to be bound by regulations or popular opinion on who he could marry. Their eldest child was set to become queen after the death of Atlas, while the younger children were partially prepared for the throne, should the worst occur, but they were expected to join the labour force in whatever role they desired.
 
The letter was signed – Cercyon.
 
Atlas felt a darkness wall up around him and his wife exited the room, seeing this was a private moment.
 
“My grandson,
 
I admire everything you have achieved, and there is much praise to be lavished upon you. Had I even known of your existence when you were a boy, I may have raised you in my own household. –”
 
Atlas: “Or killed me.”
 
“You were right to blame me for your mother’s death. I acted rashly. I couldn’t accept that she would engage in incest.”
 
Atlas: “Forced.”
 
“If I could take back what I did, I would. And any other crimes I may have committed, I would repent. I am old and I am dying. I am alone. If you would find it in your heart to visit me one time, it would give this dying man some degree of happiness.
 
-Cercyon”
 
Atlas hesitated. He was not a cruel man by nature and the plea struck him to the quick.
 
But now, he could finally have some vengeance.
 
He dropped the letter onto the open fire and watched it burn.
 
 
He never did, however, find the woman responsible for Cercyon’s power. The woman who betrayed her step-daughter and wallowed in the corruption of the council.
 
She had ditched Cercyon as soon as they left Atlantis. She plied her way into Lemuria, where she became a writer. She remarried, bore more children, but she never admitted to anyone, even her new family, who she had once been. She never published her work on a grand scale, ensuring her name was only famous enough to live comfortably. Only after her death did she become a celebrated Lemurian writer, as many creative types were, and her name was stamped on the books taught in schools – Fayd.

Traitor in the Longhouse

PostSep 21, 2019#91

Aman Tabiz crouched his haunches and fell silent as the seer closed her eyes to view the immediate future. Other members of the Egypt Twats were scattered across the landscape, all laying low and waiting for the sign – a bird call that they had all been practising.
 
The young woman started writing on her papyrus, though her eyes were still closed. Words scrawled across the grainy, brown sheet and the ink frequently blotched into a large stain. It didn’t matter. So long as the first word of every sentence was intact.
 
The woman finally stopped and her eyes snapped open. She gasped for air and started panting from the sudden rush of oxygen. Her eyes had been rolled back in her head, came back around but they couldn’t focus on the real world for some time. Aman considered reaching out with a reassuring hand to help her settle and form a connection to reality. He knew it would help. But he couldn’t muster the compassion.
 
Instead, he waited silently. He watched his breath drift in the cold air. The land was on the cusp of Winter, but the ice and snow had only taken root upon the higher vestiges of the mountain. The mountain went unnamed and was usually referred to by the settlement that was nestled upon its side – Otreriana. The Amazons stalked these lands and their hunters were especially dangerous women, prepared with hunting tools and weapons. Aman, however, had honed his craft of stealth since joining the Egypt Twats under the mentorship of its former leaders. Theft was their primary purpose and theft required stealth of all means – both the art of being unseen and the art of being unseen whilst seen. Here, however, the former was the goal. There would be no way for any of the men in his company to disguise themselves as Amazons, though one of them had suggested shoving melons down his shirt.
 
As he watched, he spotted two Amazon hunters on the prowl. They were distracted by game, somewhere nearby, and from their straining, he assumed they spotted a small mammal – probably a rabbit. In his skin he could almost sense the other gang members suddenly alert and ready to strike.
 
Across his shoulders he wore a rugged cloak that was dirty and covered in patches of moss – all with the intention of being disguised into the landscape. His muscles started to ache from the strain of remaining so still.
 
The women crept near to him. He wondered if they sensed something was wrong in the location. Their interest in the rabbit kept them from prying too closely, though his hand was still grasping the hilt of his dagger. He reckoned he could quickly kill one of them, should they tread too close, but Amazons were no slouching guardsmen of Cairo. These women were the ultimate warriors on the planet. He might take one by surprise, but the second would have a knife in his back the instant he revealed himself and for all his skill, he wouldn’t be able to out-manoeuvre her and her friend.
 
He would have grit his teeth, but he didn’t even want to risk that tiny movement.
 
He tried to mentally slow his own heartbeat.
 
And then they were gone in a sudden rush. They gave chase to their unfortunate prey.
 
Aman let out a breath. He was impressed that the seer had managed to remain so quiet. He turned to see her lying in the grass, watching him. Her eyes were small and ringed with deep black. She always appeared weak, apathetic and lethargic but he knew that she was simply tired of life, despite being so young.
 
Herophile: “Are they gone?”
 
Aman nodded.
 
Herophile: “It would have ended very badly if they found us.”
 
Aman: “I don’t need to be a seer to figure that out.”
 
Herophile: “You do, actually.”
 
Aman: “What?”
 
Herophile: “You only suspect. You believe. I know.”
 
She rolled over, turning from him, as though she would go to sleep, evidently bored of speaking with him. He grumbled about her being ungrateful.
 
He had found her in a small farming village in the region of Ionia, on the western coastline of Anatolia. The Aegean Sea marked that coast and across a narrow channel was the Greek island of Chios, where Aman had a secret port for his newly expanding organisation. North of Chios and Ionia was the island of Lesbos, still a member nation of the Greek States, and further north than that was Troy on the short peninsula of northern Anatolia. The Ionians were often at war with the more powerful Hittite Empire, which longed to conquer the land, but Herophile’s tiny town was far from the wars and fighting. Yet her heritage was not of the Ionian people but of India, where she had been born. She didn’t know her parents, but she knew they had banished her as a small child. Sailors dumped her in Ionia and there she lived. She was adopted by a friendly fisherman and taught in his craft. As the brownest person in the town and a foreigner, she was treated as an outcast by many and given the name “Matsyagandha” – meaning ‘she who smells like fish’ - by one of the shop owners that could speak the Indian tongue. Her adoptive father, however, called her by the Grecian name Herophile but only he ever used that name for her.
 
Aman: “Tell me of the traitor, Herophile.”
 
She didn’t like Aman at all, but at least he used her Grecian name and not the cruel nickname everyone else used. Even in the Egypt Twats, she was called Matsyagandha.
 
Herophile: “She will arrive soon.”
 
Aman: “Are you certain?”
 
Herophile bristled.
 
Herophile: “Yes!”
 
She wasn’t a very good seer, but she didn’t want to be constantly verified. She didn’t know why she had the gift of foresight, though she always suspected it was the reason for her being banished from India. Most of her prophecies came during sleep, often waking her up several times during the night. When she deliberately forced visions to come to her, she could only see within a single hour.
 
Aman: “Did you get her name?”
 
Herophile rolled back over and held up the papyrus. She didn’t get up and just held it out. Aman shuffled his way over and snatched it from her hand. He looked at the poem but ignored the majority of it. Nobody understood why, but many of her prophecies that relied on words, rather than sights, were acrostic. He looked at the first letter of each word to find the name of the traitor…
 
 
Hippolyta: “To Hell with all of you.”
 
Hippolyta snarled as she drank from her goblet. The goblet had been stolen from a Greek caravan just a few weeks ago. More and more exquisite goods had been pilfered since Hippolyta became queen of the Amazons and the tribe had grown greedy on their successes and growth. Hippolyta the Great, or Hippolyta the Awesome as she liked to call herself, was revered amongst the Amazons for leading them on a path of glory and victory. The new recruits practically idolised her as an otherworldly being and her status as daughter to Ares was no longer a stigma but an honour – The Daughter of War.
 
Nakia: “Lyta, you shouldn’t be so rude.”
 
Hippolyta: “You can bugger off too.”
 
Antiope: “At least she didn’t swear this time.”
 
Hippolyta: “Fuck you, nitwit.”
 
Antiope: “So rude!”
 
Pentheseleia: “Yeah! Don’t say nitwit! That’s terrible!”
 
Both Pentheseleia and Hippolyta snorted and chuckled.
 
Antiope: “Buffoons.”
 
Antiope was short-sighted so she couldn’t see things further away very clearly, but she could make out the figures of her two older siblings. Hippolyta, the grand queen, was upon her throne while Pentheseleia was sat on the step in at the feet of the queen. Nakia ibn-bint Ismat ibn-bint al-Almasi, commonly called “mammi” by the girls, was hovering around them like an aethereal spirit.
 
Nakia: “Play nice, girls.”
 
She wagged her finger at Hippolyta and Pentheseleia. Hippolyta scowled in response, while Pentheseleia rolled her eyes.
 
Antiope: “What will you do, Lyta?”
 
Hippolyta: “I already told you what will be done. She will come here and be one of us.”
 
Pentheseleia turned on her brief ally and resumed her offence against the queen.
 
Pentheseleia: “You’re a fool, Lyta. She cannot be allowed here!”
 
Bremusa: “She is an Amazon born of a man! She is an abomination!”
 
Hippolyta shot from her chair, almost kicking her sister over in the process, and thrust a finger at her long ex-friend.
 
Hippolyta: “You have no right to speak! You dare call my daughter anything but revered princess and I’ll have your hide!”
 
Bremusa was stood at the back of her room, her arms folded. She set her face into a grim mask but remained silent as bid by her queen.
 
Pentheseleia: “I’m sorry, Lyta, but Bree is right. Your daughter is not one of us.”
 
Hippolyta: “I am an Amazon born of man! Have I not achieved greatness? Have I not brought infamy and glory to Amazon kind? The men of Greece, the men of Hattusa, the men of Scythia – do they not tremble in fear and awe of my name!?”
 
Everyone was quiet, save for the tinkle of wine as Nakia poured it into a goblet as though oblivious to the drama around her.
 
Hippolyta: “And now you spit on me and mine!? How dare you! You ungrateful bastards!”
 
Pentheseleia: “It is not our way, sister! You know that! You want us to violate everything we have ever believed in. Allowing concession once was a great undertaking among the women, but to grant it twice? And what of next time? How many more ,ale-born children will you squeeze out?”
 
Hippolyta: “You miserable little—!”
 
Hippolyta thrust forward and punched her younger sister across the jaw. Pentheseleia was not born of Ares and did not possess the girdle of divine magic; she went down like a sack of potatoes.
 
Nakia: “Lyta! That was uncalled for!”
 
Hippolyta: “Didn’t you hear her, mammi!?”
 
Nakia: “So she hurt your precious little feelings with words?”
 
Nakia held out the goblet to Hippolyta.
 
Nakia: “Grow up, child.”
 
Hippolyta: “Oh great. I might have know you’d be against me too.”
 
She snatched the goblet.
 
Antiope: “No one is against you, Lyta. Everyone wants what’s best for Otreriana. I mean, I don’t even care about this. I think it’s petty.”
 
Antiope had grown to be, perhaps, the most studious Amazon that ever lived. She shied away from battle and fighting and instead she sought to expand her knowledge of the world. Initially she was branded a weakling and a coward but after her knowledge proved most useful in conducting wars in foreign lands, people stopped pushing her into combat and let her alone.
 
Bremusa: “Even the scrawny one understands what’s best.”
 
Though they still called her a weakling.
 
 
Hippolyta: “I don’t care what any of you think. I don’t care what any Amazon thinks. We swell our numbers with male-born every day. There are more women here born of men than of si’la. It isn’t fair to single out my daughter just because her mother is Amazonian. It doesn’t make any sense!”
 
Bremusa: “It is what the people want, Hippolyta!”
 
Bremusa had been forced to stop calling the queen by her close-name several years ago. She was, however, still able to call her by name instead of title.
 
Hippolyta: “Am I not the queen, Bremusa? Am I not the one who makes the decisions here? I decide what is best!”
 
She chugged the wine in her goblet and threw it across the room. The silence was only broken by the clatter of metal on stone. She slowly stomped over to the throne and fell into it, slumping down with a sour grimace on her face.
 
Hippolyta: “I have sacrificed her for too long. I gave her up so that I could lead the Amazons in victory. I have taken us into legend. And all I ask, in return, is that I am united with my own child.”
 
Antiope: “We have so much. You have taken so much from the men of the world. How are you not content? One child that you barely even remember?”
 
Hippolyta: “Do you see any other child among us? Do you see my babies around the longhouse? Do you see me with my si’la wife?”
 
These rhetorical questions hung in the air without response. Many great si’la had pledged to become spouse of Hippolyta but she wanted none of them. Many knew Hippolyta was ‘infected’ with lust for men, but many couldn’t believe that the queen of Otreriana would live her days without progeny.
 
Bremusa: “This is a waste of time.”
 
Hippolyta: “Yes, it is. So, bugger off.”
 
Nakia handed her another goblet of wine, which she drank from immediately.
 
Antiope: “Maybe she’s had enough to drink?”
 
Now her older sisters ganged up on her again;
 
Pentheseleia: “There’s no such thing!”
 
Hippolyta: “The alcohol is the only thing keeping me from kicking you off the balcony, Antiope.”
 
Antiope: “There is no balcony, genius.”
 
Hippolyta: “Then I’ll have one built. And kick you off it. It shall be named Antiope’s Drop.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Hahaha-ow!”
 
She dubbed her sore jaw and frowned at Hippolyta.
 
Pentheseleia: “You didn’t have to hit me. If you want to fight, we do it in the arena. You don’t sucker punch me.”
 
Hippolyta shrugged in resignation.
 
Hippolyta: “You’re right. Sorry about that.”
 
Antiope: “Oh good. We’re all calm again. I can get Melanippe in here.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Noooooo! Why do you want to do that? Leave her playing with her toys, or whatever she’s doing. We’re drinking and arguing.”
 
Antiope: “I thought we were finished with the arguing at least?”
 
Bremusa: “You think the queen would give in so easily?”
 
Hippolyta: “I haven’t agreed with this treacherous twat in a long time, but now I do. I shall not give in. My daughter will join us here. Her letter cut me to the heart. She wants to know me. She wants to know us.”
 
She thrust her goblet at Pentheseleia, spilling wine on the floor.
 
Hippolyta: “Your niece wants to know you, Leia!”
 
Antiope: “I hope not! I don’t know how the men-lovers do it, but incest is not wincest here!”
 
A long silence followed.
 
Antiope: “Oh. You meant just… like to know not… know… I see now. My mistake.”
 
Hippolyta: “Someone call the master craftsman. We have a balcony to be built.”
 
Antiope whined;
 
Antiope: “It’s any easy mistake to make!”
 
Pentheseleia: “Make sure it’s on the eastern side of the longhouse, there’s a steep slope down the mountain.”
 
Hippolyta: “Yes! Make a note of it.”
 
Antiope stamped her foot.
 
Antiope: “Neither of you are funny!”
 
Hippolyta looked at Pentheseleia with exaggerated surprise.
 
Hippolyta: “I wasn’t trying to be funny! Were you, Leia?”
 
Pentheseleia: “Not I! I just thought we should do the job properly! Throwing people from balconies is a serious business. Best get it right the first time.”
 
Antiope: “Assholes!”
 
The two older women laughed.
 
Pentheseleia: “She swears!”
 
Hippolyta: “What a horrible girl! Swearing at her own sisters like that!”
 
Pentheseleia: “She’ll be calling us bastards next!”
 
Hippolyta: “Or fuckers!”
 
Pentheseleia: “Or even, dare I say, a couple of cunts!?”
 
Antiope: “You are!”
 
Pentheseleia: “We are what?”
 
Antiope: “You know!”
 
Hippolyta: “We don’t know. You’ll have to say it for us to know.”
 
Antiope swelled her chest.
 
Antiope: “YOU Fffff…”
 
Hippolyta: “What was that?”
 
She twirled her wrist before cupping her ear towards the younger sibling.
 
Antiope struggled with the anger and the need to ‘be good’.
 
Nakia: “Stop provoking your sister.”
 
Nakia slid behind Antiope and gave her a peck on the cheek. Antiope was already twenty years old, but Hippolyta and Pentheseleia treated her like she was twelve. Nakia moved on to give Bremusa a goblet of wine.
 
Hippolyta: “But it’s so eeeeeeeeasy!”
 
Pentheseleia: “We’re her older sisters. We’re obliged to bully her.”
 
Antiope: “Mammi!”
 
Nakia: “You know they’re trying to annoy you, Antiope. Don’t let them.”
 
Antiope turned from Nakia, who gave the goblet the quiet woman at the back, and glared at the older women.
 
Antiope: “Fuckers.”
 
They bellowed with laughter.
 
Nakia: “I hope I didn’t hear you swearing over there, Antiope?”
 
Pentheseleia ran over to Antiope and dragged her into a firm embrace, still laughing.
 
Pentheseleia: “Finally you are a woman!”
 
Antiope was still annoyed, but happy to be getting praise and hugs instead of being teased, so she just hung there in her sister’s arms like an annoyed cat.
 
Hippolyta: “Our brave sister, Antiope! On your honour, sister!”
 
Pentheseleia: “On your honour, Antiope!”
 
Pentheseleia thrust a goblet into Antiope’s hand and they held up their cups. Antiope resigned herself and raised the cup too. They all drank; even Bremusa at the back.
 
Antiope: “Your both so stupid.”
 
Antiope smothered a smile.
 
Hippolyta: “Come and sit with me, Antiope.”
 
She patted her lap and Antiope sat there. Antiope was tiny when compared to her sisters. She was lithe, forced to perform training with all the other Amazon girls, but never bulked up like most women. When sitting in her sister’s lap, she did look twelve.
 
Hippolyta was the senior of Antiope by fifteen years, almost old enough to be her legitimate mother. Pentheseleia was just two years older than Antiope, yet she behaved like she was closer in age to Hippolyta.
 
Antiope never felt very close to either of them, seeing them as so unlike herself and much to bawdy to tolerate for long. She did respect them and love them and longed for their approval, but she couldn’t like them. She admitted she felt safe with Hippolyta watching over her and she knew that her half-sister had always had a presence throughout her young life. She doubted she would be so valued by the raiders if not for Hippolyta.
 
Pentheseleia had bright purple hair, a shade towards plum, and kept it in a loose, thick plait. Antiope, similarly, had purple hair but she kept it shorn short to the chin, where it flicked out. Hippolyta’s blonde hair singled her out against the other two sisters.
 
Hippolyta put her chin on Antiope’s shoulder.
 
Antiope: “You agree with me, don’t you?”
 
Antiope: “I guess so. I don’t see why people are making such a fuss over something so trivial.”
 
Pentheseleia gave an exasperated sigh.
 
Pentheseleia: “Because it’s tradition. You can’t just tell people to fuck off and ignore their wishes, even if you’re queen. Even if you don’t like their wishes!”
 
Bremusa: “If you really want your daughter here, you have to convince the people first. Even if it takes years.”
 
Hippolyta: “How many more years must I wait? How many? How many before my daughter can be treated fairly? Is she guilty of some crime? Did she commit some offence? No. Her mere existence is the fault. The circumstance of her birth. Something she had no say in!”
 
Bremusa: “She didn’t, but you did! It’s your fault! You should have thought of all this before you became the whore of that king!”
 
Hippolyta’s rage swelled again, and her arms tightened around Antiope.
 
Antiope: “Don’t crush me!”
 
Bremusa: “Forget it. I’m going. I’m tired of talking to an immovable stone.”
 
Hippolyta: “Likewise! Go on! Get out!”
 
Bremusa shook her head and left the longhouse. She intended to go and see to the wyverns. Crixus would have been fed by now, but he enjoyed extra treats from his beloved rider. But later, she would have other pressing matters to attend to.
 
Nakia: “You need to stop being bitter with Bree.”
 
Hippolyta: “She left my daughter behind. She did all of this to me. She’s lucky I didn’t behead her.”
 
Nakia: “And that is no way to talk about her either.”
 
Nakia came over with more wine and as she poured the goblets full, she reached out and patted Hippolyta’s cheek. Her daughter of another father.
 
Nakia: “You are beautiful, strong and brave, my little Lyta. But you need to understand that others are slower to change than you. They didn’t all get trapped in a foreign city. Many of the new women, born of men, would agree with you. But they will not stand up to the si’la-born. They even think of themselves as outsiders, still settling in. It’s not their place to impose their thoughts on the culture here. Bremusa was right. If you want our dear Creusa to come here, you need to change the minds of the old guard.”
 
Hippolyta: “But I shouldn’t have to! I am queen!”
 
Nakia: “Whether you think you should or shouldn’t have to, is irrelevant. The fact is, you do have to.”
 
Hippolyta groaned and leaned her head back on her chair and the family fell into quiet. Hippolyta was sleepy from the wine and tired of arguing with everyone.
 
Hippolyta: “What do you think she looks like?”
 
They all consider that.
 
Antiope: “She’s obviously going to be beautiful.”
 
Pentheseleia: “I bet she looks like me!”
 
Hippolyta: “You!? How!? I look like our mother!”
 
Pentheseleia: “I just know it. I’m the more attractive in the family, so it seems only right she should get my good looks.”
 
Hippolyta: “Antiope, get off me so I can kick her ass.”
 
Antiope rolled her eyes but didn’t move.
 
Pentheseleia: “You’d have to catch me first. I’m going out tonight.”
 
Hippolyta smirked.
 
Hippolyta: “Who is it this time, eh?”
 
Pentheseleia: “The same girl I’ve been with for weeks! What do you take me for, huh?”
 
Antiope: “They were wrestling in the council chamber the other day.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Tattle-tale!”
 
Hippolyta: “Well, as long as you won, I don’t care.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Ha!”
 
Hippolyta: “Don’t show me up by losing!”
 
Pentheseleia flexed her arm.
 
Pentheseleia: “Have you seen these arms? I must be the strongest Amazon ever.”
 
Hippolyta: “Those little apples? You must be joking.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Don’t judge by how they appear! There’s hidden strength in these bad girls!”
 
Antiope: “It doesn’t work that way, Leia. Bigger muscles mean more strength. That’s basic biology. Muscle mass—”
 
Pentheseleia: “I’m going to build that balcony myself.”
 
She turned to leave but stuck her middle finger at Antiope before she exited the room. She would meet her lover at the tavern near the longhouse, knowing the mead was sweet and frothy. Later that night, however, she had another urgent matter she had to attend to – not that her sisters could know of it.
 
Antiope: “I should go too. I need to check on Melanippe.”
 
Hippolyta: “Okay. I should check on her too. I’ll go read her a story tonight.”
 
Antiope: “That’s a great idea. She should learn to read, like you taught me.”
 
Hippolyta: “Maybe, but I’m worried she’s going up to be too soft.”
 
Antiope: “Like me?”
 
Hippolyta: “Exactly. One weed in the family is enough! I need to get her punching some faces. That little bastard at her school, whatever her name is, could use a good beat down from our Mel. I’ll get Leia to train her this week.”
 
Antiope: “Promoting kids to beat the crap out of each other. I really hate living here.”
 
Hippolyta: “It’s not all that bad! It’s healthy for girls to hit each other. They get stronger and they learn to respect each other. It’s all part of growing up and learning to be a real woman.”
 
Antiope: “Well, maybe. I don’t think it’s right though. Not everyone has it in them to be so competitive. It’s not fair to force all the girls to be that way. I think, anyway. But nobody listens to me.”
 
Hippolyta:I listen to you. You know that.”
 
Antiope:And you bully me.”
 
Hippolyta: “I just told you, it’s part of learning to be a real woman!”
 
She grinned and gave Antiope a playful shove off of her knee.
 
Hippolyta: “Go and see how Melanippe is doing. She’s probably digging up worms. I don’t know why she’s so fascinated with bugs.”
 
Antiope: “She said she wants to be a bee when she grows up.”
 
Hippolyta: “That’s just weird. She doesn’t want to be a pretty butterfly and she doesn’t want to be a deadly spider. She wants to be a fat bumble-bee…”
 
Antiope shrugged.
 
Antiope: “I’m sure she has her reasons.”
 
Antiope waved to Hippolyta and departed the room. She would check Melanippe’s room first and if the girl wasn’t there, she would search the small woodland where the bug catching was done. She was satisfied that Hippolyta would be busy reading to their youngest sister in the evening because it meant Antiope was free to proceed with her own task and she didn’t want anyone to know about it.
 
Nakia: “You should sleep.”
 
Hippolyta: “I have now committed myself to the bedtime story. I will not break my vow!”
 
She was being melodramatic and spread her arms out with a screwed-up face. She couldn’t maintain it and cracked into a small laugh.
 
Nakia: “At least a nap? That wine has gone straight to your head.”
 
Hippolyta: “I think you spiked me.”
 
Nakia gave a mischievous smile.
 
Nakia: “I did!”
 
Hippolyta: “Motherfucker.”
 
Nakia: “Wouldn’t it be daughterfucker?”
 
Hippolyta: “I thought I was getting tired too fast. You can’t get away with this, mammi!”
 
Nakia: “It’s for your own good. You’ve been acting out of sorts for months. Come on, get up. Let me get you into bed.”
 
Hippolyta slowly staggered to her feet and Nakia wrapped herself around her for support. They started from the queen’s throne room and into the corridor. The throne room was tiny, designed for intimate and personal audiences, unless the throne rooms of kings in other lands that were designed to intimidate visitors or aggrandise the monarch.
 
Hippolyta: “You’re taking me to bed, eh? This better not be where that daughterfucking comes in!”
 
Nakia: “Ha! If you were actually my daughter, I might be offended by that.”
 
Hippolyta: “Okay, I admit, that was a pretty shallow joke.”
 
They reached her room and Nakia nudged the door open with her foot. Her appearance had changed over the years since her wife’s death. She had once been the object of Molpadia’s desires and Nakia’s si’la body altered to match those desires. Since then she had started to appear older and more matronly, affected partly by the desires of her daughters. Yet there was still the inner sexual preferences of Hippolyta that impacted that appearance, giving Nakia a more masculine aspect around the chin and a broader nose than she had once had. Nakia had been concerned that she might start to turn into a male, but the presence of so many Amazons kept her female form intact.
 
Hippolyta fell onto the bed and looked, bleary eyed, up at Nakia.
 
Nakia: “I do remember the days when you used to fancy me and flirt with me when you were a girl.”
 
Hippolyta smirked dreamily.
 
Hippolyta: “I was a scoundrel.”
 
Nakia: “My favourite scoundrel!”
 
Hippolyta: “I hope you weren’t disappointed I didn’t…”
 
Nakia helped Hippolyta get into the blankets.
 
Nakia: “Not really. I expected it. I might not be your real father, but I was your mammi anyway. Even if you were a curious teenager, you still saw me as some kind of guardian even if not an actual parent. And then you went and found your true desires in men. Even if I had wanted to be consort to the new Amazon queen, it was never going to be. I don’t even know if you’d want me if I had a male appearance.”
 
Hippolyta took Nakia’s hand and kissed it.
 
Hippolyta: “Maybe not. I can’t help who I am, mammi. I can’t take back what I learn about myself.”
 
Nakia: “You don’t need to justify yourself to me, little Lyta. I’ll admit it. It’s been difficult. I have no mate and you do look like your mother. A lot. And it’s very distracting sometimes. But when I see that stunning woman, I change my point of view and, instead, I see that funny girl I helped to raise. I’m not your father, but I say again, I am your mammi. I love you. I cherish you.”
 
She sat on the edge of the bed and leaned down to kiss Hippolyta gently. She then planted her hands on either cheek and stared deeply into her eyes.
 
Nakia: “Continue to be strong, my queen. Your heartache will only last a little while longer, I know it.”
 
Hippolyta: “Thank you for understanding me, mammi.”
 
Nakia got up and sighed to herself. She admitted that she had enjoyed being queen consort and she missed Molpadia with all her heart. She often yearned for her dearest love to return and wrap her in a warm embrace. She did have to control her emotions around Hippolyta. Hippolyta knew she looked like Molpadia, but probably didn’t realised just how similar she was. Physically but also in personality. Strong, domineering and always controlling. They were fierce commanders who expected their will to be done and they achieved results. They wanted glory and power and they wanted to celebrate their vitality. The daughter even smelt like her mother and Nakia would sneak a long draw of breath when close enough and, with a sudden glimmer, Molpadia was near.
 
She got to the door when she heard Hippolyta mumble;
 
Hippolyta: “We need to get you a new wife, mammi. There’s lots of sexy, young girls in town. I’ll find one worthy of you.”
 
She rolled over and said lastly;
 
Hippolyta: “Hard as it will be to find one that deserves you.”
 
Nakia smiled.
 
Nakia: “That was nice.”
 
Hippolyta: “I’m always nice… I’m the queen of nice…”
 
She was already half-asleep. The drug had done its work. Nakia hoped it would last the night. Poor Melanippe would have to miss the bedtime story. She didn’t want Hippolyta to know what she was going to do this evening.
 
 
Herophile: “Here she comes.”
 
Aman glanced around.
 
Aman: “You can see her?”
 
Herophile: “I just know. I know this is the time.”
 
Aman nodded slowly.
 
Aman: “Right.”
 
A figure came into view and he watched her moving, nimbly, towards him. She had set up the meeting spot, so she knew the way. When she met the specified tree, she stood and waited in silence. Aman also waited, just in case she was followed. There they both remained in silence until Aman took the risk.
 
Aman: “I am here.”
 
Traitor: “Good.”
 
Aman: “Did you get it?”
 
Traitor: “Not yet. I was with her earlier today. She was drunk and arguing with everyone. But she wore the girdle. There was no way to take it.”
 
Aman: “Then we will wait another day.”
 
Traitor: “And if I still can’t get it?”
 
Aman: “We’ll need to force the issue.”
 
Traitor: “I think I know a way to do that, without anyone getting hurt. But you’d have to promise me that, no one will be hurt. I am betraying Hippolyta, not the Amazons.”
 
Aman: “If you can get me the girdle without bloodshed, that satisfies me. I’m not interested in murder for murder’s sake. I just want the girdle.”
 
Traitor: “Then you must listen to my new plan…”

Headache

PostSep 22, 2019#92

Pentheseleia looked at the blood on her hands. It was hot, fresh from the vein, and seemed unnaturally bright. From her hand she looked down at the corpse of her sister, Hippolyta. She lay strewn on the ground with blood now dribbling from the open wound on her head, the veins now pumping less and no longer spurting everywhere as it had moments ago. Hippolyta’s eyes stared up at her, wide and desperate.
 
Pentheseleia felt her body shaking with adrenaline and shock. She glanced behind her, at the scene of devastation their brawl had wrought upon the area. Plants were snapped and battered down, the soil was disrupted – the proof of the event was all around her.
 
She looked back at Hippolyta. A great hero brought down in this way. It was a travesty. Pentheseleia leant down and grabbed her sister’s lifeless body and wept openly, not caring that Amazons were supposed to keep their tears hidden.
 
Pentheseleia: “I’m so sorry, Lyta… I didn’t mean for this to happen! What have I done!?”
 
 
Sometime earlier…
 
Hippolyta: “Wow. That girl you slept with must be pretty special!”
 
Hippolyta grinned as she caught Pentheseleia dancing and singing to herself. Pentheseleia gasped and choked in horror at being seen in such disgrace.
 
Pentheseleia: “Knock! Knock! Use the damn door!”
 
She grabbed the pillow from her bed and threw it at her older sister. Hippolyta, in true macho fashion, stood still and took the pillow to the face without even flinching.
 
Hippolyta: “I shall burn the image of you prancing about into the depths of my mind. Whenever you think you’re so hardcore, I will think back on this fondly.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Bastard! I should kick your ass!”
 
She threw another pillow, which went the same way as the first. It bounced off Hippolyta’s head and tumbled down to the floor with its fallen brethren.
 
Hippolyta: “You’re out of ammunition. The day is mine.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Out! Out!”
 
Hippolyta turned and left, but said over her shoulder;
 
Hippolyta: “Fare thee well, Llama Dancer!”
 
Pentheseleia: “L-llama!?”
 
Hippolyta: “That’s what you look like when you dance.”
 
Hippolyta ran down the corridor as Pentheseleia scooped up the pillows and flung them after her.
 
Pentheseleia: “I’ll kill you one of these days, asshole!”
 
Hippolyta was now in a great mood. Bullying Antiope was easy, bullying Pentheseleia was much harder and that had been golden. ‘Llama Dancer’ would be go-to insult for months, if not years.
 
She strutted down the corridors of the longhouse until she reached Melanippe’s room. As the youngest of the siblings, still but a child, the elder sisters often came to check on her. Hippolyta had to hide her amused face and adopted the adequate apologetic face so that she could repent for missing storytime last night. She opened the door and swept into the room. It was the smallest bedroom in the building, with one tall window, and a narrow bed. The blankets were freshly made, untouched last night, and no sign of the girl.
 
Hippolyta exited the room.
 
Hippolyta: “Mel! Mel!”
 
A door down the corridor slowly opened. The sleepy face of Antiope appeared.
 
Antiope: “What’s going on?”
 
Hippolyta: “Where’s Melanippe?”
 
Antiope: “I have no idea. She can’t have gone out this early, can she?”
 
Hippolyta: “Mammi! Mammi, where are you?”
 
Hippolyta bound down the stairs. They were very squat stairs, with a long slope. She hit the ground floor at a hurried walk and strode into the kitchen.
 
Hippolyta: “Mammi, is Antiope with you?”
 
Nakia had her ridiculous “chef’s hat” on her head. She claimed it, somehow, gave her magic powers over cooking. Hippolyta secretly tried it once and wound up crafting a plum pudding. It was pretty good, except she had been trying to craft beer and used zero plums in the entire process.
 
Nakia’s hat wobbled precariously as she spun her head to look at Hippolyta.
 
Nakia: “No? I’m cooking grouse!”
 
Nakia didn’t seem overly concerned and she resumed making the stock for the bird. Hippolyta grumbled and went out of the door to the longhouse.
 
Hippolyta: “Mel! Mel, where are you!?”
 
A window above them opened and Pentheseleia appeared, hanging out of it.
 
Pentheseleia: “What’s going on?”
 
Hippolyta: “I can’t find Mel! She’s not in her room and she’s not answering me!”
 
Pentheseleia disappeared. Hippolyta was always grateful that one of her sisters was responsible. Antiope was useless and Melanippe a day-dreaming child and Nakia was too soft.
 
Moments later the sound of feet were on the stairs. Hippolyta turned to see Antiope slowly plodding down, while Pentheseleia came running down after her. They both reached Hippolyta at the same time with concerned expressions.
 
Pentheseleia: “Would she have gone out by herself?”
 
Antiope: “It’s not like her to do that.”
 
Pentheseleia: “No it’s not. But you once beat up that fat girl from the stable and you don’t usually hurt anyone.”
 
Antiope: “She was--! Right. I suppose kids do unexpected things.”
 
Hippolyta: “She loves the woods, so I’ll go and check there. Leia, you check the streets. Antiope, I want you to let people know to be on the look out and bring the idiot back here if they find her.”
 
She hopped inside the house to call into the kitchen;
 
Hippolyta: “Mammi--!”
 
Nakia appeared at the door, drying her hands on her apron.
 
Nakia: “Yes, yes. I’ll wait here.”
 
Hippolyta: “Right.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Bree!”
 
Hippolyta turned to see Bremusa approaching with one of the hunters. Bremusa became instantly alert at the sight of the serious faces of the royal sisters.
 
Bremusa: “What is it?”
 
Pentheseleia: “Melanippe is missing. I don’t suppose you’ve heard anything?”
 
Bremusa: “No. I’ll have the hunters begin a wide search, she can’t have gone far.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Not yet, she’s probably just gone off into the woods to get some bugs. I bet there’s bugs that only come out in the early morning.”
 
Hippolyta knew Pentheseleia was right, but she couldn’t shake the feeling that something was afoot. She shook her head.
 
Hippolyta: “No. Bremusa, do it. Better to be safe than sorry, right?”
 
Pentheseleia: “Right. You’re right. Let’s all move out and get her found. If she shows up with a bucket full of worms, I’m going to make her eat them.”
 
Antiope: “I’m sure she’s fine. Let’s not panic. She’ll show up.”
 
Antiope went striding down the path as though she was going to buy some groceries. Pentheseleia and Bremusa were instantly engaged in hurried talk with the hunter and, shortly, the hunter was running down the street to spread orders to the other hunters and send them out. The two women then made their own way into the town to knock on doors.
 
Hippolyta paused. She sensed something in the air, or was it in the pit of her stomach? Wherever it came from, she sensed danger. She tried to shake it off, but it was as though the talons of destiny were cutting at her flesh.
 
The sun was giving her a headache, or perhaps it was overthinking the problem. She put a hand to the back of her head as she marched towards the woods. She could swear the pain was concentrated there. Perhaps, she considered, the gods were trying to tell her something.
 
The search of the woodland was long. The area was very small, but Hippolyta refused to leave before every stone was unturned. She bellowed and bellowed until her voice went hoarse. Her shouting made her head hurt even worse.
 
Hours later, Bremusa appeared.
 
Bremusa: “No luck?”
 
Hippolyta shook her head.
 
Hippolyta: “I take it there’s no word from the hunters either?”
 
Bremusa: “Perhaps, but you should be calm when I give my report.”
 
Hippolyta: “Why? What have you found?”
 
Bremusa: “There have been strangers on the mountain. We found tracks and signs of bodies in the area that are not Amazonian. I inspected some of the signs myself. They’ve been here, watching us, for some time.”
 
Hippolyta’s rage boiled over in an instant. Intruders! Kidnappers! Invaders!
 
She began to run back to the longhouse with Bremusa in tow. When they arrived, there was a large gathering of important Amazons outside; including Antiope, Pentheseleia and Nakia.
 
Hippolyta: “Any sign they took Melanippe?”
 
She didn’t bother with greetings, the matter had escalated to urgent.
 
Pentheseleia: “No, but I think it’s most likely regardless. She goes missing at the same time we discover intruders? It can’t be a coincidence.”
 
Bremusa: “But why kidnap Melanippe? She’s just a girl. She can’t hold any valuable information to invaders!”
 
Antiope: “Maybe they want something?”
 
Bremusa: “What do you mean?”
 
Antiope: “I believe foreigners do it all the time. They take a prince or a princess and demand a ransom. Usually gold.”
 
Bremusa: “We have stolen a lot of gold and valuables lately. Maybe bandits have shown up, wanting a cut?”
 
Hippolyta growled in frustration and cupped her sore eyes. Her head still hurt and she hated the uncertainty of this. The Amazons were always the attackers, the raiders, the bandits, the besiegers. She didn’t like being on the receiving end.
 
Hippolyta: “We need to find these bandits and find out what they want. If there’s any indication that they have… hurt Melanippe, there’s no mercy. I mean it. We instant kills. Disembowel them, severe limbs, cut arteries. They die painfully and slowly. Am I understood?”
 
Everyone wore dark countenance and nodded in grim affirmation.
 
Nakia: “Lyta, you need to eat first.”
 
Hippolyta gave Nakia a look that supposed the si’la was an utter moron.
 
Hippolyta: “Do you really think I can eat right now?”
 
Bremusa: “We go.”
 
Bremusa led the party away with solemn purpose. The late afternoon sun was still hanging in the sky, but the cold was clenching the air so the Amazons had dressed in furs and cotton and bore torches.
 
Nakia: “Please, Lyta. Just a small snack to fill your belly. You’ll have more energy to think and act with something in your stomach. Bree will lead the hunters for now. You’ll be needed later.”
 
Pentheseleia had gone with the others, but Antiope remained.
 
Antiope: “Mammi’s right, Lyta. You need to eat so make sure your brain is competent. If these people expect a trade, then you need to be thinking straight.”
 
Hippolyta: “Always the smart one, Antiope. Fine, you both win. I’ll eat. Something small though. I don’t feel hungry. I feel sick.”
 
Antiope: “That’s the nerves. Something small then. Like soup with bread.”
 
Nakia sighed.
 
Nakia: “There goes my grouse.”
 
Antiope: “I thought it looked like a chicken you were cooking? Surely it was too small to be a grouse!”
 
Nakia: “All that reading of facts has dimmed your imagination, Antiope. You know that? It will be grouse on the table! Or it would have been. Now I guess it will be soup. Grouse soup!”
 
After her beer turning out to be pudding, Hippolyta was sure it would be whatever Nakia decided it would be.
 
They went into the kitchen. There was a dining hall, with several tables for the Amazon warriors to all sit together and drink and make merry, but when eating alone the monarch, and her family, could sit at the kitchen table instead. As Hippolyta slumped onto one of the rickety, wooden chairs and leant her head in her hands as the banging on the back of her head resumed.
 
Antiope: “Are you okay?”
 
Hippolyta: “Headache.”
 
Antiope: “It’s the stress. Stress makes headaches. Mammi, maybe some pain relief?”
 
The si’la planted the soup on the table. There were other women that could cook for the royal family but Nakia, with her hat, insisted nobody was better suited than her to do the job. She claimed to have an intricate knowledge of many exotic dishes that she had learnt from countries far and wide, but the Amazons always insisted on their home comforts. This often upset Nakia, since Amazons had simple taste in food and were not very adventurous with their spices. Nakia loved spices. She claimed any meal can be made tasty with dashes of special peppers, spices or herbs.
 
Nakia: “I think that’s a good idea, Antiope.”
 
Hippolyta: “No, no. No relief! I might need to fight. I can’t be sluggish.”
 
She winced at the volume of her own voice.
 
Nakia: “Is that so? And you dealing with pain in your head will improve your combat, how?”
 
She took out cannabis from the cupboard and started to fill a pipe.
 
Nakia: “You might be a little sluggish, but at least you’ll be able to think straight. And that’s better than not thinking straight and being distracted by pain, isn’t it?”
 
Hippolyta: “I guess you’re right. It’s really killing me.”
 
Hippolyta drew a drag of the medicine and let the smoke clog her lungs.
 
Antiope: “Just don’t overdo it. You don’t want to go up there shuffling and giggling like a fool.”
 
Hippolyta reached out and smacked, albeit lightly, Antiope on the back of the head.
 
Antiope: “Ow!”
 
Hippolyta: “You’re not queen yet, numbskull. Don’t think you can tell me what to do.”
 
Antiope: “I bloody wish that were even possible! Otreriana would be a much more civilised place if I were queen!”
 
Hippolyta laughed through a cloud of smoke around her head. She was feeling some relief already, though she could also feel her muscles relaxing and simmering down out of their state of tension.
 
Hippolyta: “You’d be deposed in a matter of days, I guarantee it!”
 
Antiope: “Some of them wanted to depose you!”
 
Hippolyta: “Yes they did! And I’m not a little weed, like you. If they were unhappy following me, you reckon they’d follow you?”
 
Nakia: “You were fortunate Bree stood by you then.”
 
Hippolyta was reluctant to admit gratitude to Bremusa.
 
Hippolyta: “Yes…”
 
Nakia: “She’s been a loyal and true friend, even though you—”
 
Hippolyta groaned with annoyance.
 
Hippolyta: “Stoooooooop!”
 
Nakia: “It’s true! You owe that woman so much!”
 
Hippolyta: “Stop trying to make us friends again, mammi! It’s annoying! It will never happen! I don’t care what she does, how loyal she is, how many times she saves my life, how many enemies she cuts down, how much she does for me or my people. I will never call her friend again.”
 
Antiope: “That’s cold.”
 
Hippolyta: “I know who she is and what she is. I know she deserves all of the credit and praise you give her. I was her friend for most of my life. There is no greater Amazon than her. She is more than my equal even. Better, in fact. But I cannot forgive what she did to me. She betrayed me more deeply than if she had killed me or maimed me. I have had guilt and anguish and torture in my mind for a decade because of her. My daughter… my baby… left behind. I will never forgive. I cannot forgive.”
 
Nakia: “I just hope that Bree can forgive you for this eternal punishment. Should she ever choose to abandon you, it would be a grave tragedy.”
 
Hippolyta shook her head.
 
Hippolyta: “She won’t.”
 
Antiope: “You take her for granted.”
 
Hippolyta: “Yes I do. I know her, I told you. No matter how badly I treat her, no matter what I do, she will always be there. I could have locked her in a dungeon, tortured her, blinded her – she would still be loyal to me.”
 
Antiope: “How can you possibly think that?”
 
Hippolyta: “I told you, I know her. You live too much inside your own head to understand the bonds between those of us who fight. And I know, in her heart, she knows she deserves to be punished for what she did. She knows she shouldn’t have abandoned my baby. She believes what she did was right, but she knows it was cruel. Not cruel to Creusa, she doesn’t care about her, but to me. And that’s what holds her through every insult I bestow upon her. She knows she betrayed me beyond all recompense or forgiveness.”
 
Nakia: “Maybe you should tell her you forgive her anyway.”
 
Hippolyta: “Do my words go in through one ear and out the other, mammi?”
 
Nakia: “I don’t mean you have to actually forgive her. Just tell her you forgive her. Before it’s too late. One day, you won’t be able to. Don’t let your lives end in hatred, Lyta.”
 
Hippolyta: “She’s too stubborn to die in combat and she has the constitution of an ox. We have decades to go. I swear, we’ll both be old ladies trying to hit on the girls at wrestling tournaments.”
 
Nakia and Antiope both laughed at the image.
 
Hunter: “My queen! I bring word!”
 
The three of them shot to the front door, Nakia still with her daft hat wobbling on her head.
 
Hunter: “My queen, the intruders have been located. They were waiting for us. They have your sister hostage.”
 
Hippolyta marched out and the hunter fell into step with her. Hippolyta glanced back to see Antiope following them, wearing a serious frown, while Nakia stood quietly in the doorway with her hand on the frame. It almost made Hippolyta laugh to see Nakia looking so upset, but wearing that thing on her head.
 
Hippolyta: “Have they told us their demands yet?”
 
Hunter: “Their leader said they’d only speak to you.”
 
Antiope: “No surprise.”
 
Hippolyta: “Is Pentheseleia there?”
 
Hunter: “Yes. She and Bremusa already tried to speak with them. They were able to see Melanippe and report that she’s fine, just scared.”
 
Hippolyta: “Good.”
 
They initially marched down the street until Hippolyta commanded they take a run. She and the hunter were soon far ahead of the weak-legged Antiope and exited the city. They traversed across the landscape. She doubted poor Antiope would ever find them without a hunter to guide them, as she was slow, weak and unskilled in tracking. She had the basics, enough to hunt some deer or mountain goat, but she wouldn’t be able to follow people.
 
Eventually the two women came upon a large gathering of Amazons. They were all poised for battle, with weapons in hand. Guards were posted all around the area. A few fires burned for warmth, but there were no tents. Nobody expected to be here overnight. Scouts were higher in the mountain, keeping watch on the enemy camp. The intruders were now making no attempt to conceal themselves and appeared to be maintaining a cool, sombre camp. Reports came in that they had packed their tents and gear, ready to leave, now that Hippolyta was on the way. They anticipated a quick exchange and departure. Hippolyta didn’t know what made them think she would allow them to leave alive. Once Melanippe was in her possession, there would be blood.
 
Hippolyta: “Someone inform their leader I am here.”
 
A hunter was quick on her feet and sped away. A soldier handed Hippolyta a hot cup of tea. It was being used more for the warmth on the hands than for drinking.
 
Bremusa: “In future, we’ll need to be more proactive in protecting our territory. They sauntered in here and got so close to us without anyone noticing. It’s unbelievable.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Clearly they’re professionals. I expect they do this all the time. They go around, city to city, and extort someone.”
 
Bremusa: “But we are Amazons! We are better than everyone else! We are better trained, more resolved! Our hunters and scouts are not foolish men working for gold, they are warriors working for their people! We grew too complacent, thinking no one would take the trouble to come up here.”
 
Hippolyta looked between them with pursed lips. She didn’t want to speak but, reluctantly, she felt she had to pass judgement.
 
Hippolyta: “Bremusa is right. We have never bothered with proper patrols or soldiers along the roads. We don’t even have a wall. We’ve been sitting up here, arrogant and, as she says, complacent. We’re too strong to defeat and the terrain here is too hard for most foreigners to deal with; the venture would be unprofitable to most of our enemies. But we have pissed off a lot of people. Should profit not be the goal, we could be vulnerable. The Greeks, especially. They’re not far and they have powerful, unified militaries. A Scythian raid could even get up here if they were resolved enough to punish us. These bandits exposed that weakness. After today, we will draw up plans to better protect this mountain. We should have a fortress towards the base and towers at higher altitudes.”
 
Bremusa: “We’ll meet in the morning to make the arrangements. After we slaughter these fools, I’ll scout out possible sites for the fortress and the towers.”
 
Pentheseleia: “We plan to kill them?”
 
Hippolyta: “Once we get Melanippe back, I see no reason not to. Whatever they want to extract from us is not the issue; the audacity to come here and kidnap an Amazonian princess is a crime worthy of nothing but death.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Bree is right again, huh? Seems like you’re both of the same mind on so many things.”
 
Pentheseleia looked sternly at Hippolyta but just stared back.
 
Pentheseleia: “Fine. Whatever. Not my business.”
 
Hippolyta: “You’re right. It’s not.”
 
Bremusa looked disappointed but not surprised. She kept her gaze low.
 
Bremusa: “There could be a problem though.”
 
Hippolyta: “What?”
 
Bremusa: “If Pentheseleia is right, and they do this throughout the land, then they must have some plan to escape our wrath after the exchange. I doubt they’ll just hand her over.”
 
Hippolyta tapped her chin.
 
Hippolyta: “You’re right, of course. They probably plan to take their prize and send us Melanippe later.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Then what can we do? I don’t care what they want, we can’t let them take Melanippe and their toll! There’ll be so reason for them to let her go!”
 
The three of them fell into quiet contemplation, trying to think of an idea or a way around the situation.
 
Hippolyta: “For now, we have scouts spread out across the most direct paths out of the territory. At least we can follow them as they leave. If they take her with them, we’ll be able to see what they do. If they do harm her, we’ll know about it and we will come down upon them with tremendous fury!”
 
Bremusa: “If we could find out who they are, we could track them down long after they’re gone. It would serve as a lesson to all others that think they can take from us.”
 
Hippolyta: “Do we have any clues?”
 
Pentheseleia: “They’re like us, they’re of all creeds. They have no single nationality, they’re made up of various cultures and races. But they do all follow the exact word of their leader, as though he is more than just a man to them. Like a cult.”
 
Hippolyta: “What can you tell me of this man?”
 
Pentheseleia: “He is Arabic or maybe from elsewhere in Anatolia. He has their dark skin and the bone structure of the face. He is very well spoken, eloquent even, but direct. He doesn’t speak often, only when necessary and though he has advanced vocabulary, he doesn’t pour on superfluous words, unlike our younger sister. He’s not trying to impress, I think he just aims to be clearly understood. His accent is very strange. I have no idea where it’s from. There’s some Egyptian there, like he spent a lot of recent years there, but he’s definitely not a native.”
 
Hippolyta: “Perhaps he’s from some distant land to the east and brings tales of exotic mysticism. I know a lot of people in Hattusa fall for such nonsense.”
 
Pentheseleia: “If that’s the case, they’re truly devoted. They hang on every word of his, without question. Except one of them, come to think of it. The Indian girl, you saw her, Bree?”
 
Bremusa: “Yes, she seemed tired and uncooperative. Not aggressive or unwilling, exactly. More like she wanted to be doing something else. But she was the only one. The rest were as obedient to him, as priests to their deity.”
 
Hippolyta clenched her fist and held it against her mouth as she tried to think. None of the information seemed helpful, without some political long game – trying to drive a wedge between the Indian and the Arab. But that was not conducive to the current scenario. They weren’t trying to whittle down an enemy stronghold, they had to get Melanippe out of their clutches safely within a short period of time. Every minute she was their captive, was a minute too long.
 
Bremusa: “What if we were to simply kill this leader? If they are so devoted, they may be lost without him.”
 
Hippolyta: “I think you might be right, but it’s not worth the risk to Melanippe. They definitely have orders to kill her should he fall and, as devoted as they are, they will absolutely follow through, no doubt about it.”
 
Bremusa: “Yes, I think you’re right. I have hunters ready to open fire, but the princess is always in the arms of one of the captives. Never set alone. A single arrow and they’d kill her and an arrow aimed at her captor could hit her. I honestly see no way to free her without giving into their demands.”
 
Hippolyta: “I don’t care about that. They can have whatever they want. It’s the sheer arrogance of them to come up here and make demands in the first place that has me primed for blood. There is nothing we have that we can’t replace. Gold, jewels, trinkets. There’s plenty more where they came from.”
 
Pentheseleia: “I don’t know…”
 
Hippolyta: “What do you mean?”
 
Pentheseleia: “I’m sure there are easier targets. You said it yourself, it’s not worth the risk to take from us. There must be something we have that is more valuable than we realised. Something important to this cult. Maybe we accidentally stole one of their idols or one of their holy treasures. A statuette, or a magic cup or a… sacred dildo?”
 
Hippolyta snorted a laugh but quickly covered it up and gave her sister a mock frown.
 
Hippolyta: “This is no time for jokes.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Who’s joking!? Those Greek oracles have to be virgins, don’t you know? A girl’s got to get some action somehow, right?”
 
Even Bremusa laughed but their momentary levity was broken when they saw the hunter return, without escort.
 
Hippolyta: “What’s taking them so long?”
 
Hunter #2: “They said they have to wait…”
 
Pentheseleia: “What for!?”
 
Hippolyta: “How long?”
 
Hunter #2: “She was very strange about it, my queen. The Indian girl, I mean. She was the one to request the delay. She said we have to wait six minutes and forty-two seconds. I asked why she was so precise, she said just said ‘that is the time we meet’.”
 
Bremusa: “That sounds like the talk of an oracle.”
 
Pentheseleia: “What do you know, they really do want their sacred dildo!”
 
Hippolyta: “A seer…”
 
She hissed the word.
 
Hippolyta: “That complicates things. If they have a genuine seer, then they know how this is going to play out. At least they have a better guess of it than we do. That’s what’s made them so bold. They’re not afraid because they have seen the future and know how it will end.”
 
Bremusa: “Even the greatest oracle only sees possible futures.”
 
Hippolyta: “Even so, it seems we’ve been outdone. Damn them, what do they want!?”
 
Pentheseleia opened her mouth but Hippolyta cut her off.
 
Hippolyta: “Don’t say it.”
 
Pentheseleia closed her mouth again.
 
There was some commotion behind them and they turned to see that Antiope had arrived. Hippolyta rose an eyebrow, surprised that she had found them. She beckoned the girl over. Her book smarts might give them some clue on this seer.
 
Hippolyta: “Antiope, how did you find us?”
 
Antiope: “You always underestimate me, Lyta. I’m not an idiot, you know?”
 
Pentheseleia: “Does this mean you’re ready to go hunting by yourself?”
 
Antiope made a sulk that explained she certainly was not ready to go hunting by herself.
 
Hippolyta: “I don’t underestimate you, Antiope. I just understand your skills lie elsewhere. Which is why you arrived just in time. Maybe some information from those books you read could tell us about oracles and how to deal with them?”
 
Antiope: “Oracles?”
 
Hippolyta: “They have an oracle up there. At least we think they do. An Indian girl. Apparently, she doesn’t get along well with their leader.”
 
Antiope: “That’s… surprising.”
 
Hippolyta: “I was hoping you’d know something?”
 
Antiope shook herself into thinking mode.
 
Antiope: “Well, yes. Maybe. If she’s Indian, she’s probably an akashvani. They’re almost always half-human. It’s usually the mother, but could be the father, who is a magical being. In India the most common female spirit being are aparas, probably the worldly kind – the laukika. They’re the ones that skip out the land and become wives of creative men. Usually poets and the like. But I don’t see how any of this would help get Melanippe back.”
 
Hippolyta: “No, I suppose not. But well done anyway, Antiope.”
 
Antiope: “Really? I didn’t help at all.”
 
Hippolyta: “You still proved how smart you are anyway.”
 
Antiope: “I guess…”
 
Sadness cascaded onto her young face. Pentheseleia lashed her arm around the girl’s shoulders and drew her in tight.
 
Pentheseleia: “Come on now, divvy. None of us have come up with a solution, no need to be hard on yourself. I mean, how in the fuck you know all that crap in the first place is amazing.”
 
Antiope looked up at Pentheseleia, as if seeing her in a new light for the first time in her life.
 
The moment was disturbed when a scout came down the mountain and reported that the enemy had made their approach. Hippolyta beckoned for Bremusa and Pentheseleia to follow her, but Antiope fell in line too. When soldiers started to march after them, Hippolyta ordered them down.
 
Hippolyta: “You are to remain vigilant. The first sign of trouble, we are to battle. Should any of us be harmed, you brutalise the living shit out of them.”
 
The soldiers rose their weapons and made a growl of acknowledgement and promise to bestow violence upon their enemy. The family, and Bremusa, trooped up the mountain to meet their extorter.
 
There they found Just three people; the leader, the seer and Melanippe. Melanippe was unharmed but uncertain. She, like her two full-blooded sisters, had plum coloured hair, but it was extremely long, sweeping to her knees, and unfastened. She looked weary and Hippolyta guessed she hadn’t slept well being in the care of mean strangers.
 
Aman: “I am Aman Tabiz. This is Herophile of Ionia.”
 
Hippolyta found that odd. The girl was clearly Indian, not Ionian.
 
Hippolyta: “I don’t care who you are. What do you want?”
 
Aman: “As you can see, the Princess Melanippe is unharmed. She has been fed and taken care of. That could, of course, change.”
 
Hippolyta: “Threaten her again, and I’ll pull your tongue out of your ass.”
 
There was a long pause. He didn’t like that, she could tell, despite how rigid he kept his face. She let her eyes scan over the Indian girl. She was pretty, in a girl-like way, but unhealthy. Her cheeks were sallow, and her eyes were dreadful. From her physiognomy, Hippolyta could tell she didn’t care about anything going on around her. She even seemed bored.
 
Aman: “I understand your anger. I wouldn’t have come here, this way, if I didn’t feel it was necessary. I hope you realise this is not a personal vendetta and you will never see me, or my organisation, ever again after today. The princess will be returned to you in exchange for something in your possession, Queen Hippolyta.”
 
Hippolyta: “Spell it out.”
 
Aman: “Your girdle. The one given to you by Ares himself.”
 
Hippolyta was taken aback and her hand subconsciously latched onto the girdle around her waist. Of all the possessions that she was master over, she had not considered her own girdle. It was a part of her, it was part of her identity. The girdle had allowed her to subdue the Amazons that would have ousted her when she took the throne, it had kept her superior to the other girls when growing up, it told her, every day, who she was; the Daughter of War.
 
But there was no question of debate.
 
Hippolyta: “Fine.”
 
She unfastened it and yanked it from her waist deftly.
 
Herophile: “Told you.”
 
Aman nodded in acquiescence to Herophile. Clearly he had suspected Hippolyta would not give up her girdle so easily.
 
Hippolyta: “Give me my sister.”
 
Aman: “First, the belt.”
 
Hippolyta took a step but Aman held up his hand.
 
Aman: “Not you.”
 
Antiope held out her hands to take the girdle.
 
Hippolyta: “Not you, Antiope. Bremusa, you take it.”
 
Antiope: “I’m sorry, Lyta. But I have to take it.”
 
Hippolyta: “What do you mean?”
 
Antiope took the girdle from her older sister’s hands.
 
Antiope: “It’s a prisoner exchange. They’ll give you Melanippe back in exchange for the girdle and me.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Like Hell!”
 
Bremusa: “That is illogical, Princess Antiope! There is no point to it!”
 
Antiope: “Sorry… I love you all. I really do. But I can’t stay here anymore. I hate it. I hate Otreriana. I hate the Amazons. I… hate you. I love you! I do! But I also hate you. I can’t stand being with you. I need… nicer people. Softer people. Civilised people. No fighting, no wrestling, no bullying.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Are you being serious? We upset you that much!?”
 
Hippolyta felt a tear run down her cheek. Betrayed. Again.
 
Hippolyta: “You did all this? You?”
 
Antiope couldn’t look Hippolyta in the face.
 
Antiope: “I told you, you always underestimate me.”
 
Pentheseleia: “You kidnapped your own sister!?”
 
Antiope: “It was the only way to get the girdle from you. I tried to steal it, but you always wear it. And now I can be free.”
 
Hippolyta stared down at her. Her emotions were running wild but the old ‘Amazons must be stoic’ social contract allowed her to hold it all in and not pick a single emotion to exhibit; she held back the anger, the rage and the hate. She held back the sorrow, the pity and the loss. She held back the despair and the agony.
 
Antiope: “Just let me go.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Not in a million years, you stupid little fuck!”
 
She grabbed Antiope by the scruff of the collar. Hippolyta noticed that Aman put his hand on Melanippe’s shoulder, anticipating his plan B might be required.
 
Antiope: “You have to. They’ll kill Melanippe.”
 
Pentheseleia: “How could you do this!?”
 
Antiope: “Because I know you both. I know you wouldn’t risk Melanippe. I knew she’d be okay. If I thought she’d be hurt, I never would have done it.”
 
Pentheseleia ground her teeth and wrapped her palm around Antiope’s neck. She just closed her eyes and trembled.
 
Antiope: “Fine. Do it. Strangle me. Either way, I’ll be free.”
 
Pentheseleia: “You miserable, spoilt brat! You think you’re treated so terribly!?”
 
Antiope’s eyes burst open.
 
Antiope: “Yes! Gods yes! Everyone looks down on me! I have zero value! I am as good as human refuse! Even the lame, the blind, all the disabled, all the old people – they are valued more highly than me! It’s not their fault they can’t fight. But me? I choose not to fight, so I am a weak, loser coward! Out there, I can be me and I will find people that respect me the way I am! I’ll be free from all of you!”
 
Pentheseleia: “But Antiope! We’re your family! You betrayed us! You—I can’t take this--!!!”
 
She turned from Antiope after giving her a shove. She walked away. She knew there was only one outcome to the situation, even if she hated it.
 
Bremusa: “We will come after you. We won’t let them go.”
 
Antiope: “You have to. Or they’ll kill me. That’s the trade.”
 
Hippolyta: “You hate us so much that you’d rather die?”
 
Antiope: “Yes. No? I—I love you, Lyta. I love you all. I know you respect me and love me, inside. But I—I hate the way you treat me. You just don’t understand how I feel, to be put down day, after day. Sometimes it’s joking. I get that. But I don’t need that, not when I get it everywhere else from everyone else I meet. All the girls my age treat me like shit. They hit me, did you know that? They push me around, they insult me to my face and nobody stops them. Everyone thinks I deserve it. They think I should stand up for myself and hit them back! But I can’t! I am not that person. And then I come home, and you and Leia laugh at me and joke about me and I just… it’s not fair. I have to go and they will take me and look after me.”
 
Hippolyta remained silent, staring.
 
Bremusa: “And you trust them!? This Tabiz and the oracle? When you are far away, they will leave you stranded in some village! Make a whore of you!”
 
Antiope: “I trust him. He will not do that to me. I just know it. I have value to him and the organisation.”
 
Hippolyta felt overwhelmed. Her headache was pushing through the haze of her brain. She turned her head, as if to look for something else to do. This wasn’t happening, not really. She was living in a dream, surely?
 
Antiope: “…goodbye, Lyta.”
 
Her small voice warbled out of her mouth, reaching Hippolyta’s mind and drawing her attention. She looked at Antiope as the girl started to turn. She suddenly reached out, her large palms clasped the sides of Antiope’s skull. Antiope’s body tensed up, prepared to be crushed into oblivion. But then she felt Hippolyta’s kiss and tears swam in her eyes.
 
Hippolyta: “Promise me then. Stay safe.”
 
Antiope: “I will!”
 
Hippolyta: “Promise me!”
 
Antiope: “I promise! I promise I will stay safe! You won’t need to worry about me, Lyta. I swear to you!”
 
Hippolyta stood back. Antiope hesitated as she looked up at her half-sister with admiring eyes.
 
Antiope: “Goodbye, Hippolyta the Awesome.”
 
Hippolyta: “Goodbye, Antiope the Courageous.”
 
Antiope turned and walked, head held high, across the space towards Aman. She held onto the girdle, Hippolyta noticed. Likely she agreed to only hand it over when they were far away from Otreriana. Smart girl had thought it through.
 
Melanippe ran straight at Hippolyta, though she gawked, with hurt, at Antiope on the way. Clearly she remembered being handed over to Tabiz by Antiope’s own hand. Melanippe fell into Hippolyta’s arms and she grabbed her body tightly, afraid she might be snatched away again. Antiope didn’t look back, her eyes dedicated to the horizon and, Hippolyta hoped, too afraid and sorrowful to see her sisters standing behind her.
 
When the three of them had gotten some distance between them, Bremusa looked to Hippolyta.
 
Bremusa: “When shall we give pursuit?”
 
Hippolyta drew a deep breath, bringing her emotions back into some semblance within her. She felt a coldness settle onto her mind, as though she had spent up all of the emotions and was left with nothing.
 
She turned to Bremusa with a stern, tight jaw.
 
Hippolyta: “We don’t.”
 
It took Bremusa a moment to register that her queen had said something she hadn’t expected.
 
Bremusa: “But… your sister? We can’t let them take her, surely? Not to mention your girdle!”
 
Hippolyta: “I won’t force her back here. Not after that. She was right, I did always underestimate her. I underestimated what she was going through. I underestimated the pain. She had just enough Amazon in her to keep her pain to herself and bottle it up. Stupid pride. I… have to let her go.”
 
Bremusa: “But… she betrayed you!”
 
Hippolyta: “And I betrayed her. I betrayed her by not being a good enough sister. I failed to see the problems. I want her back, I want to keep her safe. So I’ll now have to live with this loss and this fear for her safety. That’s my punishment for my betrayal.”
 
Bremusa’s face was a mix of emotions that Hippolyta had felt just moments ago. She leant down and picked up Melanippe, so cradled herself into the woman’s neck and wrapped her legs around Hippolyta’s stomach. Bremusa remained stationary as Hippolyta began her way down to the gathering.
 
Hippolyta: “Don’t you see, Bree? Being so rigid in our ways is hurting people that want to be different? People that are different?”
 
Bremusa: “I saw the pain on her face…”
 
Hippolyta: “If we were more open, more… accommodating, this would never have happened. We are to blame, Bree, not Antiope.”
 
Bremusa: “I know it. I… I know you’re right. I know you’ve always been right… I should never have—I’m sorry, Lyta. I was wrong. Your daughter should never have been left behind.”
 
Hippolyta: “I know you didn’t want to hurt me, Bree.”
 
Bremusa: “That. Yes. But, I was wrong to leave her. She didn’t deserve it. Maybe we do need to change.”
 
Hippolyta cuddled Melanippe and tilted her head against the girl’s as she looked at Bremusa. The African-Amazon stood in the darkening light of the early evening, like a stoic shadow. Always there, always standing tall.
 
Hippolyta: “I forgive you, Bree.”
 
The queen saw the anguish slap Bremusa in the face like cold water. Hippolyta felt Bremusa, at last, might even cry. She didn’t want to ruin that moment, so she quietly turned and walked away to leave Bremusa with her moment of acquittal that she had longed after for many years.
 
When she reached the soldiers, they were all gearing up to give chase. Pentheseleia was giving orders and planning tactics on getting Antiope back without her being killed by Aman. When she saw Melanippe, the commander melted and accepted her little sister into her arms for a powerful embrace.
 
Pentheseleia: “My girl. Were you brave?”
 
Melanippe: “I tried! I kicked him.”
 
Pentheseleia: “Well done!”
 
Melanippe: “Twice!”
 
Pentheseleia: “Then it’s double-well done! I think we need to teach you how to kick men in their balls.”
 
Melanippe: “Like, their footballs?”
 
Pentheseleia: “Yes! Exactly like that! Only smaller. And more delicate. They squish easy.”
 
She gave a cruel smile.
 
Melanippe: “I should have kicked him in the balls! Where are his balls, Leia?”
 
Pentheseleia: “I will show you later. You, take her back to the longhouse.”
 
A soldier approached but Melanippe whined and held onto her sister’s hand.
 
Melanippe: “I don’t want to go, I want to stay with you and Lyta.”
 
Pentheseleia: “You can’t. Mammi is waiting for you and she’s very upset and worried. You don’t want that, right?”
 
Melanippe: “Okay…”
 
She resigned herself quite willingly at the idea of seeing her mammi again, but she made a show of it with a moan. After all, big girls don’t need their mammies.
 
Melanippe: “When will Antiope come back?”
 
Pentheseleia hesitated.
 
Pentheseleia: “Soon, Mel. We’ll get her back.”
 
Melanippe: “And kick him in the balls?”
 
Pentheseleia: “A lot.”
 
Melanippe: “Okay.”
 
She turned to be led away by the soldier.
 
Pentheseleia: “Love you!”
 
Melanippe waved over her shoulder.
 
Melanippe: “Love you too! Bye, Lyta! Love you!”
 
Hippolyta smiled.
 
Hippolyta: “We’ll see you soon.”
 
When Melanippe turned away again, Pentheseleia murdered softly;
 
Pentheseleia: “Not that soon. We have to cover a lot of ground in a short time. I’m thinking hunters and scouts only, light-footed and quiet. If we take them by surprise, we can free Antiope. The problem will be if Tabiz has the girdle, or if Antiope has it—”
 
Hippolyta: “Everyone stand down.”
 
There was sudden silence.
 
Hippolyta: “Return home. The trade is complete.”
 
There was now murmuring of confusion.
 
Hippolyta: “Antiope was not kidnapped. She left us. She went of her own accord. There is nothing more to be done. She doesn’t need to be brought back, she doesn’t want to be brought back. Let’s call it a night.”
 
The Amazons, still doubtful but obedient, started to gather their gear.
 
Hippolyta: “I will give Bremusa orders. We will have patrols of soldiers tonight to guard the city. We’ll be adapting our defensive strategy in future to ensure this doesn’t happen again. Tonight though, we’ll make do.”
 
A series of more affirmative murmurings followed; this they understood without reservation. They started to discuss who would be on duty tonight, most of them arguing for the privilege of this first watch. They slowly filed out while Pentheseleia glowered at her older sister.
 
Pentheseleia: “Why are you doing this? It doesn’t matter what Antiope wants, she’s an idiot and doesn’t know what’s good for her! She’s read a bunch of rubbish in some books and thinks she knows what it’s like out there! You’ve seen it! Women are treated like chattel! They’re traded by their fathers to other men in exchange for fucking cows!”
 
Hippolyta: “That’s not going to happen to Antiope. And she isn’t an idiot. She knows exactly what she’s doing and where she’s going. If ever she does need us, or if ever she decides to come home, she knows exactly where we are.”
 
Pentheseleia: “This is—unbelievable! What is going on in your head? You’ll let her go? She’s not capable of defending herself! And she’s going with this Aman Tabiz? He threatened to kill Melanippe!”
 
Hippolyta: “I have to trust she knows what she’s getting into. Leia, I don’t want to argue about this right now. I have nothing left in me to deal with anymore shit.”
 
Pentheseleia: “So you’re just going to give her up? Aren’t you always the one telling everyone what to do instead of listening to them? And now, suddenly, you listen to Antiope and just agree to whatever fucking crap she comes out with?”
 
Hippolyta: “Yes, I tell people what to do and I’m telling you to shut up. I’m too drained for this.”
 
She could feel her headache resurfacing.
 
Pentheseleia: “No.”
 
Hippolyta: “You have no choice.”
 
Pentheseleia: “I said no. I’m going after her. I’m going to lead everyone in this. You can stay at home and hide under mammi’s skirts.”
 
Hippolyta: “Don’t question my bravery, Leia. Stop pushing me. Antiope is gone. She doesn’t want to be with us. She hates us, you heard her.”
 
Pentheseleia: “She doesn’t even know what she’s saying! We bring her back, we talk to her. That’s all she really wants. She just wants to talk to us. When she’s vented, we tell her she’s an idiot to ever doubt us and we’ll all be friends again.”
 
Hippolyta: “That’s the problem, Leia! She never saw our relationship in the way we do! We thought we were being nice and having fun, but she didn’t see it that way. She felt bullied and hurt. We’re not all the same and she doesn’t want to be like us or even tolerate us. She’ll be happier without us.”
 
Pentheseleia: “She’ll be dead! We have to protect her! She’s small, weak and naïve! She trusts a kidnapper and a stoned oracle that she barely even knows!”
 
Hippolyta: “She’s obviously been in contact with them for a very long time. How do you think they got up here so easily? Let her go.”
 
Pentheseleia: “No! She’s my sister! I can’t just let her run into danger! I don’t care what she’s feeling, she’s being stupid! I won’t let her do this! Maybe she’s not your real sister, maybe that’s why you don’t care!”
 
Hippolyta’s energy snapped back in an instant and she shoved Pentheseleia.
 
Hippolyta: “You fucking dare say that to me!? How dare you! You miserable little twat!”
 
Pentheseleia: “You always thought you were better than us, Lyta! You thought having Ares as your father instead of mammi made you better than us. And now you’re willing to let my little sister go off with some man!? I won’t let it happen! I will lead the hunters after her!”
 
Hippolyta: “I’m the queen here, asshole! Amazons are mine to command!”
 
Pentheseleia: “I won’t have to command them! They’ll willingly follow me! They all know we need to get Antiope back!”
 
Hippolyta: “They’ll do as I fucking tell them to!”
 
Hippolyta turned to shout Bremusa, who she assumed to still be up the mountain where she had left her. Pentheseleia, however, suddenly sucker punched her straight across the mouth.
 
Pentheseleia: “Back at you, motherfucker.”
 
Hippolyta: “Fine then, you want to do this? Right now? Fine! I’ll kick your ass and when I’m done, I’ll drag you through the gods damned streets by your ankle and have the kids piss on you!”
 
Pentheseleia gave a cocky smirk.
 
Pentheseleia: “You don’t have your girdle anymore, oh Daughter of War! No more super strength for you! That’s the only reason you ever got where you are and everyone knows it! No girdle, no strength, no title.”
 
Hippolyta: “Oh? You think you get to be queen now, is that it?”
 
Pentheseleia: “Why not? I’m more of an Amazon that you ever were! Manfucker!”
 
Hippolyta: “You shit!”
 
The next minute they were at each other. Hippolyta’s swing connected and Pentheseleia’s head swung around. Hippolyta did feel the difference of the connection without her enhanced power. She was used to holding back, not throwing hard punches, as the super strength did the rest. Whenever she wanted to do damage, she was able to punch a man’s head clean off his shoulders with her fist. Now, holding back her strength was going to result in little, feeble blows.
 
Pentheseleia: “You hit like a boy.”
 
She returned with a blow to the stomach, and then she grabbed her sister and threw her to the ground. She jumped on her and grabbed her head in a lock. Her strong muscles flexed under the tension, bulging up against Hippolyta’s neck.
 
Hippolyta struggled in the lock. Her wiggling forced Pentheseleia to move with her until they reached a tree. Hippolyta mustered her strength and kicked off of it, knocking Pentheseleia backwards and setting Hippolyta free. Hippolyta gasped for breath but got to her feet, careful to be on guard. Pentheseleia snarled and slowly rose, back hunched and ready to pounce.
 
Pentheseleia: “I hate you, Lyta. I hate you and I hate your scummy bastard daughter!”
 
Hippolyta blinked. Was that true? Antiope hated her. Pentheseleia hated her. Did Melanippe hate her? Did Nakia? The only one who didn’t hate her was Bremusa, who she had hated instead. This all seemed messed up. In that moment she wanted to drop it all and leave. Go back to Troy, find Creusa and be free. Free like Antiope.
 
Suddenly Pentheseleia roared and charged. Hippolyta panicked. She thought she saw hate there, in those angry eyes. She couldn’t stand it. Her head hurt, her body was sluggish from the cannabis. She just wanted to go to sleep.
 
She was knocked over, she stumbled wildly and clumsily. She usually had more grace in battle but she had no mind for it thanks to the drugs and the pain. She toppled over and she felt her head hit something very hard. Suddenly the pain was gone, freed. She saw the sky and the clouds and the sun. She saw her sister’s face appear, panicked and terrified. She was lying after all. There was no hate there. Hippolyta would be sure to make fun of her for that later. The llama dancing liar had a beautiful heart after all.
 
Then she saw something else. A baby.
 
Hippolyta: “My—my baby—”
 
She tried to reach out, past Pentheseleia, but she couldn’t move her arms.
 
Pentheseleia was crying. She was saying something but Hippolyta couldn’t hear her. She just heard a long whine. Why was she crying? She didn’t like to see her little sister cry. Any of them. The baby wasn’t crying though.
 
She tried to say Creusa, but her mouth wouldn’t move.
 
She tried to think straight, but her brain wouldn’t think.
 
Then she tried to see, but her eyes wouldn’t see.
 
She wished her mammi was there. She would know what to do.
 
Finally, a final thought crept into her bleeding brain.
 
Mammi, where are you?

7429
7429

IDK

PostSep 23, 2019#93

As another thread of the Never-ending Story weaves on into a third dimension, softly resetting itself after the weight of Plot had nearly brought it down once again, there stands two new guardians ready to watch and lend a hand. These guardians are, in fact, known as the Hands of NeS, and they are tasked with handling the balance of conflict within the story, pushing for conflict when there is not enough, pulling for order when conflict threatens to be too much, and throwing themselves to serve and protect the story whenever its needed. Their predecessors fell in the prior thread, and their meeting place, known once as 1337, fell into ruins as well, so the new Hands of NeS took it upon themselves to renovate the realm. The two now stand as silhouettes before its new, brightly-lit entrance.

Silhouette #1: "A bit bright, isn't it?"

Silhouette #2: "Don't ruin the moment, G."

Adjusting for the light, the entrance now more apparently shows itself as an open doorway, with its wooden door swung inwards. The doorway, however, doesn't seem connected to to any sort of wall, and the ground itself seems to be more of a suggestion than a reality, leaving the figures still standing in something of a void. A frosted store-front window hangs in the middle of the air next to the door, blocking most of the view beyond it, and only a few random sections of brick facade and dark wood beams exist, apparently floating in thin air as well, to provide the impression of a building. Only hints of a night sky and shadows of streets provide any other context in this otherwise surreal setting. An old-fashioned, dark green sign hangs above the door with "IDK" written in clear, white text on it.

The first figure that had been silhouetted leans his weight to one leg in a cocksure fashion. At a glance, he comes off like a white guy street punk that hasn't caught up with the times, wearing a denim jacket over an autumn-colored flannel shirt mostly covering a black T-shirt, faded and torn jeans that had once been black, and a pair of classic Converse All-Star sneakers. His hair, matching the fall tones of the flannel, run untamed down to his shoulders, and styled in a fashion resembling Kevin Bacon's hair from the movie "Tremors" or perhaps Hayden Christensen's from the Star Wars prequels nobody seems to like. He snaps and points a finger in a trigger fashion at the other, winking with his left, discolored eye.


Silhouette #1/"G": "That's Evil G, Geb, and I live to ruin moments."

The other figure, at a glance, seems to be an identical twin brother, though his demeanor and attire clash with Evil G's like night and day. This man, Gebohq, wore an orange cardigan over a white-collared shirt and a blue tie with neat, black dress slacks that easily gave the impression of a young Mr. Rogers on his old children's TV show. Unlike Evil G, this guy's hair had been cut much shorter, resembling perhaps Mark Hamill's hair in the Star Wars movies everyone seems to like, and his face also bears a light, trim beard. The pair of dark Van shoes are the only sign that he might share some similar personality with Evil G. He stands with his hands on his hips in response to Evil G.

Gebohq: "Well nothing will ruin what's to come. After what seems like forever, we finally have built before us on the ruins of 1337 what is possibly the most perfect place to exist!"

Evil G: "Amen to that!"

The two lean to either side of the window and catch a glimpse of displays full of baked goods, including a vast array of doughnuts.

Gebohq / Evil G: "Mmm... doughnuts..."

A moment passes as the two are lost in their own sugar-filled fantasies before self-consciousness over each other snaps them back to sobriety.

Gebohq: "I'm still trying to figure out what "IDK" stands for."

Evil G: "I don't know."

Gebohq: "You're the one who picked out the name! What name did you give it?"

Evil G: "I don't know."

Gebohq: "Look, I know we're supposed to be at odds with each other, but you don't need to be a pain about this. Just tell me."

Evil G: "I... don't... know."

Gebohq: "Does it stand for Interdimensional Doughnut Kiosk?"

Evil G: "I don't know!"

Gebohq: "Maybe something fancy and epic like, uh... Intermediary Deliberation Keep!"

Evil G: "Listen to me -- I don't know."

Gebohq: "...Infinite Diabetic Killzone?"

Evil G: "I DON'T KNOW!"

Gebohq: "Fine, keep your secrets then. I'm going to go inside."

Evil G: "Idiot..."

The two walk through the door, Evil G following after Gebohq. The inside, while still filled with strange gaps in the walls, floor, and ceiling to see out into nothingness, seems to contradict what was visible outside in that it seems more "complete" in its structure. The floor spreads out in a tile design, and while some spots still expose the black-and-white checkerboard look once spread throughout 1337, many of them now have a more marbled appearance to them. Hugging the back and one of the sides, counter space blocks the space between customer and workers, though at this time at least, nobody but the two Hands are present. The counters themselves are lined with glass cases and plates of confections and other baked goods seen before, but now in full detail: delicious dutchies, stacks of stack of mekitsi, beaver tails, crullers, maple bars, ox-tongue pastry, kroštule, Berliners, gulab jamun, Boston cremes... the list goes on, some dishes even seemingly otherworldly. While the view of what was presumably the kitchen behind the counters were blocked off by a wall, the rest of the cozy space dots itself with various styles off furniture, some more kitsch and antique with others more matching an IKEA set, broken by a wooden beam of a pillar here and there. Some of the walls decorate themselves with an equally eclectic mix of books on shelves as well as decorations with no particular rhyme or reason other than to give the space "character" though it thankfully stops short of looking like "flair" from an Applebee's or T.G.I.F. restaurant.

Gebohq: "After you, good sir."

To add to the mock politeness, Gebohq bends over by his waist and sweeps his one hand to the counter. Evil G sticks his tongue out and mocks a curtsy before grabbing a nearby plate and piling it with his selections, with Gebohq following suit.

Evil G: "So how's the wife and kid?"

Gebohq: "Rachel's taken up making video reviews though the Internet, which hasn't been easy, but she seems to love it, and it lets her be at home more with Karma."

Evil G: "I thought the kid was going to be named Gebswoq."

Gebohq: "Best not to talk about it. What about you?"

Evil G: "Oh, you know, Young's still selling her crochet projects off Etsy, which seem to be popular after people found out she made a hat for that rat guy on Hero Force, and Chance is still kickin'. Literally. He kicked me again this morning. If I didn't like the ankle-biter so much, I'd kick him right off a cliff."

Gebohq: "I can feel the love."

Evil G: "Hey, at least I didn't kick a puppy!"

Gebohq: "That was one time! And we both did that, before you became an alternate me from a broken spun-off reality."

Evil G: "More like before YOU became and alternate ME from a lame, boring reality!"

Gebohq: "Still delivering pizzas to adolescent monsters living in sewers in under a half hour?"

Evil G: "I don't know -- still teaching law students about the finer points of underwater basket weaving?"

Gebohq: "I'll have you know that-- oh hey! I just got it!"

Evil G: "Got what?"

Gebohq: "The name of this place! 'I Donut Know'... eh?"

Silence follows as Evil G just stares with cold, still eyes.

Evil G: "I hate you."

Gebohq: "I love you too."

Pivoting in place to better ignore him, Evil G takes his plate and takes a seat in a futuristic looking office chair meant for some powerful CEO. Gebohq, in turns, takes a seat alongside in a leather recliner old with decades of use. With one hand, Gebohq chows down on a doughnut in the shape of an ouroboros, and with the other, he picks up a TV remote and points it at the flat-screen TV in front of them.

Gebohq: "We should probably see how NeS is doing right now."

Waving a confection in the shape of an endless knot at Gebohq, Evil G responds with a full mouth.

Evil G: "I hophe Luu-fee-en ef doin' uh-ight."

Gebohq: "I'm sure my sister, Losien, is doing just fine. I just hope she and any of the other heroes aren't trashing that Chris guy too hard."

Evil G: "Who?"

Gebohq: "Chris the Bad Guy. He got introduced as Losien's antagonist at the end of the last thread."

Evil G: "Is that really his name? Sounds like he's a try-hard."

Gebohq: "OK, "Evil G" -- whatever you say."

With a push of a button, Gebohq turns the TV on to show Losien and Chris the Bad Guy singing 'Somewhere Out There'. Gebohq and Evil G both stare dumbfounded before Evil G breaks the silence.

Evil G: "Ha! Classic NeS!"

Gebohq: "Not much of a scene though."

Evil G: "It's just like the good ol' days of NeS! Full of pointless absurdity and pop culture references! Though I have to wonder if that's the guy's actual singing voice. I'm not convinced it isn't dubbed."

Gebohq: "We can't be stuck in the past forever, you know. That's why NeS got soft-rebooted, after all. I wonder if we need to step in and bring a little more order for anyone new getting involved--"

Evil G: "--like hell we don't! I'm not going to waltz in every time somebody coughs. Make the writers do their damn jobs!"

Gebohq: "I suppose we should wait and watch for now..."

Evil G: "And riff!"

Gebohq: "...but seriously, I have to know. What does 'IDK' stand for?"

Evil G sighs.

39819
Site Admin
39819

Desire for Clemency

PostSep 26, 2019#94

People were marching toward the Otrerianan Longhouse. Some were angry, others panicked, but everyone had to know what was going to happen next.
 
The crowd had come to a stop a few metres from the door to the seat of power. Inside was Pentheseleia and her sisters, hiding from the public. It had been days and the Amazons were deprived a leader and as a group of very hot-headed, competitive and proud people, they needed strong leadership. At the front of the gathering, the more rambunctious characters were growing agitated and eager for something to happen. A woman, as big and strong as Hercules himself, shoved past the others to step forward. Her blonde hair was in a very narrow, tight ponytail, sculpted to her skull. Her eyes were painted with white circles around them and her jaw spoke of centuries of warriors’ blood. Even amongst the tall and strong Amazons, many of whom would tower over the average man, she was of an elevated stature. When she spoke, her husky voice was like gravel crunching in her throat.
 
Polemusa: “She hides away from us! Like a simpering pup! She has murdered her own sister and we stand idly by, why!?”
 
Thermodosa: “It was an accident!”
 
Thermodosa, unlike Polemusa, was very short. But what she lacked in height, she made up with pure determination in battle. She would scrap, bite, scratch and claw her way through any physical confrontation with zero consideration for honour or respect.
 
Polemusa: “We only have her word for that! She accidentally kills her sister and becomes queen? We are to accept that, are we?”
 
Thermodosa: “She would have been queen anyway! Queen Hippolyta had no heirs!”
 
Polemusa: “Why wait, when she could have it now!?”
 
Many Amazons were sided with Polemusa. There were no clear facts about the incident aside from the words of Pentheseleia herself and after her initial report, she sealed herself up without word to anyone.
 
Thermodosa: “Just wait until she comes out!”
 
Polemusa: “When will that be!? Tomorrow? A week? A month? What do we do in the meantime? Sit on our hands like cowardly Greek boys?”
 
There was no response to that. Even those that thought as Thermodosa did, were stranded without a leader to step up. Before anyone could get the bright idea to proffer themselves as the new queen, people were moving to allow a black skinned woman march through them. Bremusa wore a stern expression on her face and a short sword in her hand.
 
Polemusa brightened.
 
Polemusa: “Bremusa! Commander! Defender of Queen Hippolyta! Are you going to take charge here? Pentheseleia must be brought to justice for her crime!”
 
Bremusa, and two other determined warriors, stepped forward, towards the longhouse with their swords drawn.
 
Thermodosa: “The queen wouldn’t want her sister harmed!”
 
Polemusa: “She also wouldn’t want to be killed by her sister!”
 
Bremusa: “Are you both ready?”
 
Antandré: “Always ready.”
 
Evandré: “In the name of Queen Hippolyta!”
 
The three of them turned to face the crowd and held their swords at the ready.
 
Bremusa: “Should any woman here feel the need to cross the threshold of this building, know this-! We shall cut down any and all of you!”
 
Polemusa: “What!? You would defend the pretender!?”
 
Bremusa: “We know of no pretender! Only the rightful Queen of the Amazons, next in the line of succession.”
 
Polemusa: “But you defended Hippolyta! You defended her when all of us would have thrown her out! And now you defend her murderer!?”
 
Bremusa: “Hippolyta was on pain medication and emotionally broken. Pentheseleia didn’t know that. They fought in an unfair match. Pentheseleia would not have attacked the queen if she had known. The deed is now done. Hippolyta would forgive her sister, as she… forgave me.”
 
There was some murmuring. It was common knowledge that Hippolyta held great animosity towards Bremusa, for what she had done.
 
Polemusa appeared eager to challenge Bremusa, but also weary that she may be in the wrong. She was strong and ambitious, but she didn’t care to become a villain.
 
Polemusa: “If what you say is true, why isn’t she here to explain herself?”
 
Bremusa: “She accidentally killed her sister.”
 
She didn’t feel she needed to expand on that.
 
Polemusa: “And how long are we to wait?”
 
Bremusa: “As long as it takes.”
 
This caused more unsettled murmuring. They might have been swayed by Bremusa’s dedication, but they were not swayed enough to wait forever. Yet, the three warriors stood steadfast as a thin line between the crowd and the longhouse. Their position was suicide, everyone saw. Should the Amazons decide to move against Pentheseleia, the three would be no match for so many, strong and fearless warriors. But that willingness to sacrifice themselves burned within the hearts of every Amazon warrior in the throng.
 
Polemusa: “Then… we wait.”
 
She backed off.
 
Polemusa: “For now.”
 
Some were satisfied enough to leave and return to their duties, while others remained and gossiped or plotted. There were a lot of si’la around, who had come to see what their strong warrior-wives were getting into a frenzy over, as well as gaggles of girls who were eager to see some real fighting. Their excitement reached its peak with the arrival of Bremusa but they were now disappointed and left to chase each other around or fight with sticks in the imaginary version of the battle they had been hoping to witness.
 
 
Nakia: “I don’t know if there will be a throne for you when you return, my pet.”
 
Pentheseleia: “I don’t care. I need to set things right. I need… I need absolution. I need forgiveness. From someone. Anyone willing to forgive me.”
 
Nakia: “I forgive you.”
 
Pentheseleia: “You don’t count.”
 
Nakia: “That’s mean.”
 
Pentheseleia: “I could have butchered her to pieces and you’d forgive me, your my mammi.”
 
Nakia narrowed her eyes.
 
Nakia: “I wouldn’t go that far. She was my daughter too, you know?”
 
Pentheseleia stalled.
 
Pentheseleia: “I-I’m sorry, mammi. I…”
 
Nakia straightened her spine, as though a better posture would help her keep from crying.
 
Nakia: “I loved her very much. With you and my other girls, it was easy. You loved me because I am your kin. Lyta had no prior relationship, no reason to love me. But she did anyway. I was—she was just like her—you took her from me. If you think they are angry outside, you know nothing of what goes on in my chest. Do not underappreciate my forgiveness, Leia. It has been difficult to muster it.”
 
Pentheseleia: “I am sorry, mammi. I am.”
 
There was a moment of silence in the bedroom. Nakia was sat up in her bed. She had been feeling ill, which she knew was the emotional storm belting within her, and stayed in bed for the day. Pentheseleia toyed with one of Nakia’s hairbrushes as she tried to think of what she should do.
 
Pentheseleia: “I’m sorry that your forgiveness isn’t enough, mammi. I need it from someone who holds me no love. No respect. I need forgiveness for more than what I did… I need forgiveness for my thinking. I was wrong. All along. I should have been more open to Lyta. I… I… she didn’t get to…”
 
She quickly wiped her own tears away and turned to look at the mirror.
 
Pentheseleia: “She didn’t see her daughter, mammi. That’s all she even wanted. I didn’t just kill her physically, I killed her spiritually. I took that away from her and from my niece. I need to see her. Even if she doesn’t forgive me, at least I can relay the news myself…”
 
Nakia: “Come here, my baby.”
 
Pentheseleia obeyed and slipped into her mammi’s arms. She wept, openly now, as did Nakia. Through it, the si’la managed to say;
 
Nakia: “I approve, Leia. Go and find Creusa. What will be here, will be.”
 
 
Pentheseleia packed and set off, with just three warriors at her side, to venture to Troy in search of Creusa. For her valour and loyalty, Bremusa was left in command in her absence. She had not been crowned as queen, yet, but Bremusa had ever intention of Pentheseleia of being Queen of the Amazons upon her return. The other Amazons were placated by Bremusa’s role and settled into their routines again, though they constantly sought word of their missing, uncrowned princess. While Bremusa was aided by the twins – Andandré and Evandré – Polemusa took the role now vacated by Bremusa. She launched several assaults upon the Scythian cities as a show of force; Hippolyta the Great was gone, but the Amazons were still here.
 
Pentheseleia travelled across the Black Sea from the back of her pegasus; Cnemis. He was a great, black stallion with wings as dark as the night sky but a mane of flaming orange. With her were three warriors; Alcibie, Hippothoë and Derimacheia. Their duty was as much to protect Pentheseleia from others as herself, for Bremusa and Nakia feared what she might do if she failed to find clemency. The three of them were gryphon riders. The pegasus was a temperate beast with more tolerance for long flights, but the gryphons were less domesticated and needed to hunt for food more often than the pegasus needed to graze. Aerial hunts became a part of the daily routine as the gryphons preyed upon kestrels and eagles and other large birds.
 
Their journey across the Black Sea, where they stayed close to the western coast for the sake of landing, was long and they then had to cross the northern peninsula of Anatolia to reach Troy, which lurked in the far west next to the Aegean Sea and the Greek City States. They pressed on, however, to that city which was now infamous amongst Otreriana.

The Morning Star

PostSep 26, 2019#95

In 1246BC, the grand princess of Hattusa paraded before the excited Egyptian crowds. The Egyptian kingdom rose far from its home on the African continent and along the Levant and up to the borders of the Hittite Empire. Wars were waged, skirmishes were fought and blood was shed. While the Egyptian Empire was far larger than Hattusa’s lands, it was also stretched thinner in its extremities.
 
The battles ended with a truce, yet during that time, new wars emerged for both parties. The Hittite Empire had to contend for its land in Anatolia with the old Assyrian Empire to the east and, in humiliating fashion, its own splinter nation of Troy on the western peninsula. Unable to mount an attack against Troy and a disastrous defeat against Assyria, Hattusa was struggling to maintain itself. Pirates constantly raided their shores in the Black Sea and the Amazons slaughtered villages worth of menfolk. Instead, they turned to their old enemy – Egypt.
 
The princess was marched through Levant, where she encountered the simple tribes that lived there. They had been easily subsumed by the beast that was Egypt. The town of Jebus, known as Jerusalem by the Arabians, was a small affair with little more than a bunch of sheep for company. North of Jebus had been Lebanon, where writing had first been invented and spread to the world many years ago. But the princess’ travels took her ever south, towards the heart of that ancient kingdom.
 
Her palanquin was being carried by a bunch of strong, manly slaves that had been captured from the lands of the north-west; Europe, she thought they were called. These barbarians made excellent mules.
 
The simple folk gawked at her splendour and she revelled in it. As amazed with her glamour as the Hittites were, the people of the Levant villages were stupefied. The Egyptian military machines may have swept through the lands, but its king had not. She waved to the peasants and poked their foreheads as way of blessing them, not that she cared but it made her feel important. She didn’t know if her fingers could really bestow any god’s mercy, or not, but they seemed to believe it would, so she indulged them.
 
As the night drew on, in the town of Jebus, the entourage came to a halt to rest. Her tent was crafted hastily, but carefully, and the silk, freshly cleaned, was laid down for bedding. Food was taken from the townsfolk, sometimes bought sometimes requisitioned, and the caravan settled in for the night. Hittite guardsmen patrolled the area while the animals, what few there were, got fed. The princess’ prized cat was tied up to the central mast of the test, so he couldn’t run off into the wild and get himself lost.
 
She lounged on the silk bedding, feeling tired from the long day’s… lounging. Watching people carry her around was an exhausting affair. But she heard a faint sound, a light tinkling, coming from outside the tent. The princess sat up and strained her ears. She watched the door to the tent with an odd sense of fear. She was too afraid to call out, as though the pretty-sounding creature might take offence.
 
Woman: “Little mortal.”
 
The princess leapt from her silk sheets and spin about to face the female voice but she was struck with blinding light. The princess shielded her eyes, but it was as though the light had burnt onto her retinas.
 
Princess: “Please stop!”
 
The light dampened until the girl could see again. Before her was a short woman who was glowing like a fiery lightbulb. Her eyes were burning with blue flame while the rest of her was burning white. The white and blue flames lapped at the air and created a radiant warmth throughout the tent.
 
Woman: “More of your kind disturb my land.”
 
Princess: “My kind? Who are you?”
 
Morning Star: “I am Shahar, or Morning Star in your language. I am retired in these lands and you disturb my rest.”
 
Princess: “I didn’t do anything.”
 
Morning Star: “Your presence disturbs me.”
 
The princess, now engaged in dialogue with this creature, grew more confident and certain of herself. She knew her place as princess of the grand Hittite Empire – who was this sparkly, little imp supposed to be?
 
Princess: “Well, your presence disturbs me.”
 
There was a sudden flicker in the blue eyes from blue to red, but it lasted just a fraction of time. It was enough to worry the princess anew.
 
Morning Star: “The handful of humans here keep me satiated. The many people, like you, are too many. You annoy me.”
 
Her voice seemed not to come from her lips but from the air around the mortal princess and the accent was so thick, she felt the flame-creature was using the language for the first time.
 
Princess: “I’ll be gone by morning.”
 
Morning Star: “And then?”
 
The girl blinked and then shrugged;
 
Princess: “I’ll keep going to Pi-Ramesses.”
 
The woman’s eyes again flickered to red for a moment.
 
Morning Star: “What will happen to me?”
 
Princess: “What? How should I know?”’
 
Morning Star: “Stop coming here.”
 
Princess: “I won’t come here again!”
 
There was a pause.
 
Princess: “Do you mean everyone?”
 
Morning Star: “All of you.”
 
Princess: “I am not everyone. I can’t make everyone stop coming here. Besides, it’s not my business. What do I care?”
 
She flicked her hair from her shoulder, as though it were the full stop at the end of her argument.
 
Morning Star: “I was here long before you. And them. And the village. My people are gone, but I remain. My brother, the Evening Star, is gone too. But I remain.”
 
The princess rolled her eyes, bored of this glittering pest.
 
Princess: “Go and complain to the gods then. See if they care.”
 
Morning Star: “Your gods sent you here?”
 
Princess: “No? I mean, maybe? Aren’t we all working by the gods designs?”
 
Morning Star: “Then I should destroy your gods…”
 
The princess laughed, but the serious face on the woman brought her to a stop.
 
Princess: “You’re not joking?”
 
The Morning Star just stared at her.
 
Princess: “I think it’s time for you to go.”
 
Morning Star: “You are in my home. I will not go.”
 
Princess: “What are you? Some kind of disgruntled spirit? Did you lover leave you jilted and now you’re haunting me, a bride-to-be? Is that it?”
 
Morning Star: “I am the morning star.”
 
Princess: “Yes, you already said that. Old news, hag. Old news.”
 
Morning Star: “Mine is the tomb to which the wicked of humanity once attended. In droves they fell into my embrace. There I held them. Punished them.”
 
Princess: “Are you talking about an afterlife now? You’re not very precise, are you? You need to stick to a narrative. Stop meandering and people will listen to you more.”
 
Morning Star: “The gates of Hell have long been shut. My people fell into the ocean.”
 
Princess: “You can reminisce elsewhere, you know?”
 
Morning Star: “You are in my home.”
 
Princess: “Should I pay you for the space? It’s a dung heap town anyway, it’s not worth much. I’ve seen cows crap out more important—”
 
The princess catches herself. That was not very dignified language.
 
Morning Star: “I retired and gave Hell over, as my brother gave his over, to another deity of humanity, the God of Writers. Now a warden sits down there. Biding his time. Colluding with the one up there. Plotting to make their great religion. I am forgotten. I am retired. And you, and your kind, disturb me.”
 
Princess: “What about if I put a big sign up? It will say, ‘Here rests an annoying ghost-girl, for you own safety, don’t stay here’. Would that serve?”
 
Morning Star: “I see the evil within you.”
 
Princess: “Yes, my mother said the same thing when I stole my brother’s cookies.”
 
Morning Star: “Your sloth. Your pride. Your lust. Your gluttony. Your greed. Your envy. Your wroth.”
 
The princess yawned.
 
Morning Star: “Perhaps the gates will be opened soon.”
 
Princess: “Yes, yes. This Hell you’re blabbing about. You said there’s nobody there right now? Then maybe it would be more peaceful than here.”
 
The Morning Star’s eyes burst, again, into red flame and she thrust out her hand and burst into the princess’ chest. The girl squealed. She felt her insides writhing and recoiling from the touch of this creature and, for the first time, she saw through the guise of the pretty, flaming girl and sensed the terribleness of her being. This creature, this god, the daemon was a being of immense evil. She wasn’t evil in personality, she was created from it. The very embodiment of evil. If there were layers to evil, she was the bedrock – the zeroth foundation upon which the rest stood. The princess realised it wasn’t her innards that were in distress, it was her soul. The Morning Star, the original Devil, held her soul like it was a physical manifestation to be toyed with.
 
Then the princess saw herself – she saw her own soul. It was a rotten, decayed and corrupt thing. It was blackened, as though burnt in a great fire, that squirmed and gasped. It was hideous to behold.
 
The Morning Star released her and she scurried to the corner of the tent with one of her sheets, as though that would screen her from this foul essence.
 
Morning Star: “I am retired here. You are in my home. You disturb me.”
 
The princess now chose to consume the metaphorical humble pie;
 
Princess: “P-please forgive us. We’re just passing through. We didn’t know you were here. The animals need to rest… the barbarians too! The people! I mean the people need to rest!”
 
Morning Star: “The rest of your life will be miserable.”
 
Princess: “No! Please don’t curse me!”
 
Morning Star: “I did not. I see it. The thread of your fate. You are strongly bound to it. The gods of fate, whether the Cosmic Deities or your own pantheon, have seen fit to make you an unhappy toy in the great game of thrones.”
 
Princess: “Dur-dur-dur-durr—”
 
The Morning Star cocked her head.
 
Princess: “Sorry, a song just popped into my head there.”
 
Morning Star: “Should another great people intrude on my solitude, they shall rue the day.”
 
Princess: “I’m sure my husband-to-be will not send anyone here again. It’s a backwater, nowhere anyway—”
 
She bit her lip.
 
Princess: “I mean, it’s a pretty, quiet, countryside where the grass is green, and the girls are pretty?”
 
The princess thought about that.
 
Princess: “I seem to be getting songs in my head all of a sudden – probably my brain trying to distract me from the horror in front of me…”
 
Morning Star: “No more people.”
 
The pretty evil being dwindled, as did the light in the tent, until darkness reigned. Usually afraid of the dark, she suddenly felt much safer in it. The searing light of the Morning Star would no longer breach the quiet darkness of the night. The princess poked her head from the tent to find her guards stood there. They snapped to attention when she appeared but didn’t seem to be aware there had been any distress within the tent.
 
As she crawled back to her soft, silk sheets she began to wonder if it had been a dream. She had eaten a banana and her mother always said not to eat them before bed. She often ate them before bed, just because her mother told her not to.
 
Princess: “Oh God of Bananas. I vow never to eat your fruit before bed again.”
 
She settled into an uneasy sleep.
 
 
The trip to Pi-Ramesses was long and arduous, for the palanquin bearers. For the princess and her maids, it was an annoying, boring journey across bland, uninspiring lands of the Levant. Not until they entered Egypt itself did things get more interesting. The cities along the coast of the eastern Mediterranean Sea, known as the Levantine Sea, were bustling with trade of exotic and exciting goods. Far, far more than she ever dreamed of in Hattusa. Immediate access to the Mediterranean made Egypt a commercial centre of the known world. Goods from all of the Mediterranean powers – Carthage, Greece, Troy, Hibernia – were brought into Egypt. Goods from land routes to Arabia, Hattusa and Babylon also arrived daily. Even lands of Asia – China and India – were selling products in Egypt, much to the delight of the princess and her company. They quickly went on a spending spree with each coastal city they visited until they finally reached the Nile Delta and began the last stretch to the new capital of Egypt – Pi-Ramesses. Named after himself, she understood, the new capital was built by Ramesses II. Not that she minded. A confident man was a good thing, she thought.
 
People from the Levant, and surely from the town of Jebus even, had been conscripted into service and enslaved to carry out the work on Pi-Ramesses. She watched them, thin and sweating, as they hauled massive boulders down roads. She wished she could have arrived later, when it was all finished and there weren’t so many grubby slaves around.
 
She was carted down the road by her barbarians, while she picked at her grapes that lay on a platter at her side. She was imagining her new husband in all his grandeur with great fancy. Her palanquin suddenly came to a halt, jerking her, as a slave fell before them. She snarled and grabbed a grape in her hand, ready to pelt it at the idiot’s head.
 
She paused. For a moment, the withered body of the slave reminded her of her own withered soul, as she had seen in her dream with the Morning Star. She hesitated.
 
She put the grape down.
 
Princess: “Move.”
 
The slave bowed and scraped himself out of her way and on they went.
 
Finally, she was deposited at the steps of a grand building, which she delighted in. It was elegant and cool, keeping the hot Egyptian air from her pretty hair. She sauntered inside to meet her husband, Ramesses II. He was commonly known as Ozymandias throughout Anatolia and he claimed to have been reincarnated from a previous pharaoh. She didn’t believe that, but many pharaohs claimed to be reincarnated ancestors and most of them considered themselves gods. She smirked to herself. She knew she could make this god keenly aware of his mortal manhood once he was in her bed.
 
She stepped forth.
 
Princess: “I am Princess Maathorneferure of Hattusa, oh Pharaoh of Egypt!”
 
The Egyptian king glanced up from his schematics on the table with a wince.
 
Ozymandias: “Your name is what!?”
 
She groaned. That wasn’t the start she had hoped for.
 
Princess: “Maathorneferure.”
 
His tongue recoiled at the attempt.
 
Ozymandias: “Okay, okay. I am definitely not going to bother trying to learn that.”
 
Princess: “B-But it’s my name!”
 
Ozymandias: “You’re Harem Girl #34 now.”
 
Princess: “Harem!?”
 
Ozymandias: “Where’s your dowry? Your idiot brother had better have given me the full amount. I need that gold to get more stone!”
 
The princess felt her world crumbling before her, even as the building around her was being erected.
 
Princess: “It’s… outside…”
 
Ozymandias: “Great. Good. Okay, off with you, Harm Girl… what number did I give you again?”
 
The princess’ lip wobbled.
 
Princess: “Thirty-four…”
 
Ozymandias: “Right. Harem Girl #34, you can go and lounge about with the rest of them. If it turns out I gave you the same number as another one, just choose another number. I’ll never see you again anyway. More important things to be done than bedding airheaded princesses!”
 
Princess: “But—why did you marry me!?”
 
Ozymandias: “Dowry, alliance. Plus, I don’t have a Hattusan wife yet. Wives are like Pokémon, gotta catch ‘em all!”
 
Princess: “I want to be, the very best. Like no one ever was…”
 
Ozymandias: “What?”
 
As peppy as the song in her head was, she was utterly dejected.
 
Princess: “Just… a song…”
 
Ozymandias: “That’s nice, isn’t it? That’s about all women are good at. Singing, dancing, playing a lyre or something?”
 
She tarried.
 
Ozymandias: “Off with you then. Go, go. Shoo.”
 
He wafted his hand at her and went back to his schematics.
 
She turned. A few other women were nearby, beckoning her. Other wives. She saw a white girl, possibly one of the barbarian people from Europe. There was a black skinned woman from southern Africa, a golden-skinned woman from China. There really did seem to be a wide variety. She, unhappily, went to join the collection.

7429
7429

For Alan

PostSep 29, 2019#96

Among the incomprehensible totality of Forever, the NeSiverse is but a grain in an endless beach. Within the NeSiverse, the Milky Way Galaxy shines as only a speck, and while even viewing just the galaxy, worlds such as Orion remain relatively imperceptible. The world of Orion, however, seated one of the great galactic powers, its staggering spacescrapers swarming with starships trading in largely shady business deals.

One innocuous shuttle, iridescent in color and in the general shape of a lotus flower, floats down towards the planet surface and towards one of the relatively warm and pleasant coastlines. Even here, though, Orions and other humanoids seem to crawl about along the beaches and coastal cities, their illicit activities hidden but still felt. The small spacecraft drifts gently, landing in a field not far from one of the beaches, surprisingly disturbing nothing below it.

As one of its 'petals' slowly starts to lower to the ground, an imposing Orion male of a light green complexion stands at attention stands ready for whomever might walk out. He wears a sharp white suit that resembles something that an American southern gentleman or perhaps naval officer would wear, and he stood with the air of a practiced politician that has seen service, though of what sort is hard to tell, only that it was hard service. Despite his apparent background, he looks uneasy as he assesses his situation in waiting. He turns to another man standing behind him, also Orion but with darker green skin whose attire seems far less prestigious and holds a tablet in a servile manner. Before the imposing Orion says anything, the other, more servile one, starts speaking in anticipation.


Orion Servant: "There have been no other vessels reported to have escorted this shuttle as per the agreement, Master Noir."

The imposing man, Noir, still stands uneasy, unconsciously fiddles with his cufflinks. He takes no note as the servant attempts to further ease his master by straightening Noir's tie.

Noir: "And yet we still know nothing about this so-called Coordination or what they want with us except hearsay from the Imperium and the High Empire."

Orion Servant: "If I may ask, Master... what hearsay?"

Noir: "That the Coordination is a threat to them, and nothing is a threat to those two in this galaxy, or this universe."

The servant snaps open a metal tin lined with cigarettes, which Noir snatches one from without looking. As he puts it to his mouth, the servant lights it for him, the motions natural as if done thousands of times before. Noir takes a long drag, though as he notices someone finally stepping out, he quickly drops the half-used, still lit cigarette and steps on it with his boot. Before he can even identify what steps out, Noir slaps a smile on his face and starts speaking.

Noir: "Welcome to the Orion Headworld. I am Colonel Noir, the acting delegate for the Orion interest in this--"

Coordination figure: "Yes, Colonel, we're aware of your people's 'interest' and that is why I am here."

As the figure steps down the "petal" ramp and stands next to Noir, it's quite clear how little they are next to him, not only in height and build but in the way they dress and carry themselves, wearing what he could only describe as "colorful pajamas" and perhaps just having woken up. They seem humanoid as well, to Noir's growing relief -- perhaps Indian even, if Noir knew of humans -- though non-binary in gender, and from what he could tell, 'artificial' in nature like an android or hologram. Unlike any artificial beings he knows of though, this figure seems more "real" than anyone or thing he's met, as if the fidelity of their very existence sits on a higher level.  The figure holds their face briefly, as if to wake up, and breathes in before speaking again.

Coordination figure: "Forgive my rudeness, please. It's just... it's been a long trip here. My name is Padma."

Padma extends a hand towards Noir, and he in turns looks at it for a moment with uncertainty, conflicting feelings coursing through his mind at the person before him. Furthermore, he was used to taking a hand gently and perhaps with a kiss if it was a woman's hand and a firm grasp of forearms if it was a man, but as this person seems neither, Noir tentatively shakes their hand.

Noir: "I presume you are the delegate for the Coordination interest in this matter, yes?"

Padma: "The Coordination is made up of many Interests, and I have citizenship in at least three of them. I think. It's been a while since I've had to think about that."

The Orion colonel blinks in confusion.

Padma: "...right, your people think in property. But yes, enough other Interests in the Coordination agreed to send a representative -- me --  to reconcile the matter. I hope we can arrange something that works for everyone."

To punctuate their words, Padma presents a weak, if genuine smile. Noir's own overcompensating smile drops. In response, Noir sweeps his hand away from the ship and gestures towards the opposite direction.

Noir: "This way, please."

Padma walks in the direction given, down towards a light dirt path, with Noir and his servant following behind, and the two of them notice that Padma seems to leave no footprints behind them. The path ends after hardly a minute's walk in the field, though, and at the end of the path is a small clearing with a small dirt mound in the center of it. The clearing itself is roped off at ankle-height, and though the rope would seem to hardly stop anything from crossing it over, several more militant-and-mercenary Orion types seem to act foolish as they attempt to cross or destroy the rope, only to seemingly struggle against themselves as they attempt to do so. When Noir approaches, though, the group stops their attempts and snap to attention. Noir nods to them before turning his attention to Padma.

Noir: "These are my subordinates, Miss--uh--Mist--err--"

Padma: "Just 'Padma', if you will."

Noir: "--thank you, Padma. Yes, as I was saying, these are some of the best special forces we Orions have at our disposal."

Padma: "Is that so."

Their weak smile from earlier curls more warmly.

Noir: "Despite what it may appear like, this area here seems to be under a ward of some sort, one that rose up after a recent attempt to clear the land for its new owners. Nothing seems to be able to pass through this barrier ei...ther..."

He trails off as Padma simply walks over the rope, bending down to look at a tiny billboard not far from the anthill that reads "PROPERTY OF ALAN" and, underneath that, "MEMBERS OF THE COORDINATION" in a size just large enough to read. Padma shakes their head.

Padma: "Tsk tsk, I expected better from fellow Coords."

Noir: "So this is the work of someone in your government, then?"

Padma: "A new member group, yes. Clearly, they have some explaining to do."

Noir: "I'm glad you agree! Whoever this "Alan" is, they're violating Orion property law with this joke of theirs, blocking off this patch of dirt."

Padma: "Anthill."

Noir: "Excuse me?"

Padma: "It's an anthill,  and it's a part of their home."

Noir: "...I'm not sure if I'm understanding you."

Padma: "Oh geez, how do I explain this? You see, ants often live in what are called "anthills" though they actually live in fairly large and complex tunnels beneath and beyond the hill itself--"

Noir: "I know what an anthill is!"

His burst of anger quickly shifts to confusion, which only sinks deeper as a thought dawns on him.

Noir: "Are you suggesting... that these ants belong to the Coordination?"

Padma: "I'm suggesting no such thing!"

Noir: "Oh thank gods."

Padma: "I'm clearly saying that these ants are fellow citizens in the Coordination."

Noir: "..."

Padma: "They're known as Alan, and they and those at this site identify with several Interests which embody tenets of exploration, creation, philosophy, communication, and antitrust practices."

Tiny Voice: "That was a bad joke!"

Noir: "Who said that?"

He whips around to his subordinates and his servant.

Noir: "I didn't give any of you permission to speak!"

Tiny Voice: "I said it!"

All the subordinates and the servant shake their heads in defense of the angry glare from Noir.

Tiny Voice: "Down here!"

Slowly, Noir cranks his head sideways and down to the ground, where he sees an alien ant. Well, not alien to the world of Orion, but compared to the ants of earth, this one was a neon purple, and its antennae had antennae of its own. The eagle-eyed observer can even see that it's wearing what appears to be a yellow jumpsuit.

Tiny Voice: "I hope you won't be cracking jokes too!"

Padma: "I apologize, Alan. I can't help make puns, and I will refrain from making such insensitive jokes from now on."

Alan: "Apology accepted. Are you the one the rest of the Coordination sent for us?"

Padma: "Yes, I am. Now what's all this about declaring property. You've disturbed the local people with an inappropriate use of a Level-1 Naughtrapartition. Isn't that right, Colonel?"

Noir: "........"

Padma: "Look how upset they are! This is no way to treat your neighbors!"

Alan: "We had no choice! Our words fell on deaf ears, and they were going to destroy our home hub! Do you know how difficult it is to find a clean site free from their infestation? Alan here can tell you the horror stories from the Underground Railroad she facilitates, and Alan over there can give you the pollution reports from the past hundred years."

Noir's eyes widen as he sees more ants approach, slowly gathering in the hundreds and thousands even, some neon purple like the first while others are orange and metallic-grey. He stares in disbelief as he even spots what seem to be other tiny humanoids and other non-humanoids among the crowd of wildly different types. One of the first two to join speaks up.

Alan: "The slaves we've helped escape make it clear that Orions only understand in terms of property, and so we have to speak their language!"

The third chimes in.

Alan: "And at this rate, they'll make this planet uninhabitable for even themselves in no later than fifty years!"

Padma: "OK, OK, I think the man here has heard your concerns. I'm sure he'd be happy to negotiate with the people who want to co-locate with you here to ensure that both parties can benefit from each other. What do you say, Colonel Noir?"

Noir: "...the ants... are talking..."

Padma: "Yes, it's so much more productive when we can talk things out, wouldn't you agree?"

Noir: "...this is absurd."

Padma: "Pardon?"

Noir: "Absurd! All of this! They...they need to be utterly wiped out!"

Padma: "Oh dear -- hold on now, I don't think that would be in your best--"

Noir: "They're an infestation on a scale unimaginable! And some shrimp in sleepwear is supposed to stop us? We'll scoop the whole site clear, and then flush out their tunnels..."

Padma: "Your neighbors wouldn't take kindly to this news, I'd think."

Noir: "These insects are NOT my neighbors, you twat!"

Padma: "Oh, I was thinking more about this galaxy's Federation...

Noir: "Those dirty drow and their friends? They wouldn't dare."

Padma: "...and the Alliance that fought against the Galactic Empire..."

Noir: "They still have their hands full, and have even had some of their operations Orion-funded!"

Padma: "...and I hear the High Empire really doesn't like slavery..."

Noir: "W-we don't have slaves! We have a strong work ethic built on paying the hours you owe service to your ma--your managers! And we have a very serviceable relationship with their government!"

Padma: "Yes, and all those neighbors who have given you space out of respect for your 'neutrality' in their affairs may well change their minds when they hear how you conduct your business."

Noir: "Oh this is rich. You think you can threaten the Orion Syndicate? You won't have much luck with that if you never leave."

He snaps his fingers, and the special forces from before all point their weapons towards Padma.

Noir: "It'll be unfortunate but small news to hear of a delegate's transport meeting an "accident" on the way over. Happens all the time. Of course, your people will want to know what happens, and we'll compensate them tremendously for their loss."

Alan: "You'll never get away with this! We're sharing all this live with the rest of the Coordination as you speak!"

Noir: "Like that matters. If this "Coordination" was so powerful, they'd have stopped us long ago if they wanted, yes? They either can't or don't care enough--"

Padma: "Ugh, I didn't think I'd be staying this downscaled for so long. Urrf...."

Noir: "What're you blathering about now?"

Alan: "Padma's a seventh-generation pixon. They and their kind naturally live in high definition, and this universe to them is very low-def by comparison."

Noir: "...what?"

Alan: "That's not their normal size in this universe."

On cue, Padma seems unable to control themselves any longer and loosens their belt. In an unceremonious flash, Padma grows at least three magnitudes larger, rivaling the size of some spacescrapers. To Padma, Noir and the others would be no larger now than ants themselves. They stare up, awe-struck at what they see before them.

Padma: "Oh yeah, that feels much better. Could you repeat what you were saying before?"

Noir: "Uh.... well..."

Padma: "Hold on, it's hard for me to hear you like this."

Clenching the belt tight, Padma instantly shrinks back down to their previous size.

Padma: "There we go. Could you make it quick, though? I really don't like to be in this situation, if you know what I mean."

Noir: "W-w-what I was saying was that we'll be mmmmore than happy to resolve this in a peaceful and agreeable manner for both of us..."

What seems to be a walkie-talkie on one of the special forces starts speaking.

Walkie-Talkie Voice: "Noir Unit, there was a momentary sighting of an unidentified...super-giant? They were spotted in your area, please report. We are sending reinforcements at this time and need to know--"

Noir rushes over and snatches the walkie-talkie.

Noir: "That's n-n-not n-necessary, Commander! This is Colonel Noir aaaaand everything's fine here. Peachy-keen. No need to send anything, thank you."

Walkie-Talkie Voice: "But Colonel, what we saw was--"

Noir: "--nothing! You saw nothing! DO NOT SEND ANYONE!"

He looks behind himself towards Padma, hunched over the walkie-talkie, before pivoting himself both physically and psychologically. Holding the walkie-talkie behind his back, he offers his hand to Padma while bending at the waist.

Noir: "We owe you a great debt in, uh, coordinating the needs of the Orion people and ...Alan."

Speaking through his gritted teeth, his smile is admirably professional.

Noir: "Thank. You."

Padma: "I'm glad I could help! But this was really nothing, and the Coordination isn't one for debts anyway, so please, pay it forward. Take care then!"

All Alans begin rejoicing in tiny, cute cheers. One turns their attention to Noir.

Alan: "Do you think we could arrange for us opening up shop? We think we have a lot to offer in the Orion telecommunications market at competitive prices that would benefit the consumer."

Noir begins to sob.

39819
Site Admin
39819

Royal Succession Part I

PostOct 02, 2019#97

9999BC was the fateful year that the ultranexus of Earth exploded and wiped several continents off of the map of the planet. Many died in the calamitous event. Some were slain in the very event itself. Others were killed as a result of the aftermath.
 
The balance of aether on the world was sent spiralling out of control; disturbing weather patterns, causing rapid mutations in living and non-living things, empowering some and unempowering others.
 
One of the human tribes that never reached the same prominence as Atlantis or the Lemurian civilisations was known as Egypt. The people were under the thrall of the deity known as Ra.
 
When on land, the visage of Ra towered high into the sky, like a great colossus. He stood, facing ever down at his people, like a gigantic statue. He moved rarely and only at night. Many would awaken to great surprise to find the god, who had stood still their whole lives, was suddenly down the street.
 
But when the ultranexus blasted apart, the shockwave swept across Egypt. Ra moved faster than any had ever imagined such a being would. With his essence, he withstood the wave of explosive magic residue and absorbed it; protecting the people of Egypt from disaster.
 
The blast was enough, however, that even this old, stoic deity was weakened and virtually destroyed. With his strength waned, his body dematerialised, and he was swept into the heavens to watch the people of Egypt as an aethereal being, never to return to physical form.
 
The minor nexus, that had once been a strong basin of magic for Egyptian mages, was depleted by the devastation of the ultranexus. The Egyptians lost their magic, they lost their deity and they had to scrabble to reclaim livelihoods. The River Nile became the greatest source of growth for the Egyptians and their civilisation closed in around its banks.
 
In the absence of the ancient, now lost, civilisations, Egypt was primed to become the next great superpower of the world.
 
 
The year 1335BC and the Egyptian Kingdom has struggled and fought through the centuries. Yet the deity that once gave his corporeal being to protect the people of Egypt was forgotten, lost in the skies. A new god of the land stood in his stead and this god was a jealous god that did not share godhood with others.
 
The pantheon was abandoned.
 
Aten, the solar god, stood at the new god of Egypt.
 
His figure rose whenever the world turned, appearing at the centre of the plasmatic ball at the centre of the galaxy. The monotheistic deity commanded absolute obedience from his subjects and the prime subject was none other than the king of Egypt himself; Akhenaten.
 
Akhenaten enforced his family to awaken at the crack of dawn to pray to Aten as he rose through the sky. The flaming wings spread from the sun’s disc and its radiance burned down upon the Earth.
 
Akhenaten: “Oh, divine Aten! Your splendour shakes us to our core!”
 
They bowed, though the king’s children glanced at each other with dubious hearts. They had remembered the many old gods and, above all, they remembered the great Ra.
 
Akhenaten: “Tut!”
 
The younger of the two sons, Tutankhaten, snapped to attention.
 
Tutankhaten: “Yes father!?”
 
Akhenaten: “You are not bowing deeply enough. You show great disrespect to Aten.”
 
Tutankhaten: “Sorry father!”
 
He bent his back so fast that he smacked his forehead onto the stone balcony floor. His sister, Meriaten, had a good chuckle at that but she quickly silenced herself under the fierce gaze of her father. They remained there for thirty minutes, by which time Tutankhaten’s bones were aching.
 
Akhenaten: “I believe Aten will be pleased with us this day. He has overseen the wealthiest period in Egyptian history. We owe Him everything.”
 
Meriaten was already on her feet and she helped Tutankhaten to his. She offered him his small cane, which he accepted. Few children had to plod about with a stick but the boy’s clubbed foot made it a necessity. Last year he had gotten malaria too, which he luckily ploughed through – all thanks to Aten, according to his father.
 
Their mother was last to rise.
 
Her long legs unfurled like a giraffe and she stood tall and straight-backed. The very figure of regal. She was several inches taller than her husband, and the hat she wore gave her many additional inches still.
 
Nefertiti: “Aten has brought us many gifts, may He be praised. But it is time for classes to begin.”
 
Akhenaten: “Good, good. But wait! I heard Meriaten talking about Amun yesterday. I don’t see the purpose in them learning of false deities. They should learn only of the One True God of All.”
 
Nefertiti: “It was more of a history lesson. The false gods were a part of our historical identity, after all.”
 
Akhenaten: “Oh, I see. Very well. Just understand, little Meriaten, you are blessed by Aten. Do not forsake Him and he shall not forsake you.”
 
Meriaten nodded eagerly and looked up at the hot, fiery god in the sky. His gaze shone down upon the balcony. Their grand palace at Amarna was the grandest in the new city, but only meant as a temporary residence for the monarchy. In time, a much grander establishment was planned. For now, an entire city had to be constructed. Wanting to escape the trappings of the old religion, Akhenaten wanted a new seat of power dedicated to the mighty Aten and Aten alone. There would be no base idols of the old gods to stare at and the old kings would not be present, as they were worshippers of false gods. Here would be Aten only and from here he would spread across the land.
 
Akhenaten was a handsome man with a narrow face and a long, manicured beard that was woven into a decorative piece. Yet his eyes were always serious and stern. Their mother, Nefertiti, was aloof and demanding. She was their only teacher and she took her role very seriously. She was as strong willed as their father and they worked like a team in governing the land and their children. They never disagreed and never quarrelled.
 
Tutankhaten held out his hand and his mother took it, helping him to walk down the corridor. The architecture was designed to trap in the heat when it was winter and release the heat when it was summer. The air outside had been hot, even at the early hour, and now the cool corridor was pleasant on the little boy’s face. He was just eight years old but he wondered if he had the soul of an old man. If the old pharaoh’s were to believed, he may have the soul of a previous pharaoh. But that was not the workings under Aten. Under Aten a man had just one life, whether they were a slave or king.
 
Meriaten: “What happened to the old gods, mummy?”
 
Nefertiti: “What do you mean, Meri?”
 
Meriaten: “How did Aten kill them?”
 
Nefertiti rolled her eyes and led them into the nursery. Their nursery room was larger than several houses.
 
Nefertiti: “They were not killed. They never existed.”
 
Meriaten: “How can that be? I remember them! We used to pray to them with the priests!”
 
Nefertiti: “We were being misled by those priests. They wanted power for themselves and created their false gods. In truth, Ra never existed. Only Aten. You can see Aten in the sky, every day.”
 
Meriaten: “But I saw Horus up there once!”
 
Nefertiti: “You saw Aten. You thought it was Horus.”
 
Tutankhaten didn’t think that sounded right but he didn’t really understand everything they were talking about. His sister was already thirteen years old and knew a lot more about the world than he did. She was going to get married soon and then Tutankhaten would be an uncle. He thought that would be great because he could play with his new nephew when he was born.
 
Meriaten: “Then how did Aten get here? He never used to be there.”
 
Nefertiti: “He revealed himself to us and we helped him regain his seat of influence in the sky.”
 
Meriaten: “How did he reveal himself?”
 
Nefertiti pointed to a wall where hieroglyphics depicted a story for them to follow.
 
Nefertiti: “When we travelled to the lands in the Levant, lands usually called Canaan, we were battling against the Hittite Empire. Your father and I rode our chariots into battle to crush them!”
 
Meriaten: “Yes! I want to be a warrior too!”
 
Nefertiti: “And you can be! Under Aten, no woman is a slave to their husbands! We are equals, we are supporters, we are strong!”
 
Meriaten pumped her arms, though they lacked any actual muscle.
 
Meriaten: “Wrraaaaa!”
 
Nefertiti: “Just remember that men have some natural advantage in some ways, and we have ours. They can become physically stronger than us, so we can use our wits and tools and weapons to overcome this!”
 
Tutankhaten: “But not me…”
 
They looked to the boy and his limp leg. Nefertiti looked like she might reach out to hug him, but she refrained and maintained her royal distance.
 
Nefertiti: “Then you must also find ways to be strong in other ways, Tut. Your leg may be lame, but what of your arms?”
 
He looked at his weedy arms.
 
Tutankhaten: “They’re small.”
 
Nefertiti: “They are small because you haven’t improved them. They are not lame, are they? They can be your strength if you work at them.”
 
Tutankhaten: “But it doesn’t matter if my arms are strong. I still can’t battle because I can’t stand against an opponent!”
 
Nefertiti: “Stupid boy!”
 
She gave him a soft smack on the head for being dense.
 
Tutankhaten: “You do not need to wield a sword or a spear to win a battle! You use your brain to plan victory. And if you must slay enemies with your own hands, then what weapon would allow you to do this? Without moving?”
 
He tried to think. He could try throwing a spear, he thought. His sister grew impatient.
 
Meriaten: “A bow, you idiot!”
 
Tutankhaten: “Oh!”
 
A bow didn’t seem nearly so bold as a sword, but he could use it without his legs, he realised.
 
Meriaten: “Why does he become king and not me? I’m older and smarter and I’m not—”
 
She looked at him as she caught herself before she used an insulting word.
 
Meriaten: “Disabled.”
 
Nefertiti: “Who told you Tut would be ruler before you, Meri?”
 
Meriaten: “Father?”
 
Nefertiti: “Then I will have to speak with your father, because that isn’t true. You are right. You are the eldest and you will be pharaoh before your brother.”
 
Tutankhaten was dejected. He hadn’t even known he was going to be king before Meriaten, but now he felt like he had just lost something.
 
Nefertiti: “Do not be so upset, Tut. You will help your sister to grow strong and powerful. Perhaps you will even marry!”
 
Meriaten winced.
 
Meriaten: “Ew!”
 
Nefertiti smacked Meriaten.
 
Nefertiti: “What are you being so rude for!?”
 
Meriaten:You’re not father’s sister! Why do I have to marry my brother!?”
 
Nefertiti: “It keeps the blood pure, Meri. But we shall see.”
 
She glanced down at her son’s lame leg.
 
Nefertiti: “It may not be prudent this time. But we shall see.”
 
Meriaten: “Fine. But if I do have to marry him, I’m still the boss because I’ll be pharaoh!”
 
Nefertiti: “True.”
 
Meriaten grinned and looked at Tutakhaten like a cat with a mouse.
 
Tutankhaten: “I will make you kiss my feet!”
 
Nefertiti then grinned.
 
Nefertiti: “You might find he’d like that!”
 
Meriaten turned to her mother with astonished eyes.
 
Meriaten:Why!?”
 
Nefertiti seemed to realise what she had said and shook herself. A mild blush came to her cheeks.
 
Nefertiti: “Well, we’ll talk about sex another time. When you’re going to be married.”
 
Tutankhaten: “What’s sex?”
 
Nefertiti: “Ack!”
 
Meriaten: “Don’t you know anything, Tut? It’s when a boy puts his—”
 
Nefertiti: “Meri, Tut is still too young.”
 
Meriaten pursed her lips, but had the look of a child that was determined to disobey given the first moment out of sight of her mother.
 
Tutankhaten: “Awww.”
 
Nefertiti: “What was I talking about before all of this?”
 
Tutankhaten: “Sex!”
 
Nefertiti: “No I was not. Ah, it was Aten.”
 
Tutankhaten was suddenly bored. He wanted to know of the grown-up stuff he wasn’t allowed to know, not the boring god-stuff he was allowed to know.
 
Nefertiti: “We found Aten wasting away in Canaan as he made our way back from the war with Hattusa. At that time we knew him only as The Evening Star. He once ruled the heavens, from the sky, but had fallen as the ancient people were destroyed.”
 
Tutankhaten: “Who were they?”
 
Nefertiti: “People of a land called Lemuria that is now at the bottom of the ocean.”
 
Meriaten: “How do you know this?”
 
Nefertiti: “Aten told us!”
 
Meriaten: “You talk to Aten Himself?”
 
Nefertiti: “We did. When we learnt of His power and His fall we knew we had to restore Him. And now, He is back where he belongs. No longer The Evening Star but the very sun itself, forever visible to everyone in Egypt.”
 
Meriaten: “Why did people worship Ra and Horus and Ma’at?”
 
Nefertiti: “It is always the way that humans will seek meaning and cause. The idea that one god could be responsible for everything would seem too strange to many people, so they believed that it was many gods controlling many things. But, in truth, there is only Aten.”
 
Meriaten: “But is Aten the god of the underworld too?”
 
Nefertiti: “Yes, essentially. But those who are evil and wicked and treacherous were once punished by the sister of Aten.”
 
Meriaten: “Another god!?”
 
Nefertiti: “No! There is only one god, you know this!”
 
Meriaten: “But if she’s his sister…”
 
Nefertiti: “When you are pharaoh, will your brother also be pharaoh?”
 
Meriaten: “No!”
 
Nefertiti: “There you are then.”
 
That seemed to be a good enough explanation for Meriaten, but Tutankhaten was more confused than before. He didn’t want to question his mother, however, for fear this lecture would become even longer.
 
Tutankhaten: “Can we go play now?”
 
Nefertiti: “We haven’t even started class yet!”
 
Tutankhaten: “Wasn’t that class? It felt like class.”
 
Nefertiti: “I suppose that’s true. Okay, you can have a break for now.”
 
She rose slowly while the two kids cheered and whooped. Meriaten grabbed her brother’s hand and tugged on it for them to escape. Once our of earshot, Meriaten grinned her cat-grin again.
 
Meriaten: “Let’s talk about sex!!”
 
Tutankhaten’s ears perked up.
 
 
Later that same year, King Akhenaten died, unexpectedly, in his sleep. He was still young and handsome and never got to know old age. Nefertiti had screamed and wailed and was in such an emotional state that Tutankhaten had never witnessed. His mother was always controlled and firm but now she was like a woman possessed. His understanding of death was limited but his mother was scaring him. He didn’t understand, for a long time, that his father was gone forever.
 
His sister was shortly thereafter named pharaoh of all Egypt.
 
The man who had been vizier to their father, Vizier Ay, became all the more important as the new pharaoh was so young and a female. Even as the young queen sat upon her beautiful, marble throne at Amarna, Vizier Ay was there, at her side. Tutankhaten was young, but he could see the distaste that his mother held for the man.
 
The man was always smiling. It was a warm, comforting, if condescending, smile. His beard was choppy but waxed into a thin point upon his chin. His face was rounded and youthful, despite his age, and his cheeks puffed out. He wasn’t overweight but had plenty of meat on his bones. He was short and Nefertiti was very tall, making him appear all the shorter when in her present.
 
Vizier Ay: “Oh, Pharaoh of the Land under Aten. I am honoured to serve you this day.”
 
Ay bowed deeply before the new queen of Egypt. Meriaten was very pleased with her vizier’s deference. All feelings of sorrow over the loss of her father had been replaced with the excitement of her new role. She was considered too young to perform most duties expected of the pharaoh and so she still had to attend many classes with her mother. Most functions fell upon the shoulders of the grand vizier, who seemed all too pleased to perform them.
 
Meriaten: “I am very pleased—”
 
Nefertiti cleared her throat.
 
Meriaten:We are very pleased with the service you gave m—our father, the great and knowledgeable Akhenaten. And we have seen the tomb for him. I hope that, in future, we might provide him with a bigger burial place?”
 
Vizier Ay: “It may be unwise to disturb the dead, Oh Wonderous and Bounteous Maiden of Egypt.”
 
Nefertiti snarled, which shocked Tutankhaten. Since his father had been buried, his mother had resumed her former grace and aloof demeanour. Yet the vizier seemed to be able to bring out the worst in her.
 
Meriaten: “But it is so small!”
 
Vizier Ay: “Your father was a pious man, not a man of pride, Your Most Benevolent and Gracious Majesty. Our fair city is still in its infancy and he was aware that he was crafted for the future, not for himself.”
 
Nefertiti: “Well, speaking of the future, we can—”
 
She stopped. The vizier wasn’t looking at her, but still looking at Meriaten. Meriaten glanced at her mother and then back to the vizier. She realised there was a power struggle here. The vizier was choosing to devote himself only to her, dispensing with Nefertiti altogether. She loved her mother, but this was magnificent. Meriaten smiled to herself.
 
Meriaten: “We don’t think it would be prudent for pharaohs to be buried like peasants, Vizier Ay.”
 
Though her father’s tomb was smaller than most previous kings of Egypt, it was still far larger and more resplendent than anything a peasant could even hope to witness, let alone be buried in.
 
Vizier Ay: “I can assure Your Royal Queen of the Nile and Lands Beyond, that you shall have a much larger tomb.”
 
Meriaten’s back straightened.
 
Meriaten: “Is that so?”
 
Vizier Ay: “Oh, most certainly! We will have much more time to work on it. Of course, if you insist on a larger chamber for your father then we will have to delay your own tomb and move resources from it. If you are happy to have a smaller tomb for yourself, then we may be able to create—”
 
Meriaten: “Now, hold on a moment! I really don’t think it would be fair to… stall the work you and your people have already started! And I do think my father would be satisfied with his tomb. He did oversee its construction, after all. I think you should resume your work on my tomb, Vizier Ay.”
 
The vizier bowed deeply. He wore excessive silk furnishings, such as a long sash and a scarf and a headband and fastenings around the cuffs. They almost slid against the cold stone, but he was careful to keep them from being dirtied.
 
Nefertiti looked down at her daughter when the vizier had left. She saw the cold look on the woman’s face.
 
Meriaten: “I said I again, didn’t I? It’s such a pain to say we all of the time!”
 
Nefertiti: “There is also the other matter we need to address, Smenkhare.”
 
Meriaten blinked a moment before she remembered that was her new pharaoh name.
 
Meriaten: “What other matter?”
 
Nefertiti glanced down at Tutankhaten. He was sat in the corner with his younger sister, Ankhesenpaaten. She was two years younger than him, making her six, and he was still young enough to want to play games. Nefertiti mused before she continued.
 
Nefertiti: “You require a husband.”
 
Meriaten knocked her head back and snorted a bored and annoyed sound.
 
Nefertiti: “You need children, Smenkhare! Your position is not so secure that you can rule without issue!”
 
Meriaten: “What do you mean? You think someone will try to take my throne from me?”
 
She now glanced at Tutankhaten too.
 
Meriaten: “Him!?”
 
Nefertiti: “No, not your brother. But there are others who would find a way.”
 
She groaned.
 
Meriaten: “You want me to marry my brother, don’t you?”
 
Nefertiti: “He is the safest and most immediate option.”
 
Meriaten: “Someone told me there was a handsome general in the army! Can’t I marry him? What was his name? Homosexual? Whoreofbeds?”
 
Nefertiti: “Horemheb.”
 
Meriaten: “There. I will have him.”
 
Nefertiti decided it was time to be more frank with the girl. She leaned down so that only the pharaoh would hear her.
 
Nefertiti: “Remember I said you are equal to men?”
 
Meriaten: “Of course!”
 
Nefertiti: “Most men do not believe that and do not want that. If you marry someone like Horemheb, or worse Ay—”
 
Meriaten: “Ay!? He’s too old!”
 
Nefertiti: “He won’t believe that, and you already preen about listening to his honeyed words.”
 
Meriaten sulked. She didn’t like being talked down to by her mother. She preferred the way Ay addressed her. Nefertiti wasn’t pharaoh, Meriaten was. She had to question why she had to listen to Nefertiti at all.
 
Nefertiti: “If you marry the wrong man, he will control you and the people will listen to him over you. You will become just the queen and he will become the pharaoh!”
 
Meriaten didn’t like the sound of that. Nefertiti turned her gaze back to Tutankhaten and Meriaten followed her.
 
Nefertiti: “But there is one boy who would never be able to control you and would never try.”
 
Meriaten: “But he’s my brother. He smells! And he’s an idiot!”
 
Nefertiti: “He is not an idiot. Don’t mistake inexperience and ignorance for stupidity. He learns well. You were just as clueless when you were his age.”
 
Meriaten pouted.
 
Nefertiti: “And he doesn’t smell.”
 
Meriaten: “Fiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiine.”
 
Nefertiti: “Good girl.”
 
Meriaten: “I’ll order Vizier Ay to arrange the ceremony.”
 
Nefertiti: “Yes. As soon as possible.”
 
There was a paused.
 
Meriaten: “What? Now?”
 
Nefertiti: “Why not? He only just left.”
 
Meriaten groaned with frustration again and jumped off of the throne. She strolled slowly across the room, much to the visible annoyance of Nefertiti but Meriaten just smirked. She looked at her younger siblings and pulled a tongue at them. Ankhesenpaaten pulled a tongue back. Meriaten thought her baby sister looked a lot like her, but Tutankhaten looked nothing like her. Not one bit. And he did smell.
 
She found, much to her disappointment, that Ay hadn’t gotten very far. He was just outside the palace, pointing to places along the façade where he expected new statues to be placed. They would be of the deceased king and his wife and Aten shining between them. The master architect was very interested in his work but he stepped back when the new pharaoh approached. She looked at the builder, who looked very odd by Egyptian standards, but she turned to her vizier.
 
Meriaten: “We are to marry our brother, Tutankhaten.”
 
Vizier Ay: “A wise choice, Oh Flower of the Burning Sun! Keep the blood pure!”
 
Meriaten: “Yes, well there is that.”
 
Vizier Ay: “I see there may be some trepidation in your thoughts, Oh Queen that the Nile has Blessed? You do not need to hurry these things. You are young with many years ahead of you.”
 
Meriaten: “I know, but my mother…”
 
Vizier Ay: “Forgive me for saying, Oh Lasting Breath of the Cosmos, but the Queen Mother is not pharaoh of Egypt. You are.”
 
Meriaten: “Yes, I am…”
 
She sulked again.
 
Vizier Ay: “The Queen Mother is, indeed, a wise woman. But she cannot command you, Oh Wise Sage of the Great Aten. She is not Aten’s vessel on Earth, you are. If you consider another more worthy, then that is the spirit of Aten communicating with you.”
 
Meriaten considered that. She thought she wanted to marry Horemheb because he was big, strong and handsome. She looked at Vizier Ay and she suddenly saw something through the guise of his face, deep within his eyes. Something she did not like and did not trust.
 
She stepped back suddenly.
 
Meriaten: “Thank you, Vizier Ay. But we have made our choice. See that it is done.”
 
She thought she saw a flash of annoyance on his face but he bowed deeply and graciously with his usual flare.
 
She turned away and marched back into the palace, eager to be away from him.
 
 
The funeral was a ramshackle affair. There was much confusion amongst the people and the tomb had had to be hastily finished. It was barely half the size of the original plans and far less grandiose than that of the previous pharaoh.
 
When everyone was back at the palace, there was a meeting of the elite members of Egyptian society within a great meeting hall. People filled the seats on either side of the room, while Nefertiti sat upon the throne. Many were confused as to why she was there, in that chair, but everyone supposed someone had to be.
 
Vizier Ay: “The tragic and painful death of someone so young is a grave blow to us all. Queen Smenkhare is with the great Aten now and beyond the pains of the disease that suddenly struck her down.”
 
Horemheb: “Yes, may she rest in peace, but who shall be pharaoh now?”
 
He stood from his place next to the throne. He had risen to become general of the armies in a very short time and was a fairly young man of great ambition. He was handsome but a scar smeared his looks as it ran down the side of his face. To some, however, it only made him all the more attractive.
 
Vizier Ay: “Yes indeed! The next in line is the young Tutankhaten and he is but a weak, sickly boy. His elder sister died of malaria and I fear our young prince could easily fall prey to such a disease! He had the illness before and he is prone to sickness. He may well die before he is even ten years.”
 
Horemheb: “It is clearly the blessing of the gods—”
 
He bit his tongue.
 
Horemheb: “The god, Aten…”
 
The vizier smiled his polite and generous smile to the audience before them.
 
Vizier Ay: “Then it seems only natural that someone with experience should—”
 
Nefertiti: “That would be me.”
 
There was a long silence in the chamber.
 
Vizier Ay: “Do you mean—”
 
Nefertiti: “I shall be the next pharaoh and my son after me. He shall live. I know it. He even now practises his bow. He will grow to be strong and powerful, I assure you all of that. Until that time, I shall now be pharaoh!”
 
Horemheb: “With all due respect—”
 
Nefertiti: “It is already done.”
 
Vizier Ay: “What? But I never—”
 
Nefertiti: “Another priest performed the rite, Vizier Ay. Your services were not required at that time.”
 
Horemheb: “This is… unprecedented!”
 
Nefertiti: “It is the will of Aten!”
 
Horemheb: “How do we…”
 
The room was suddenly engulfed in a brilliant, dazzling light. Everyone reeled from it, but those that managed to blink were able to make out the shape of a figure stood behind Nefertiti.
 
There was no more discussion when the light faded.
 
Nefertiti became Queen Neferneferuaten.
 
As pharaoh she immediately betrothed her two children, Tutankhaten and Ankhesenpaaten. They would marry when barely old enough. However, a new crisis struck…
 
Nefertiti watched from the high balcony where she, and her family, would pray to Aten each morning as he rose into the sky. Below was a large and angry crowd and speaking to them was the cunning vizier himself.
 
Vizier Ay: “We have been led astray from our true gods! Pharaoh Akhenaten, formerly Amenhotep IV, was duped by this power-hungry, foreign deity!”
 
He thrust his hand towards the winged sun.
 
Vizier Ay: “That is no Egyptian god! That is a god of Canaan! The god of the slaves!”
 
For once the vizier was in cahoots with the general.
 
Horemheb: “We must renounce this tyrant and bring back our devotion to the true gods. The gods that loved us, as we loved them!”
 
Nefertiti grimaced. Vizier Ay, at work again. He didn’t believe in anything except his own designs and he was using Horemheb’s position and love from the people to further his own aim – deposing her. The people were wrapped up in the nostalgia for the false idols. They knew those gods, the new god was something they couldn’t understand.
 
She looked up at her deity as he shone down upon the land.
 
Nefertiti: “We will not renounce you, oh blessed Aten! The people do not understand, they are slow to change.”
 
But the resentment grew and grew. First against Aten, then against the queen that continued to force his worship. People started to carve small statuettes of Ra and place them around the palace grounds. Wherever the royal family walked, they would find Ra waiting for them.
 
Nefertiti: “Perhaps we should teach these fools a lesson…”
 
But even as heads rolled, the young prince Tutankhaten was horrified by the display. Sacrifice was long a part of Egyptian religion, but they did not kill people. The gods were many, there was room for all beliefs in the old ways. But this new, solo deity demanded only his way. He watched his mother’s stony face as she watched another man have his head removed from his body. And another after him. And another.
 
 
There were very few people at the funeral.
 
Nefertiti may have declared herself as pharaoh, but she was buried as a lowly queen. The pharaonic burial equipment was taken away, to be reused at a later date, and she was buried with her husband. How she had died was a mystery to all, but her age was usually pointed out by Vizier Ay.
 
Tutankhaten was made pharaoh just days after his mother’s demise and he was placed upon the throne with every expectation of leading Egypt. He was just ten years old and had no idea what to do. He just missed his mother.
 
Horemheb: “Oh King of the Moon and Stars, it would be in our best interest to restore the true gods of Egypt to their rightful place.”
 
The vizier almost slide along the floor rather than walked.
 
Vizier Ay: “That is for His Most Resplendent Majesty to decide, general. Not you.”
 
The general sneered at the vizier, seeing this sudden turn as an utter betrayal.
 
Tutankhaten: “We think… the general is correct. Vizier Ay, please make the arrangements…”
 
Vizier Ay: “Then might I make a suggestion, Oh Courageous Lion of the Dunes?”
 
Tutankhaten: “Yes.”
 
Vizier Ay: “We should relocate back to Thebes, the once and fair capital of our people. This new city of Amara is a sanctuary for this heathen religion.”
 
Horemheb: “I concur. This whole city should be abandoned and forgotten.”
 
Tutankhaten: “We can’t force people to leave, general.”
 
Vizier Ay: “Exactly my thoughts also, Oh Magnificent Glory of the Sky! The general is overzealous. Such is the way of fighting men.”
 
Horemheb: “You snivelling—”
 
Vizier Ay: “It is best to leave politics and religion to wiser minds, such as myself or yourself, Oh Brainiac of the Earth.”
 
Tutankhaten: “Brainiac?”
 
Vizier Ay: “I shall make the arrangements that we shall return to Thebes, along with anyone who wishes to leave with us.”
 
Horemheb: “You snake.”
 
Vizier Ay: “I also have proposals for certain military escapades that would bring honour and glory to you, Oh Joyous Fountain of Grandeur!”
 
Horemheb: “I see your game, Ay. Get me out there fighting, will you?”
 
Vizier Ay: “It is your place to lead the armies, is it not, general? I hope you haven’t grown too soft for your position?”
 
Horemheb: “I shall undertake any assignment set by the pharaoh!”
 
Vizier Ay smiled sweetly.
 
Vizier Ay: “That is most excellent, general. I shall give you your new orders tomorrow.”
 
Horemheb bristled but could do nothing.
 
One year later and Nefertiti’s binding of siblings came to pass. Tutankhaten married his younger sister, Ankhesenpaaten. They were clumsy and awkward; after all they had been playmates just a year ago. But they were determined to be a team, just like their own mother and father had been. They would work together to solve their problems, and the problems of the people.
 
Although the original proposal had come from the general, somehow the vizier took charge of the renaming ceremony. Aten was no more and Thebes had its own patron deity of Amun, thus Tutankhaten became Tutankhamun. His wife renamed herself too, as a gesture, to Ankhesenamun.
 
Although military campaigns were carried out against civilisations in the Levant, in Anatolia and in Africa, the pharaoh also did he best to renew and improve relations with as many nations as he could. He was young and enjoyed use of his bow, but knowing he could not war himself gave him a gentle spirit that led him to make peace. However, the economy was also dwindling rapidly after the upheaval caused by his father and trade routes had to be restored.
 
Vizier Ay: “Oh Graceful Liege of the Shimmering Waters, I have good news!”
 
Tutankhamun: “What is it?”
 
Vizier Ay: “We have begun work on the Temple-ofNebkheperure-Beloved-of-Amun-Who-Puts-Thebes-in-Order!”
 
Tutankhamun also spat out his juice.
 
Tutankhamun: “Why on Earth did you call it that!?”
 
Vizier Ay: “It is a most fitting name, Oh Luscious Lord of the Valiant Peoples of Egypt! With this name, everyone will know exactly how much you are doing for them!”
 
Tutankhamun looked at him dubiously.
 
Tutankhamun: “I suppose…”
 
Vizier Ay: “It was going to be called Temple-ofNebkheperure-Beloved-of-Amun-Who-Puts-Thebes-in-Order-Because-He-Loves-You-All-Very-Much-and-Will-Restore-Your-Faith-in-the-Gods-and-Bring-Back-Prosperity-and-Happiness-to-All-Who-Live-in-Thebes…”
 
Tutankhamun: “Good grief…”
 
Vizier Ay: “Sorry, I wasn’t finished. I just need to take a breath. Where was I? Oh yes. Who-Live-in-Thebes-and-the-Lands-of-All-Upper-and-Lower-Egypt—”
 
Tutankhamun: “Okay, okay! The new name is great! Thank you, Vizier Ay.”
 
He hobbled down the corridor, leaning heavily on his cane. He was now the grand old age of sixteen but the first baby girl he and his wife had had was stillborn, much to his dismay. He would, however, work on another. However, he had had another, unexpected, bout of malaria. He was beginning to wonder if Aten hadn’t been the true god after all and was now punishing him.
 
Once outside he glanced up at the sun. No wings, no blazing face hidden within the plasma. Just a big ball of gas. Put there by a dung beetle, naturally.
 
Vizier Ay: “I am most pleased that you have made such an excellent recovery!”
 
Tutankhamun: “Me too! I thought I was going to die for certain when my physician had that accident! How could he be so careless that he would fall into the Nile!”
 
Vizier Ay: “Indeed, Oh Sacred Owner of Pyramids and Sphinxes.”
 
Tutankhamun: “Oh, sphinxes! That’s something we should work on! An avenue of them. Smaller ones, of course, but all down a single avenue!”
 
Vizier Ay: “A most exciting project, Oh Master of Ideas Under the Blue Sky!”
 
Tutankhamun: “But make sure none of them can say any riddles! I hate that.”
 
Vizier Ay: “As you say, Oh Royal Bastion of Integrity!”
 
Tutankhamun: “I have a date with the wife, Vizier Ay. I will meet you tomorrow. I hope to hear goods new from our general Horemheb too!”
 
Vizier Ay: “As he is still alive, I am sure he shall have plenty of good news to share.”
 
Tutankhamun caught a degree of frustration in those words, but the vizier beamed pleasantly and gave a deep, honouring bow. Tutankhamun nodded and continued to plod along towards his wife, who was dozing beneath the trees of the garden. She woke up as he approached and she looked past him towards the vizier. She frowned at the man, but spoke to her husband.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I don’t trust him…”
 
Tutankhamun: “You don’t trust anybody.”
 
Ankhesenamun: “With good reason! We live in a den of vipers!”
 
Tutankhamun: “You worry far too much, darling.”
 
He slumped heavily upon the futon and patted his wife’s bare foot. She wiggled her toes at him.
 
Ankhesenamun: “As long as I have you, at least.”
 
She smiled at him and reached out to stroke his cheek.
 
Ankhesenamun: “How are you feeling today? You know I was terrified when it looked like you’d die. How can one man catch malaria this many times!?”
 
Tutankhamun: “How can one man live through this many bouts of malaria is the real question! And be a weak cripple all the while!”
 
She leaned over and kissed him softly.
 
Ankhesenamun: “Because he is blessed by the gods, evidently! Amun truly favours you, as he favours this city.”
 
Tutankhamun: “I’m beginning to think you might be right!”
 
He slid his hand along her calf, feeling the soft, brown skin under his fingertips.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I just wish…”
 
She looked over at where the vizier was stalking away with a few guards.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I just wish we had trustworthy people around us. Ay, Horemheb, none of them can be trusted, Tut.”
 
He leaned down and kissed the skin of her thigh.
 
Tutankhamun: “They know how to run this land better than I ever could. I am the walking dead. I don’t expect I shall live for many more years.”
 
Ankhesenamun: “Don’t say that!”
 
She smacked his head.
 
Tutankhamun: “Stop worrying, Ankhy.”
 
He climbed up her and pushed his lips to hers.
 
Tutankhamun: “Let’s ensure our legacy first. Then we can worry about everything else.”
 
She smirked at him.
 
Ankhesenamun: “A legacy is it? That’s all you actually want from me, huh?”
 
He grinned like an idiot.
 
Tutankhamun: “Well, I can think of one of two other things if you’re interested!”
 
She shoved him over and climbed on him.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I’m always interested!”
 
 
The funeral was long and grandiose with mourners from across the city wailing and singing the praises of the great Tutankhamun. He was the saviour of Thebes, of the old gods and of the Egyptian people. As his body was carried to its final resting place, Ankhesenamun could have sworn she had glimpsed sightings of the gods themselves – standing vigil over his coffin as it went by. Horus, Amun, Thoth, Ma’at, even Osiris. Once it was all over, the weeks that followed were a terrible state of turmoil and Ankhesenamun panicked.
 
He had been just eighteen when he died and their marriage had resulted in just two baby girls. Both stillborn. She wondered if she had been cursed sometimes, but she felt two other options were before her; he was always ill and this caused unhealthy babies that died, or someone had done something to her to cause their deaths. She knew of one man who was master of medicines and he was the vizier. He had often brought her droughts that she had taken and never considered what was in them. Until now.
 
Her husband had died of malaria, at last. He had been infected and healed so many times she began to think he was immortal. But, in the end, one infection too many had done him in. How was it possible for one man to be so unlucky? He had certainly survived due to the efforts of the gods watching over him, but ply a man enough times and even the gods could not alter his biology. He had been infected deliberately, she was certain. She remembered her father, Akhenaten, had also died of malaria. She wondered how her mother died, had she been poisoned too? She closed herself up in her room, away from the vizier and away from the aspiring general who was trying to convince the elites to make him the new pharaoh.
 
Yet, she was still queen. She had to do something to stop these villains. She wrote a message and sent it away by messenger in the dead of night.
 
It was sent to the most hated enemy of Egypt – the Hittite Empire.
 
It read, simply;
 
My husband died. A son I have not. But to thee, they say, the sons are many. If thou wouldst give me one son of thine, he would become my husband. Never shall I pick out a servant of mine and make him my husband. I am afraid.

Zannanza the Good

PostOct 02, 2019#98

Suppiluliuma I was an aged man, very advanced in years. Only the richest of people survived to old age and this man was extremely so. The Hittite Empire than he commanded was the strongest nation in Anatolia with only the old Assyrian Empire as a serious threat. The Egyptian Kingdom was a constant thorn, but they had to expend great resources to reach the northern Levant, where his borders stood solid. They constantly fought over a few cities on the border but every time the Egyptians conquered one, they had to return to their African lands and Suppiluliuma moved back in and recaptured it.
 
The Babylonian Empire was a rising power, but they had to contend with Assyria and the Hittites were spared that enemy for now. The Egyptians had to battle their African neighbours, particularly the Nubians and the Ethiopians, so the Hittites stood strong and resilient. They had little need to venture into the Aegean Sea, which was far from their capital city, and their cities along that coast were small and poor, mostly used for fish and minor trade. Their greatest trade routes were land based, reaching so far as China far to the East of the planet. Their greatest frustration were the Amazons, who raided them like common bandits but with weapons and muscles to make them significantly formidable.
 
But the truth is, he loved it. The Amazons were strong and brave and worthy foes. Whenever news came of their adventures he listened keenly and sent armies to try to capture them. They never succeeded; which was disappointing and a relief. He didn’t know what he would do with one if he did capture her. Marry her? She’d probably gut him in his sleep.
 
They were women unlike any other. So when the letter from an Egyptian queen came, he couldn’t believe the words on the page. An Egyptian queen demanding a marriage?
 
Suppiluliuma I: “This is unprecedented!”
 
Zannanza: “But we are going to help her, right?”
 
The old man looked over his note at the young man. His youngest son; he was brave, honest and stupid. They called him Zannanza the Good but Suppiluliuma called him Idiot Boy. This wasn’t an insult in the mind of the old king. He loved the boy and his naivety, but he was a silly thing with a head filled with nonsense like honour and kindness and something called chivalry, whatever that meant.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Don’t be so quick to trust a woman’s words, Idiot Boy. Especially an Egyptian one. And a queen at that! I’ve never seen anything like this. An Egyptian queen wanting to make a king of a foreign prince?”
 
Zannanza: “I have no wife, father! I will marry her!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “It’s a trap, Idiot Boy! She wants one of my sons as a hostage.”
 
Zannanza: “No! I don’t believe that! She would never—”
 
Suppiluliuma rolled his eyes with a groan.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “You saw a letter and think you know her already, do you? This is why you are the Idiot Boy.”
 
The young man pouted.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Don’t give me the puppy dog eyes. I’ll send someone to investigate if this be true, okay? I’ll send a letter of inquiry.”
 
Zannanza became anxious.
 
Zannanza: “But, by then it could be too late!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Are you king of Hattusa, Idiot Boy?”
 
He sulked.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “I will not send you off to be imprisoned by some Egyptian harlot.”
 
Zannanza: “Don’t call her that!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “What? Are you in love already?”
 
Zannanza swelled.
 
Zannanza: “This is destiny, father! I can feel it! Just imagine, if I marry her then my son will be pharaoh of Egypt!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “And if I disinherit your older brothers, make you my heir… our family will rule all of Egypt and the Hittite Empire…”
 
Zannanza looked worried.
 
Zannanza: “Isn’t that a bit mean to my brothers?”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Fuck ‘em.”
 
He stroked his chin but then snapped out of his reverie.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “We will see. I will investigate. I won’t risk your life without being certain.”
 
He turned to a messenger and spoke;
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Go thou and bring back the true word to me. Maybe they deceive me. Maybe, in fact, they do have a son of their lord.”
 
The messenger went with all haste. Yet it was still months of journeying to reach Thebes and then journey back with the reply from the mysterious queen. When the messenger handed over the letter, the king read it with his son, Zannanza, present.
 
Why didst thou say “they deceive me” in that way? Had I a son, would I have written about my own and my country's shame to a foreign land? Thou didst not believe me and hast even spoke thus to me. He who was my husband has died. A son I have not. Never shall I take a servant of mine and make him my husband. I have written to no other country, only to thee have I written. They say thy sons are many: so give me one son of thine. To me he will be husband, but to Egypt he will be king.
 
The king drummed his fingers upon the arm of his chair. His son was grinning like a moron.
 
Zannanza: “See, father? She tells the truth! She is in dire need!”
 
Suppiluliuma shook his head and continued to drum his fingers.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “I know you don’t understand this, Idiot Boy, but not everyone is as honest as you are. This has to be a trap. It must be…”
 
Zannanza: “Please father! I am certain of this! Allow me to go before it’s too late! She is in danger! She needs me!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “A woman like this doesn’t need anybody. Wants, perhaps.”
 
He rubbed his eyes with worry. He wanted, desperately, to believe this letter to be true. It would be true glory for the city of Hattusa to become rulers of Egypt, the most ancient of kingdoms. Yet, it was too good to be true. He was old and cynical, certainly, but even the most optimistic fool had to question this. He glanced up at his idiot son. Maybe not the most optimistic fool.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “I will question her once more. Messenger, send her this;”
 
You keep asking me for a son of mine as if it were my duty. He will in some way become a hostage, but king you will not make him.
 
Zannanza: “Don’t send her that! It’s so rude!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “We will get to the bottom of this mysterious, Idiot Boy.”
 
However, during the course of the next few weeks, the young man pestered his father with urgency of the matter. He believed she was in great need and the longer they delayed, the greater her distress. Her fear had struck him so much that he was certain her life was in danger.
 
Zannanza: “I have made up my mind, father!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “What’re you talking about?”
 
Zannanza: “I am to journey to Egypt!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Wait for the reply.”
 
Zannanza: “No, no! I shall not. I am leaving this instant!”
 
The old king glared at his son but, upon seeing the determination in his young face, the old man felt the ice of his heart melt. The boy was already enamoured with a woman he had only ever seen in words and his sense of honour was overriding all senses. He hated this but he also admired it greatly. Perhaps he was even jealous. He would love to experience the world like his son, just for one day. But he was old and wise and knew of the horrors that men would visit upon each other for little-to-no reason at all.
 
He saw that Zannanza was dressed for travel. He wore a long, thick, white cloak with a heavy turban on his head to protect him from the rays of the sun. His young face was made even younger by the poor stubble growth that made him look like a teenager, desperate for facial hair.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Okay, fine.”
 
Zannanza perked up with surprise.
 
Zannanza: “Really, you’re letting me go!?”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “You just said you were going with or without my blessing.”
 
Zannanza: “Yes, but… I didn’t think you would… Thank you father! You’ll see! I promise you! She is a genuine and wonderful woman. Clearly she cares for her kingdom and that goodness of the heart will make her the perfect wife for me!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “If she is as good as you say, you’re probably right. Be careful, my son. Even if you are right, she still seems intelligent. Intelligent enough to see the dangers of her court and seek outside aid. And, if she tells the truth, that court is a den of great evil. Beware those who would manipulate you. Keep your wits about you and do not be deceived by them. These Egyptians are so untrustworthy…”
 
Zannanza: “Except for my fair queen!”
 
Suppiluliuma couldn’t help but smile and shake his head.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “I bloody hope so, else she doesn’t deserve such as good and kind boy like you.”
 
Zannanza grinned, ear-to-ear. He was used to being called Idiot Boy, but he knew his father loved him truly and there it was. He ran at the old man and threw his arms around him in a tight embrace.
 
Zannanza: “I love you, dad!”
 
Suppiluliuma pretended to be angry.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Come on, get off me you fool!”
 
Despite his words, he made it more difficult to untangle themselves for a minute.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Next time I see you, you had better be a king with a hot wife!”
 
Zannanza: “I… I didn’t consider what she looks like.”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “She’s probably as ugly as a goat.”
 
Zannanza: “I don’t care how beautiful she is! I know her heart, I know she is beautiful inside already.”
 
The old man gave a wicked grin.
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Indeed! Inside, all women are beautiful.”
 
Zannanza: “What? Oh! Father! That’s terrible!”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Hey, I was young once, you know?”
 
Zannanza: “Goodbye, you old pervert.”
 
Suppiluliuma I: “Goodbye, Idiot Boy.”
 
Zannanza marched off on his first adventure. He had never travelled outside of the empire before. He was never one for battle, so he didn’t join the military and didn’t go on campaigns. He travelled around the empire, exploring the beautiful landscape of Anatolia, but beyond his homeland, it was deemed too unsafe. He admitted, he was afraid. But with love and honour in his heart, he had to push on and overcome his fear. He moved south, across the lands of Canaan in the Levant.
 
 
Ankhesenamun waited quietly in the dark of her room. She was afraid but desperate. Inviting a man to her chambers was dangerous at any time, but alone in the dark of night… She swallowed, but her throat was sore and dry.
 
She fiddled her fingers, growing increasingly anxious as time went on.
 
The moon gently sailed past the night sky outside. Khonsu, god of the moon, was known as ‘the traveller’ and to him now, she prayed. She had heard that her new husband was on his way to her, travelling across the distant lands of Canaan, at last. She had initially wept with joy at the news, but she had to conceal everything from everyone.
 
She was, however, convinced that Vizier Ay had discovered her plot. He would surely find her new husband and slay him before he ever reached Egypt. She needed a new plan to be put in motion, but it meant trusting someone within her kingdom. She couldn’t trust anyone, but she knew of one man that hated the vizier with greater loathing than even she.
 
A gentle tap sounded at the door and she looked up, startled.
 
Horemheb: “Sorry, my queen. I didn’t mean to scare you.”
 
She controlled the panic in her trembling body. She was afraid of the general, almost as much as she was afraid of the vizier. Though more honest and sincere, the general was still an ambitious man and she was certain he had designs for her throne.
 
He stomped into the dark room and she was afraid, for a moment, that he might kill her there and then. He was big enough, his hands more than capable of throttling her with little effort. But he just stood there, quietly watching her.
 
Nervously, she cleared her throat – but it hurt, and she winced before she managed to push out her words.
 
Ankhesenamun: “Thank you for coming to see me, general. I trust nobody saw you?”
 
Horemheb: “No one. I ordered the guards away.”
 
It was that easy. He was the general, he could order all the guards away in the dead of night.
 
There was no one to protect her now.
 
Ankhesenamun: “You are a loyal man, are you not, Horemheb?”
 
Horemheb: “I am loyal to Egypt, yes.”
 
She noticed that. Loyal to Egypt, but not necessarily to her. She might not be travelling right now, but she made a quick prayer to Khonsu for her own protection all the same. The god was son of Amun himself, patron of Thebes and guardian of its people. She begged them to keep her safe this night.
 
Ankhesenamun: “And you would agree that Vizier Ay is a danger to Egypt?”
 
Horemheb: “Absolutely.”
 
Ankhesenamun: “He plans to marry me.”
 
The general’s form jolted visibly, even in the dark.
 
Horemheb: “You… would do this thing?”
 
Ankhesenamun: “Not willingly!”
 
Horemheb’s figure settled down. Had he been close to killing her in that moment, she wondered? Would he murder? Vizier Ay, she was certain, had murdered her entire family; her grandfather, her mother, her brother, even her babies. How long before he murdered her too? Perhaps it would be better if Horemheb murdered her instead, at least that would be one small victory over Ay.
 
Horemheb: “You have some scheme to thwart this action?”
 
Ankhesenamun: “Indeed! I shall marry another!”
 
The general nodded slowly but firmly and she suddenly feared he had mistaken her intent.
 
Ankhesenamun: “Not to any Egyptian.”
 
He froze.
 
Horemheb: “Then, to whom?”
 
Ankhesenamun: “My new king journeys this way, even as we speak. He is a prince of Hattusa.”
 
Horemheb: “An—a—Hattusan!? You would give Egypt over to such a man!?”
 
Ankhesenamun: “King Suppiluliuma has many sons. He can spare one for me. A man with no prior designs or schemes to make himself pharaoh. He will be exactly what the throne needs. New blood, without old allegiances or inherited vice. With him, I will have no fear for my safety.”
 
Horemheb clearly got the message; she didn’t trust anyone at court, including him. He finally nodded.
 
Horemheb: “Better this Hattusan than Vizier Ay. What do you need of me, my queen?”
 
She brightened. At last, a modicum of trust. She could barely believe her fortune. Amun was truly watching for her this night.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I want you to find my husband and bring him to me safely. I am certain Vizier Ay’s spies have learnt of my letters to Hattusa and may be sending killers to slay my husband, even as we speak. Please perform this duty to me, and to Egypt. You know I am a good and fair queen, yes?”
 
Horemheb: “I know it! You are a fair and good queen. And your brother was a good and honest young man. I lament his passing.”
 
She decided she should open up, possibly finally able to make this general her ally rather than her enemy.
 
Ankhesenamun: “It was Ay, Horemheb! He murdered King Tut!”
 
The general nodded.
 
Horemheb: “I am certain that he did, my queen. I’m sorry that we weren’t able to stop him. In fact, I believe he tried to kill the king many times but the pharaoh was too strong in will and blessed by our gods. If only… if only I could have proven his affairs. The vizier is truly a wily and cunning man. He will never be caught.”
 
Ankhesenamun: “But we can still foil his plans! Bring me my husband, General Horemheb, and together we will defeat this vizier!”
 
She jumped to her feet, feeling more confident in this moment than she had for months. She felt, suddenly, she had misjudged the good general. The man looked down at her and she into his eyes, imploringly. There was a long pause and, as time dragged on, she thought he was going to refuse to help her.
 
Instead, suddenly, he grabbed her and placed his mouth to hers.
 
She was taken by surprise and hang in his arms for a moment but when she regained her senses, she pulled away from him, pushing his arms off of her.
 
Ankhesenamun: “General! You forget yourself!”
 
Horemheb: “I’m sorry, my queen! I thought—I felt—I was mistaken. I thought, perhaps, you understood that I…”
 
Ankhesenamun: “I will marry none at court, general. Bring me my Hattusan husband. You will be richly rewarded for your service to me, but you cannot be my husband.”
 
He fell to one knee.
 
Horemheb: “Please forgive me.”
 
She was agitated but she needed his help so she put her slender hand upon his cheek.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I will. But you must complete my quest.”
 
With that, the general rose and departed. He gathered a small troop of men together and they rode out from Thebes in the direction of Levantine lands.
 
 
Zannanza was enjoying his sojourn immensely. The Canaanites were exciting and interesting people. He enjoyed their food and their language, though complex, was pleasing on the ears. He tried to learn some words as he travelled, but he would that dialects changed drastically wherever he went so that the words he had learnt one city ago were suddenly useless in the next. He found that his boots became worn very quickly, despite their great expense back in Hattusa. Expensive didn’t always mean functional, he discovered. He had to buy new boots. They were not as pretty, but they seemed more serviceable.
 
He had only ever seen the calm waters of the Black Sea, to the north of Hattusa, which was an inland sea. The Aegean Sea was a very different body of water. It was violent and exciting. The ships were tougher and larger. The sailors, however, claimed that the Aegean, and all of the Mediterranean, were very calm waters when compared to the ferocious oceans to the north where the pale-skinned Celts lived. Many of the flimsy Mediterranean boats would sink in moments should they attempt those cold seas. Zannanza could hardly conceive of such a place and he envisioned deadly, dark, evil waters with cruel, pale people that lived like barbarians – more so than the white-skins of Thracia or Scythia.
 
To dispel this racism, he met with some Greeks in one harbour of a small town. They were very white but seemed to be perfect gentlemen who were keen on gathering knowledge as much as trading for goods. They bought artwork, especially pottery, to sell to nobles in their island homelands. Zannanza thought it amazing that people lived on islands, surrounding by sea at all times. They frequently ventured on boats to visit neighbours or buy goods. He had only been on a sightseeing boat along the southern coast of the Black Sea once and he could not imagine doing that every day.
 
Eventually he left the Levant and crossed into the Sinai Peninsula. To his mind, this marked the old border of Egypt – the land before entering Egypt proper. There were a great many mountains in Sinai, especially towards the south of the peninsula, but he stuck to the north, on a clear path to Thebes.
 
As he neared a town, where he hoped to find an inn for the night, he became away of a group of armed men approaching him. He initially thought they were soldiers passing by, but he realised they were headed straight for him. He slowed down until they reached him and dismounted.
 
The leader of the bunch was an older man, stern and grim.
 
Soldier: “Are you the Hattusan prince?”
 
Zannanza chewed his lip.
 
Soldier: “Well?”
 
Zannanza: “I have no idea what you mean! I mean a travelling merchant. I’m selling…”
 
He glanced down at himself, remembering he had nothing but his travelling gear.
 
Zannanza: “Well, I sold out, actually. Sorry folks!”
 
Soldier: “I was sent by the queen to find you.”
 
Zannanza brightened with relief.
 
Zannanza: “Thank the gods! I thought my father was right for a moment! Yes, I am Prince Zannanza of Hattusa! Please, take me to your queen!”
 
The soldiers laughed mockingly.
 
Zannanza: “Oh damn.”
 
The leader drew his sword.
 
Soldier: “This is nothing personal, you understand? I cannot allow you to wed the queen. It’s my duty to Egypt.”
 
Zannanza: “Come now, my good man! Surely we can work this out!?”
 
Seeing the deadly dedication in the soldier’s eyes, Zannanza did the only smart thing. He turned and ran.
 
The soldiers laughed and jeered as he went but they were mounted and he was not. He had bought and sold many horses and camels on his way, but he had wanted to walk through Sinai and enter Egypt on foot. He felt it would have been a beautiful feeling to feel the first grains of Egyptian sand on his feet as he entered. Silly sentiment was about to get him killed, he realised.
 
His legs worked, but the horses were faster. He cursed the gods for having the stupidity to give horses four legs and not humans. It wasn’t fair!
 
He jumped to the side as a horse went by, narrowly avoiding a swinging blade. The soldier reared his horse to a halt and looked back.
 
Soldier: “Make this easy on yourself, boy! I promise I’ll make it quick and painless. If you keep running, I can’t guarantee this isn’t going to hurt.”
 
He didn’t reply, he just turned to run again. This time more the other horses gave chase too. They ran ahead of him, so he had to turn but more horses were there too. His heart beat fast in his head and his head hurt from the pounding of blood and adrenaline.
 
He skidded to a halt when he found he was boxed in. The leader dismounted again and slowly drew his sword.
 
Soldier: “It’ll be over in a minute, boy. Don’t struggle. I don’t want to make you suffer more than necessary.”
 
With nothing left to do but pray, Zannanza did just that. He wasn’t sure his own gods of Anatolia could reach him in foreign lands, and he didn’t know any of the Egyptian gods. He heard they prayed to someone called Ra, but that might be Aten, or someone called Amun. Would any god even care if he died here?
 
Apparently, they would.
 
An arrow whistled through the air and struck the soldier in the neck. Blood spurted from the wound and he fell to his knees, suffering far more than the death he had intended for his victim.
 
The soldiers quickly turned about to face their attackers but they were soon overrun by this unexpected force. As Zannanza stood, amazed, he watched more Egyptian soldiers arrive, these ones in much more impressive military armour, and slay those that had tried to kill the prince.
 
The leader of these soldiers now stepped forward as he dismounted.
 
Soldier: “Prince of Hattusa, I presume? I have been sent by the queen.”
 
Zannanza looked down at the man with an arrow in his neck. He was still bleeding to death.
 
Zannanza: “That’s what he said.”
 
Soldier: “Sorry, Egypt is a dangerous place these days. Both bandits and soldiers may want to kill you. They were soldiers, not bandits, so I assume you are the prince, right?”
 
He didn’t see that he had much choice but to reply honestly;
 
Zannanza: “Yes, I am Prince Zannanza of Hattusa.”
 
The man removed his helmet.
 
Horemheb: “I am General Horemheb. I am here to escort you.”
 
 
Ankhesenamun: “I am sorry to disappoint the vizier, but alas, I am already betrothed to another man.”
 
There was a sudden clamour in the assembly hall and the nobles now heard this surprising news. Vizier Ay had just made his proposal to the queen but this sudden rejection was a shock to everyone. Everyone except the vizier himself, it appeared.
 
He bowed, his silk adornments dropping low.
 
Vizier Ay: “That is regrettable for me, but happy news for this would-be suitor! Yet, I shall still offer up myself as potential husband, before the court, in case these betrothal falls through. After all, marriage to foreign men is always a great risk.”
 
More clamour as they learnt their new king would be a foreigner.
 
Vizier Ay: “The road from Hattusa to Thebes is long and treacherous.”
 
More shock that the husband was to be a Hattusan!
 
But to Ankhesenamun, it was proof that she was right all along. He did know of her Hattusan prince and his words suggested he planned to have the man killed. She hoped the general could find her prince and keep him safe.
 
No news was good news. So long as no news came, then the prince was alive and on his way. She closed her eyes in further prayer. It seemed to be all she did these days.
 
 
The inn was quiet and the guests few. Zannanza was surprised by that, but he guessed his new patron may have paid the innkeeper to turn all suspicious guests away.
 
The prince and the soldiers sat at a table, drinking happily. Zannanza listened to their exciting stories of African cultures that the prince could only dream of. Great battles, powerful enemies and wonderous treasures. They talked of the gods, the pharaohs and the Nile. They seemed to love this river, he noted.
 
One by one, the soldiers retired to bed until he and Horemheb were the last to leave the table and head up the stairs.
 
Zannanza: “Thank you, good general. You are a fine man and I expect we, my new wife and I, will reward you handsomely!”
 
Horemheb: “I do everything in service to Egypt, Prince Zannanza. I find you to be a good and honest man, like none I have met in recent years.”
 
Zannanza opened the door to his room and stepped in, swaying from the alcohol.
 
Zannanza: “Thank you, general!”
 
Horemheb closed the door behind them.
 
Horemheb: “It wasn’t a compliment.”
 
His mighty hands wrapped around the young man’s neck and his thumbs pressed on the apple of his throat. The boy squirmed, struggled and kicked but he could make no more noise than a croak as he gasped.
 
It didn’t take long.
 
Zannanza’s body fell to the floor, dead. The general drew a breath, calming his nerves and pushing away his remorse. The boy was a nice and good, it was true, but that was not the makings of a strong leader. Egypt now needed a man of true power and authority after the lunacy inflicted upon it by the Aten-worshippers.
 
He dragged Zannanza into the bed and threw blankets, messily, over his body. He straightened the things he had knocked to the floor, then he purposefully knocked more things over, closer to the bed. It had to appear that he was murdered in bed. This would keep Horemheb in the clear.
 
Most crucially, he had had to do the deed himself. Had he allowed Ay’s men to perform the act, they would have returned with news of the prince’s death and Ay would wed the queen. So long as there was no news to Egypt, then he could return quickly and wed her himself.
 
He quietly closed the door behind him and went to his own room. One of the soldiers would find the body in the night, when he checked upon the prince, and they would return to Thebes themselves with the news. He would be innocent, of course, and the queen would surely agree to wed him, as the only viable option against Ay.
 
He lay on his bed and thought of the beauty of the young woman. He remembered the taste of her lips, how deeply he treasured that moment. The feeling of her breasts against his chest, the arch of her back… he groaned just thinking of her.
 
Soon he would be pharaoh, leader of Egypt and he would bed the girl every night.
 
 
Horemheb returned to Thebes with a feeling as though he had just conquered Hattusa itself.
 
He swelled with anticipation at what was to come. Even now, as he rode towards the palace where she awaited, he felt her little body in his grip. He salivated at the thought of her and had to snap his attention back to reality as he entered the building.
 
But as he approached the throne room, he sensed something was off. More soldiers than usual lined the passages and, as he went, several followed him.
 
When he finally reached the grand hall where the beautiful Ankhesenamun was sat, beside her, sat in the throne for the pharaoh, was Ay himself. The general ground his teeth.
 
King Ay: “Welcome back, general! We don’t know what clandestine mission you were sent on, but it is good to have our finest hero returned to us!”
 
Ay rose from the throne.
 
King Ay: “We received word that, tragically, a bandit murdered the poor Hattusan prince! With that death, it was affirmed that I should take his place as husband to our fair queen. It is a shame you were not here to enjoy the ceremony! You may even have been considered for the role of king, had you been available. Such bad luck.”
 
Horemheb snorted, barely containing his fury. He had been outsmarted. There must have been spies somewhere, watching the whole thing. He wanted to bellow and scream but he contained himself. He looked at Ankhesenamun. She was miserable, unhappy and despondent.
 
Horemheb: “What have I done?”

19744
Site Admin
19744

PostOct 04, 2019#99

THE GAMBIT, PART 1: OPPORTUNITY KNOCKS

The Terminus system (capital of the Terminus SECTOR, which contains many star systems controlled by the High Imperial Remnant) is a barren place, with a desolate planet not suitable for heavy colonization but used for weapons testing and imprisonment of undesirables, plus not one but three extensive asteroid belts.

Most activity in the system goes on around the large space station that is Terminus HQ. However, a new structure has recently been built in the system: a giant asteroid had been tugged from the nearest belt and nanite clouds released upon it, remaking it into an ultrasecure vault, hovering in the void.

Pollos: "Why Qemik thinks it's a good idea to store the sector treasury away from the HQ station, I can't figure."

Navitatex Qemik, de facto governor of the Terminus sector in lieu of Proconsul Kim's lackadaisical incompetence, recently issued an order that the bulk of the Remnant's liquid assets be gathered from across the sector to be stored in the security of the capital system, out on the very edge of the galaxy. What was a bit surprising was his decision to erect a vault separate from the ultrasecure HQ station, citing that the traffic accessing the vault would compromise HQ's security.

Lieutenant: "Piracy success rates have gone down significantly since its construction, captain."

Pollos: "Don't tell me the obvious, especially when it's depressing!"

The corrupt Navitatex of the ship Void's Edge, Pollos has long made a killing accepting bribes from pirates to conveniently leave Remnant depots open to raids. But with the depots largely emptied into the one vault, his profits are going way down.

Pollos: "But now he's going off to negotiate with those dragon-men, whaddya call 'em again?"

There is no response, and after a second, Pollos turns a steely gaze on the lieutenant.

Pollos: "Well?"

Lieutenant: "Sorry, sir, I was trying to, er, obey your previous order."

Pollos: "It's not obvious, you cheeky blighter. And it's certainly not depressing! Out with it!"

Lieutenant: Uh, yes, sir. Sorry, sir. Derkesthai."

Pollos: "Gesundheit."

Lieutenant: "We're members of a formerly multiversal empire, why do you use the dialect of a single language on a single world? That wasn't a sneeze anyway, that's the dragon-men's name: Derkesthai."

Pollos drums his fingers on his command chair's armrest, not caring. His eyes are focused intently on the holographic feed from the Terminus capital, where the massive battlecruiser Scion of Divinity was streaking to the edge of the system at high speeds. Qemik is aboard his flagship, of course, and given the high danger and risks involved in opening diplomatic relations with a former enemy, it stands to reason that he is taking his practically invincible flagship along.

Pollos: "But that leaves your precious vault wide open, Qemik."

Lieutenant: "Beg pardon, sir?"

Pollos: "Just thinking out loud."

Though there are plenty of Quinquereme-class capital ships stationed at HQ, Pollos knows their sentry patterns. Without the Scion of Divinity's overpowering presence, the vault is ripe for the picking. On the holographic display, the massive battleship vanishes as it engages its FTL drive. Pollos smiles tightly.

Pollos: "Now my treasury will be getting fuller, if that mangy cat and his crew are at all competent..."

39819
Site Admin
39819

Sinister Politics

PostOct 05, 2019#100

A breeze blew down the corridor to the wives’ rooms. Torches burnt in their holsters and the patrolling guards would relight them whenever they wandered past. The night was dark and full of terrors.
 
And by terrors, I mean ghosts.
 
Unfortunately, none of them were very malevolent or intimidating and none of them were of truly important people. One ghost admitted he was the gardener from a few generations ago. Another ghost said she was one of the cook’s helpers. Another of the ghosts was a random thief that managed to get himself flambéed by a well-placed fire trap.
 
There were also hundreds of ghost cats.
 
One good thing there was that they couldn’t pee or shit on everything. So, no little ghost poops to step on.
 
Their mewls had a hollow timbre to them, which would send creeps down the spine when they were ‘singing’. They were always trying to steal the body heat of those still living too. It was awful to be spoken up with a freezing cold lump under the blankets.
 
Tey tried to shove the ghost cat away, but her legs passed straight through the wretched beast. Weren’t there any ghost cat busters out there?
 
Tey slipped from the bed. The ghost cat complained over the loss of heat and rolled onto his belly for a rub. Tey ignored him and went to the bowl of water to give her face a quick wash. She had forgotten to wash her makeup off from the night before.
 
She hadn’t worn makeup in years and she felt she was very rusty at it. But the pressure was on. She now had a rival. The young and very pretty Ankhesenamun, second wife of the newly appointed pharaoh. The girl was sweet, if dour, but she was also young and had the natural beauty of youth to draw the attention of Ay. Tey felt hideous when stood in comparison to the girl. She had over a decade on her and it showed.
 
Nicer clothes, pretty makeup, expensive jewellery. The girl had no interest in any of these things, and yet Tey still felt like the inferior beauty.
 
Ay was eager to converse with Ankesenamun, constantly trying to win the girl over, to the exclusion of his old, tired wife. At least she saw it that way, she ignored him when he told her she was his true love. If that was true, why did he have a second wife. It may have been his key to the throne, but why hadn’t he sent her to the harem yet? He wanted the girl to love him, she was certain of it. Tey splashed more water on her face. She wanted to throw the bowl across the room, but that wasn’t going to help anybody.
 
She opened the door to her room to peek outside. Nobody was about that this hour, not even one of the patrols. Only ghosts. One ghost, who happened to be floating by, gave her a wave and sheepish grin. Looking at him, she guessed he was probably a former slave. The crushed skull, the result of a falling rock. He may have been here when the palace was first constructed.
 
Tey: “Hey ghost.”
 
Builder Ghost: “Me, ma’am?”
 
Tey: “Do you see any oth—”
 
She stopped and looked around. There were a lot of ghosts about actually.
 
Tey: “Yes you. Can you… touch other ghosts?”
 
The ghost man looked horrified.
 
Builder Ghost: “I’m not that kind of ghost, ma’am!”
 
Tey: “I don’t want you to touch girl ghosts!”
 
The builder looked even more shocked.
 
Tey: “I want you to remove this damn ghost cat from my bed!”
 
The former slave sighed with relief and nodded slowly.
 
Builder Ghost: “Yes, yes, I can help you with that my lady.”
 
Tey stepped aside the builder looked at her and the door.
 
Builder Ghost: “How courteous of you!”
 
She remembered he could have walked straight through it, and her. The ghost floated across the room towards the cat.
 
Builder Ghost: “Here, puss, puss.”
 
The ghost-cat trilled its hollow mew.
 
Builder Ghost: “There’s a good boy, yes he is!”
 
Tey: “Have you been haunting these halls for many years, ghost?”
 
The builder glanced up, surprised at the civil question.
 
Builder Ghost: “I have, ma’am! I’m not really sure why I didn’t pass on. They say ghosts are here because of unfinished business, but the only thing I left unfinished was this building!”
 
Tey: “It seems pretty finished to me!”
 
Builder Ghost: “Ah, yes, well, you see. You probably won’t even notice it. Nobody else ever has. There’s a single brick missing. Right up at the very top of the throne room, in the back corner. There’s a brick missing. You won’t see it, because it’s normally so dark up there. But that’s what done me in. I must have put it in loose. I got down from my ladders and WHAM!”
 
She jumped.
 
Builder Ghost: “Game over, Jazz.”
 
Tey:Jazz? Your name is Jazz? That’s peculiar.”
 
Jazz: “Perfectly common name in my time!”
 
Tey: “Not sure I believe that, but I’m not very… educated, I admit.”
 
Jazz: “I did hear tell, ma’am. You and your husband were born a commoner?”
 
Tey: “That’s right. Not a slave, mind. Not like you. What are you by the way?”
 
Jazz shrugged.
 
Jazz: “A ghost, I think. I could be a poltergeist or something, but I’m not sure what the difference is.”
 
Tey: “I meant who are your people?”
 
Jazz: “Well, my dad’s name was Jazz and my—”
 
Tey: “Your race, man! Your lineage!”
 
Jazz: “Ooooooh. My grandparents were taken as slaves in Canaan. I was born just down the road, though.”
 
Tey: “Canaanites. I do detest your people.”
 
Jazz looked down at the cat in his arms, as though it were his only friend.
 
Tey: “Nothing personal. But you have to consider that you slaves often take the jobs of us, hard-working, common people!”
 
Jazz: “All due respect, ma’am, but that’s hardly our fault. Blame the masters!”
 
Tey: “Fair point. Sorry, Jazz. Thank you for dealing with that little bugger.”
 
Jazz floated towards the door with the ghost-cat in his arms. The cat peered at Tey from over his shoulder, with big ghostly eyes.
 
Jazz: “I saw your daughter earlier this evening, by the way.”
 
Tey: “Oh? On her way to bed, I suspect?”
 
Jazz: “Oh, no. She was meeting that young man from the army.”
 
Tey’s “mummy-senses” were suddenly on fire.
 
Tey: “What man from the army!?”
 
Jazz looked back at her, now realising he might have landed the poor girl into a pot of trouble.
 
Jazz: “Nothing to worry about, ma’am! They meet quite often!”
 
Tey: “That’s even worse!!”
 
Jazz: “They’re not--! I mean, I don’t think they’re… They seem to be good friends. They talk for hours.”
 
Tey: “Who. Is. He?”
 
Jazz: “I think he’s a tactician…”
 
Jazz saw the fury within Tey’s eyes.
 
Jazz: “Uh, I have to go now! There’s some nice corridors that could use a good, uh, spooking. Bye now!”
 
Tey marched out after him.
 
Jazz: “I’m pretty sure I can spook the corridors by myself, ma’am.”
 
Tey: “I’m not following you, fool, I’m going to find my idiot child.”
 
Jazz: “Ah, that would make sense.”
 
Tey tried to push past him but fell through him. She then straightened herself, trying to muster a little dignity back, and started down the corridor.
 
Jazz: “Do you need help?”
 
Tey: “No.”
 
A door opened to her side and Tey leapt into the air in fright.
 
Ankhesenamun: “Oh sorry! I didn’t mean to scare you!”
 
Tey’s hairs were all on end and she had to smoother her own fear as she saw the girl. She appeared haggard thanks to sleep deprivation.
 
Tey: “It’s fine. Why are you awake?”
 
Ankhesenamun looked down at the ground.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I can’t sleep.”
 
Tey: “The cats?”
 
Ankhesenamun: “What?”
 
Tey: “You can’t sleep because of the cats? They keep waking me up too.”
 
Ankhesenamun: “Oh, no. Not them. It doesn’t matter. Sorry I bothered you, I just heard some noises.”
 
Tey: “It’s Jazz.”
 
Ankhesenamun: “Jazz? Music?”
 
Jazz: “No, no! She means me!”
 
Tey jumped again and spun her head to glare at the ghost, who had appeared behind her. He was still holding ghost-cat, who was very exciting to have two living bodies before him.
 
Ankhesenamun shrank behind her door a little, not that it would make any difference to a ghost.
 
Ankhesenamun: “Sorry, sorry. I didn’t mean to bother anyone.”
 
Tey: “Go to sleep then.”
 
She turned and started down the corridor again but overheard the girl speak to Jazz;
 
Ankhesenamun: “Where is she going so late at night?”
 
Jazz: “To find her daughter. She’s been seen with boys!”
 
Ankhesenamun: “Oh dear.”
 
Tey tried to ignore them, and the gossipy tone of Ankhesenamun in particular, as she strode down the corridor. She soon found the children’s chambers. Her daughter, of course, was no child - she was even one year older than Ankhesenamun – but she was still placed in these chambers so that Tey could keep an eye on the troublemaker. The girl had a penchant for doing things that Tey did not want her to do. Including talking with boys, especially military boys.
 
Tey hammered on her daughter’s door.
 
There was no answer.
 
Tey pushed the door open and found an empty bed.
 
Tey: “I might have known.”
 
She marched, rapidly, back to the wives’ corridor where she found Jazz petting ghost-cat and still gossiping with Ankhesenamun.
 
Tey: “Where is she!?”
 
Jazz: “Um…”
 
Tey: “Where did you see her last?”
 
 
Mutnedjmet got up and bowed her head to the tactician. He was tall and handsome, and over a decade her senior. She liked that. She had no time for boys, only men. He, however, was not her love interest but a means by which she might procure one. A great one.
 
Mutnedjmet: “Goodbye, Paramesse!”
 
The man bowed, even more deeply, in return. He wore expensive clothes, but they were very sombre and practical with little ornamentation. His hair was turning grey at the temples and his beard was already full-blown salt-and-pepper. He always wore a particular fragrance of musk that got her excited to be in his company.
 
Paramesse: “Goodbyw, Mutt.”
 
She pointed a long-nailed, and highly decorated, finger at him.
 
Mutnedjmet: “Don’t call me that!”
 
He laughed, but it was a very controlled, low rumble that seemed to suggest he was allowing himself to be amused. He turned and walked away. He had a firm saunter to his movements, even his walk, that was so assured and confident that nothing bad would ever happen to him.
 
Mutnedjmet wiggles her fingers in excitement as she turned and skipped down the street. She just right next to the palace, she wouldn’t dare go too far so late at night, but even as close as she was, she felt like she was on a daring escape mission. Defying her overbearing mother and engaging some in illicit night-time activities. Not that she was actually doing much, aside from gossiping with her best friend.
 
She started humming to herself as she entered palace grounds and eyed the stoic, silent guards. They were watching her, without watching her. She often wondered what they thought of the royal family and their comings and goings. Were they ever judgemental? Did they ever laugh at things going on?
 
Mutnedjmet’s father, Ay, was the son of a powerful courtier but her mother, Tey, was daughter of a Priest of Mout. This particular god was essentially known as “The Mother” and considered to be the god that birthed the planet Earth. Importantly to Mutnedjmet, it is where he name derived.
 
Mout’s son, Khonsu, was high in the sky this night. She wondered if Khonsu’s father, Amun, could sleep along with his city. She saw some guards patrolling the streets in the distance. They were not like the stoic palace guards, so she could them laughing and joking.
 
Despite the more humble origins of her mother, Mutnedjmet took after her father in her taste for fineries, especially silks. Her dress was lovely, with patterns of peacocks all over it and she wore a silk bandana that held her well-oiled hair in place. Her nails were very long, manicured and decorated, not just with paint, but also tiny gems that glittered in the fiery torchlight.
 
As she neared the palace’s side-door, she overheard voices from within. She disposed of all grace and flung herself behind a statue. Tey, her mother, stormed out of the palace with several guards in tow. Mutnedjmet bit her lip and watched them troop past with the old lady at the head of the parade, like a generalissmo.
 
Once the danger seemed to be passed, she slipped back into the building and skipped down the corridors, very pleased with her mischief. She came to her room but heard some voices further away. Curiosity got the better of her and she peered around the corner to inspect. There she saw her father’s second, and prettier, wife, Ankhesenamun. She was quietly talking with one of the ghosts, a grotesque figure with his head caved in by a brick.
 
Ankhesenamun: “I don’t know what I will do, Jazz. I cannot love him, but I am afraid of what he will do to me if I don’t, at least, pretend to.”
 
Mutnedjmet was initially angry that the girl would dare not love her father. But she had to admit, she held no love for him either, only she didn’t have to sleep with him.
 
Jazz: “Can you run away?”
 
Ankhesenamun: “He would find me, and then he would undoubtedly have me murdered. Or even executed as a traitor to Egypt. He found my secret paramour and killed him and he killed my husband and my…”
 
She broke down and started to cry.
 
Mutnedjmet became aware that she was intruding on a very private moment and, despite her burning curiosity, she decided she should show some respect for the poor girl.
 
She realised that Ankhesenamun did not have the same spunk that she, Mutnedjmet, had. She was cowardly, shy and afraid. She speculated it was because her husband had been a weak man too. Weak men held no appeal for Mutnedjmet and, as she closed her door and removed her ornaments, she thought of her soon to be lover. His strong physique and manly presence! She tittered to herself as she jumped on the bed and tossed the bedsheets over herself haphazardly. The future, for Mutnedjmet, was going to be explosive!
 
 
A state dinner was an important affair, where the elite politicians and courtiers could mingle with the royal family. During the afterparty, the pharaoh himself, stylised as Kheperkheperure when king, was sipping wine with a few guests.
 
Ay: “I have been considering who shall succeed me as pharaoh.”
 
The men all around him were suddenly on alert, but desperately trying not to reveal their excitement.
 
Ay: “Of course, I think it is only natural that a pharaoh should be succeeded by his own progeny.”
 
The men all deflated.
 
It was expected, but they all lived in that brief flickering moment of hope.
 
Ay: “Son!”
 
They all turned and saw the back of man.
 
Ay’s finger tapped irritably on his goblet.
 
Ay: “Nakhtmin!”
 
The man slowly turned, a piece of bread sticking out of his mouth. Ay didn’t bother to hide his groan. Nakhtmin pointed at himself.
 
Ay: “Is anyone else here called Nakhtmin!?”
 
There was a faint voice from the back of the room that was stifled by his friend.
 
Ay: “Come here, Nakhtmin. Say hello to your future subjects.”
 
Nakhtmin obediently trotted over. When he reached them, Ay snatched the bread from his limp mouth.
 
Ay: “Introduce yourself.”
 
Nakhtmin looked at the other men with Ay.
 
Nakhtmin: “Hi.”
 
The men all glance at each other.
 
Ay realises, far too late, that he should have been educating the idiot child rather than focusing on his own ambitions so much. He wondered if there was some way to jolt his brain into action, so late in development. Nakhtmin was already past thirty and had done nothing with his life.
 
Ay: “Where is your wife, Nakhtmin?”
 
The man shrugged.
 
Nakhtmin: “In here somewhere.”
 
Ay looked around and finally spotted her. She was with another politician and appeared to be getting very, very friendly. Tey might have rushed over there and beat the woman to death with a parchment of papyrus, but Ay’s eyes glowed with pride. That was a woman who knew how to earn power. Hopefully she would get pregnant with someone’s baby and give him an heir, even if it was one not of true blood, because his own idiot son was never going to be capable.
 
Sauda was a princess of Sheba, otherwise known as Ethiopia, and came to Nakhtmin recently to secure a non-aggression pact with Seba, who lay to the south-east of Egypt and next to Nubia. She was smart, insightful, cunning – everything Ay could want in a successor.
 
She was, however, also keen on prying into his business too. Poking around his origins, his rise to power and his work under previous pharaohs. He wasn’t sure why. Sheba would have no interest in such machinations, surely? The one thing that really concerned him was her interest in the ancient pyramid of Giza where he had once used the magic aura to…
 
He sucked on his teeth and turned his head back to his audience, and stupid son.
 
Ay: “You should probably go and find her, Nakhtmin. Make sure she isn’t bored.”
 
Nakhtmin: “I dunno how I’m supposed to do that. I’m bored!”
 
Ay narrowed his eyes at his son. The man was too stupid to even know when he was in danger of being battered by his father. Clearly Tey had been too soft with the child, not that she did much to raise him either. Tey had been wet nurse to Nefertiti shortly after Ay and Tey were married and she bore Nakhtmin. Tey spent all her time taking care of Nefertiti and her sisters that she had no time for her own child.
 
Mutnedjmet had come decades later and had fallen upon them by complete surprise. They barely had time for sex, leading such busy political lives, so one quiet night they had conceived the wonder baby. Tey had been more involved this time around, which meant Mutnedjmet was a far superior child to the first. It also meant that Mutnedjmet had developed a bad attitude and especially she took delight in provoking her mother. Ay didn’t mind much, he thought it was a good way for her to use her brain in outsmarting her mother, but he did worry what she might get up to.
 
Ay gave Nakhtmin a shove in the direction of Sauda and resumed talking with the elites before him.
 
 
Mutnedjmet: “Come on, Paramesse! Hurry!”
 
The gentleman strode towards the temple without changing his pace, despite the eagerness of his young friend. Bringing people together was a nice thing, but getting himself a guaranteed promotion in the process was all the better. Although Mutnedjmet asserted she knew exactly what she was getting into, and displayed not a single sign of remorse, Paramesse did wonder. He tried not to feel too guilty about using her to further his own ambition, though he had always been open and honest about everything with her from the beginning. He wasn’t sure if he could have been any clearer on the matter, so he tried to accept that she was smarter than her youth and exuberance would suggest.
 
Unlike most Egyptians, Paramesse had ventured out of Egypt thanks to his role in the military. He had witnessed other cultures and how they handled such things as marriage, sex and divorce. Foreigners valued such a thing as ‘virginity’, which came as quite a surprise to Paramesse. To the men and women of Egypt, this wasn’t a consideration and most of them were promiscuous enough to have sex as soon as they were able to find someone to do it with – married or not. There were contraceptives available to women and abortions, should she become pregnant with an unwanted foetus. Marriage was also simple. Two people agreed to marry, signed a contract and it was done. Should they desire to end it, divorce was easily achieved and the wife would receive half of the attained assets so she wasn’t left destitute. He hoped it wouldn’t come to any of these problems, but at least Mutnedjmet wouldn’t be bound by silly rules should she decide she made a mistake.
 
The most peculiar thing that Paramesse had ever come across were ‘prostitutes’. Women who were paid for sex. He couldn’t think of why a man would need to pay a woman to have sex with him if there were plenty of women willing to have sex with him for free. He assumed it was something to do with rules. Rules on sex. He could hardly understand such an idea.
 
Luckily, Mutnedjmet wanted her handsome, strong man and it served her whim to piss of her parents. There was nothing more complicated for her, though he hoped her parents wouldn’t go too far in their vengeance for her actions.
 
The chapel, attached to the temple, was open. Inside were statues of Hathor, the god of sex and love. At the far end was another statue, this time to the god Isis. Isis represented marriage.
 
The priest was ready to bind the two and write up the contract on a sheet of papyrus.
 
Stood with the priest was Mutnedjmet’s new husband; Horemheb.
 
The general grinned as he saw his young fiancé approach, but Paramesse wasn’t certain if he was smiling at her, or the prospect of stealing his rival’s daughter.
 
 
In the Hittite Empire, King Suppiluliuma I was finally ready. Ready to enact his vengeance upon the cruel and insidious Egyptians that had lured and murdered his precious son. The boy was a fool, certainly, but he was a beautiful soul and one that the old man cherished.
 
He had known the letter was a trap but he allowed Zannanza’s naivety to warp his judgement. He would now allow this crime to go unpunished. He would smash Egypt into the dirt. His mighty army was gathered and, together with his dozen other sons, they marched into the Levant. They tackled the sparse Egyptian defenders and barged their way into Canaan.
 
Victory came with little cost and they took many slaves, both Canaanites and Egyptians. Hattusa swelled with slaves and diplomatic captives, who they could trade for gold.
 
However, something seemed to be wrong. The truth became apparent much too late. Canaan was rife with an unnatural plague. It was unknown to any of the doctors and mages claimed they sensed an air of magic to the disease. Many tried to flee the city, only to spread the contagion to other cities of the empire. Hattusans fell in droves, like wheat cut down by the scythe. Many of the kings own sons perished and, finally, Suppiluliuma I caught the illness.
 
As he lay dying, he questioned his actions in seeking vengeance. Had he let it go, the plague would never have reached Hattusa and his sons would all be alive. Instead of losing just one, he had now lost many. His younger sons were now in line to become king, rather than those he had groomed for the roll. They would have to deal with a weakened city, a destabilised empire and an angry, dying populace. He envisioned that his empire would become divided and split and not be strong enough to maintain its own integrity. He was certain that this plague was the beginning of the end for the Hittite Empire.
 
Had he, and his people, been cursed by the Egyptian Gods? No, he was certain, this was not the work of gods. This was the work of evil men.
 
 
Ay: “What are you doing out there?”
 
There was silence.
 
Ay: “I know you’re there. You are not nearly so stealthy as you think you are.”
 
A moment followed and Ay was sure she was weighing up her choices. Ultimately the ajar door was pushed open with a creak and his son’s wife poked her head inside. Her skin was so brown, it was almost black. Yet her hair was styled as with most Egyptian women, in neat cornrows, with a delicate gold tiara.
 
Ay: “I would love to know what you thought you’d find in here, Sauda.”
 
He was seated in the room he considered a study. It was where he stamped and sealed official documents, mostly executions for criminals and permissions for new construction. Egypt was in a perpetual state of construction. Every city was constantly expanding with bigger, better buildings. Most of them were mud huts for the commoners, but there were many temples and tombs always in development. His own tomb was being worked on too. He had had his predecessor, Tutankhamun buried in a small plot and, instead, he would use the plot designed for poor Tut as his own. It just had to be expanded and the murals designed.
 
Sauda had the decency to appear shy and uncertain, though he knew she was acting. He could act too.
 
Ay: “My dear! There is no need to be so shy with me!”
 
He beamed at her sweetly. He had learnt that smile many years ago. He had practised it over and over until he knew he could melt hearts with it. She fell for it and slinked into the room.
 
Sauda: “I confess, I’m… curious about you.”
 
Or not. She was trying to play him now. She hadn’t done enough research if she thought he was going to be unfaithful to Tey. Fidelity was the most important component of an Egyptian marriage and he wasn’t going to let a warm vagina ruin his marriage.
 
He looked down at his papers, feigning disinterest so that she might get the message.
 
Ay: “Indeed. What can I do for you?”
 
He heard a small tut of annoyance but held back the amused smirk. She approached the desk.
 
Sauda: “I am interested in… magic.”
 
Ay looked up again and wore a bright and open expression on his lined face.
 
Ay: “Well, who isn’t interested in magic, hum? It can do wonders for anyone who can wield it!”
 
Sauda: “In Sheba, we have no little magic. Nobody practices the craft. But here, in Egypt, I know you have a great well of the magical force!”
 
Ay: “Some call it a well. Someone even called it a nexus once. Not sure what that really means. But either way, yes. It ebbs from the ancient Pyramid of Giza. The magical force, as you put it, drifts through the land from there.”
 
He wiggled his fingers like aether swimming over Egypt.
 
Ay: “If you want lessons, I’m sure we can arrange it.”
 
Sauda: “From you?”
 
Ay paused.
 
Ay: “What makes you think I can do magic, Sauda?”
 
She wore a stony face. It was the face worn in that card game everyone and their mother seemed to play. Poke Her. Why it was called that, he had no idea.
 
Sauda: “Hearsay.”
 
Ay: “Well, if you were to listen to every rumour about me, I’m probably a deity, the father of over a hundred illegitimate children across Thebes alone and I worship devil geese in the cellars.”
 
Sauda gave a giggle but it was far too hollow to be genuine. He was almost tempted to give her genuine lessons in acting, it would improve her political game to get a genuine-sounding giggle. Many men liked to think they were funny, so a good giggle was an ambitious woman’s greatest asset in this political world.
 
Sauda: “But, I’m sure you must know something. They say that it was you who helped give birth to the great Aten that was worshipped by your predecessors.”
 
Someone had been talking after all. He wasn’t sure who it could be. He thought he had murdered them all.
 
He did notice that his face had dropped involuntarily and that was as good as openly admitting he was guilty as fuck to a woman like this. There would be no masking it, she had seen it. He could just deny it anyway and she would continue to coyly pry into his business until, one day, he would have to have her cut served on a platter. However, he recognised her skill and ambition and he was bound to give him an heir sooner or later, whoever the father happened to be.
 
He might value his own fidelity, but he was blazingly grateful that she did not. Should his son have been capable of getting it up enough to give her a child, the baby probably would have been another brainless moron that drooled on himself at thirty-seven years of age. Just because the grandchild didn’t share his blood was irrelevant, nobody would ever know that and appearances were far more important than truth.
 
He drummed his fingers on the wooden desk.
 
Ay: “What, exactly, do you want? You say you want to know about magic, but what use will that be to you? It’s not learning magic you want, or you’d have taken my first offer. Now you talk of my dabbling in magic and the god Aten. What do you actually want? Come clean with me and we may strike a deal.”
 
Sauda was clearly taken aback by the frankness of the pharaoh and seemed uncertain whether to oblige him or continue her ruse in some way.
 
She then leaned on the table. Her dress was cut so that the view he was suddenly granted went straight down her cleavage. He might have thought she was trying to seduce him again, but her face was intense and burning with passion.
 
Sauda: “You brought about the elevation of a god, Ay. I want to know how you did it!”
 
Ay was amused that she suddenly felt she was on first-name basis with the King of Egypt. But he liked her enough to allow it. For now.
 
Ay: “But why? What does it matter? Aten is gone now. The old gods returned to power.”
 
He leant back in his chair and shrugged his shoulders apathetically.
 
Sauda: “I want to do it again.”
 
Ay: “You want Aten to return?”
 
Sauda: “No! Not Aten! Another!”
 
Ay: “Who? Why?”
 
Sauda: “I won’t tell you unless you tell me what I need to know.”
 
Ay drummed his fingers on the table again. Repeatedly.
 
He felt as though he had been seduced by this woman, but it wasn’t her sex he wanted. He wanted her conspiracy. All his life he had been a conspirator of one form or another. Whether it was a conspirator to the atrocities in elevating Aten, or the murder of his predecessors, the manoeuvring to make Ankhesenamun his wife, or manipulating Horemheb out of power. He was always causing some mischief. But now, there was nothing to do. He had won. All enemies defeated. This woman embodied everything he sought when he was her age and he longed to be a part of that thrilling life again.
 
He smiled.
 
Ay: “No.”
 
Sauda: “You don’t trust me?”
 
Ay: “Of course not! I’m not a moron, like your husband! The apple fell very, very far from the tree with that one.”
 
Sauda: “That’s your son, you’re talking about…”
 
Ay: “I know. The little dipshit can languish in his petty little frivolities. I don’t care. Why are you surprised I would admit this? In front of you, I see no need to keep such a secret. You know he’s an inept moron, I know he’s an inept moron. Frankly dear, I hope you find someone else to keep your spirits up.”
 
She was shocked that he would approve of such actions, but realisation eventually swallowed her and she believed she had an ally in this political world after all.
 
Sauda: “If you’re willing to be so candid with me, and want me to be candid with you, why won’t you tell me what I want to know?”
 
Ay leant his elbows upon the desk top and folded his fingers beneath his chin as he tried to compose his next words carefully. She sat upon the desk, her skinny body clearly visible beneath the tight silk she had chosen to wear. He admired how much effort she had gone to in her attempts to seduce him, even if there had been no hope of it.
 
Ay: “Murder is easy. To snuff out a life is… trivial, to me. After all, what does it matter? They go on to Osiris, so why should I hold any qualms of ending them? But one of the hardest murders I had to commit was against my wife.”
 
Sauda: “Queen Tey!?”
 
Ay: “No, no. Never! I value her trust too much to betray it. I meant my new wife. Ankhesenamun.”
 
Sauda: “You mean that Hattusan prince? I thought it went quite well, in the end.”
 
Ay: “Of course not. I am referring to her stillborn babies.”
 
Sauda: “Oh…”
 
She did seem uncomfortable at that one, as he did.
 
Ay: “It wasn’t just an abortion. Medicine to cause that is easy. But it would have been detected. I had to use medicine that would kill the baby, after it was formed, so it would be born dead.”
 
He tapped his fingers, rather than drummed, as he admitted those words. He only ever spoke about his nefarious plots to his wife, who disapproved of many of them but opted to shoulder the burden of his crimes with him.
 
Sauda: “So you do have a heart.”
 
He grinned, though he wasn’t sure how genuine it appeared.
 
Ay: “Somewhere!”
 
Sauda: “But what does this have to do with Aten and the magic you used?”
 
Ay: “If I am willing to share this painful experience with you, but I am not willing to share that experience with you… imagine how much worse it could be than the murder of two, innocent babies…”
 
He did see her black skin turn a little whiter, as though a ghost crept upon her. There was a little hesitation within her, but she was young and still burning with passion for her ambitious goal of a new god rising.
 
Ay: “Are you certain of this? Just knowing what we did would turn the stomach of anyone with half-a-heart…”
 
Sauda: “I have wanted it my whole life. Gods should be commanded by humanity, not the other way around.”
 
Ay didn’t want to revisit that dark time, but just discussing the very topic was bringing back the smell of decaying bodies. Mountains and mountains of bodies. Naked men, women, children and, most importantly, babies. The greater the magic, the greater the sacrifice it required.
 
He cleared his throat, trying to distract himself from the horror that visited his mind. He wet his lips with trepidation.
 
Ay: “Fine. I shall teach you want you wish to know in time. First, you’ll need to learn some magic for yourself. How much of the scheme you want to perform yourself depends on how good at magic you become…”
 
She grinned. He had thought he had seen through all of her lies, tricks and entrapments and that she had been allowed to continue on as she had done with his blessing. But her smirk revealed that she had an ace up her sleeve that he had not seen coming.
 
She opened her palm and a ball of green fire lit up the room, casting her face into a sinister, sick glow.
 
Sauda: “Surprise.”
 
 
The funeral had been a long one. The pharaoh wanted it that way. The only people not in attendance were his daughter and her hated husband, Horemheb. Ay, still king, had now lost his idiot son. The boy was as dumb as a goat’s arsehole, but he was still his son and not old enough to have died.
 
Now he was in the burial hall alone, with his son in bandages – wrapped up warm and tight for the afterlife. Osiris had better be merciful with Nakhtmin, or, god or no, Ay would be down there soon enough with righteous, fatherly fury.
 
He heard footsteps behind him
 
He had become well acquainted with them in the past two years. His secret conspirator.
 
Ay: “Did you do this?”
 
Sauda: “Me? Kill Nakhtmin? Why would I do that?”
 
Her voice rebounded from the walls, doubling up.
 
Ay: “Because he was ugly? Because he was an idiot? Because he wouldn’t know your vagina from your nostril?”
 
Sauda sighed.
 
Sauda: “No I did not. I had a very comfortable position with Nakhtmin. His death is a frustration for me, actually. It puts me in a dangerous position.”
 
Ay: “I won’t dispense with you, if that’s what you’re afraid of?”
 
Sauda: “I’m more worried about who you’d marry me of to.”
 
Ay: “I wouldn’t marry you off to anyone. Unless you want to become my third wife? Not that that would mean anything. I only lie with Tey.”
 
Sauda laughed. Her fake laugh was much improved these days.
 
Sauda: “Not a bad offer, honestly.”
 
Ay: “Oh? You’ve had another?”
 
Sauda: “Yes. The thing is, I have all I need from you and you know too much about me and my plans.”
 
Ay: “Oh… clever girl.”
 
Sauda smiled sweetly. It was his own smile on her lips.
 
Sauda: “I learnt from the very best. At least you’ll be reunited with your son.”
 
She wasted no more time as the room was suddenly blasted with a torrent of magic that ripped the old king into shreds. He wouldn’t have felt anything, she owed him that much.
 
 
The funeral had not even happened.
 
Pharaoh Kheperkheperure, Ay, was denounced as a worshipper of the false idol Aten. The statues dedicated to him, and his family, were broken and dismantled in their droves. The remains of his body were too few to desecrate, but every reference to him was painstakingly scrubbed from the records. Details were erased and the new pharaoh was determined to ensure that the bastard was lost to all time.
 
By extension, he rounded his religious fury upon Akhenaten, only referring to him by his original name of Amenhotep IV whenever necessary, as well as Nefertiti. It was easiest to erase Smenkare, Meriaten, since she had been pharaoh for such a short reign. The settlement of Amarna, the home of Aten, was abandoned at last, with the pharaoh forcing people out of their homes there and smashing most of the city to rubble.
 
The only one to be spared was the young King Tut. He had been wise enough to see the return to the old gods and, he had to admit, the people loved him too much for him to deface the boy’s legacy.
 
Now, Pharaoh Horemheb sat upon the throne of Egypt. He got there with zero complaints from adversaries. Aside from everyone now too afraid to become pharaoh, Horemheb had a legitimate claim; his wife was daughter to the deceased pharaoh and Ay’s intended heir was also dead. He had ensured Nakhtmin’s tomb was broken, destroyed and his body thrown in the Aegean Sea.
 
There were, however, several loose ends that he had to deal with. To do that, he instantly promoted his friend and advisor from the military, Paramesse, to vizier.
 
The biggest problem was Tey. She was very much infected with the disease that was Ay’s essence and he didn’t want her stink around his palace. Then there was the wife of Nakhtmin, the foreigner Sauda, who seemed to be extremely ambitious in her own right. There was also Ankhesenamun. He was surprised she was still alive, having expected Ay to have her murdered one night. He quietly thanked the gods that his love was still breathing. And then there was his own wife. Mutnedjmet may claim loyalty to him and even helped him murder her own father, but she was still spawn of the devil.
 
He wouldn’t be able to kill his wife, at least not for many years, he knew. His legitimacy rested with her, as his wife, and so he was stuck with her. He hated her. He hated her ugly face. He hated her behaviour, the way she always beautified herself and pranced around in expensive dressed. He hated the way she desperately clawed for his affections. He hated that Paramesse was her friend and kept begging the king to make children with her. As though he could ever touch such a rank creature.
 
Paramesse hinted that she might file for divorce should he not fulfil his duties to her, but Horemheb didn’t care. He would kill her first, if necessary.
 
He was hesitant to kill Sauda too. Although he was sure nobody in Egypt would register the loss, she was a princess of Sheba and they would come with questions. Fortunately, he was well aware that she had never even slept with her former husband and he wondered if she was like him; trapped in an unwelcome marriage. In that, he felt she would be more of an ally than enemy. He also heard a tale that she was the last person to meet with Ay when he was alive and her overtures of loyalty to him were intriguing.
 
Tey would have to die.
 
There was no doubt about it. She had to go, one way or another.
 
But what was Ankhesenamun?
 
He loved her dearly. Most would compare the girl with his wife and wonder at his choice, he knew that. His wife was more to the tastes of most men in Egypt, but he loved the shy, demure girl. He was trapped in eternal longing. He could not have her and he would not force her, that would not be the same. Worse still, Mutnedjmet had become aware of his feelings for Ankhesenamun and was growing increasingly annoying over it.
 
He wished he could ask Paramesse what to do, but his vizier was not in the habit of murdering his political rivals. He was happy to manipulate the law, manoeuvre people around and probe for opportunities, but he was not capable of criminal act. Horemheb hated that, but he adored the man. His only friend.
 
 
Fourteen years passed under the rule of Horemheb. People admired him as a protector of the old gods, and they took great relish in destroying all vestiges of the crazy Aten religion.
 
Tey, wife of the previous king, disappeared under mysterious circumstances. Some said she was locked within the tomb of her deceased husband when he last visited and was left inside. Others said she was thrown from the balcony of the palace.
 
Ankhesenamun, second wife of the king, was found dead in her chambers. She had taken poison to kill herself. At least that was the common belief, though many suspected she was forced to drink the poison and murdered by King Horemheb’s envious wife, Queen Mutnedjmet.
 
She lived on, even past her husband’s end. Yet she was eternally unhappy. Never did they produce a child and she grew bitter and spiteful ever since the death of her mother.
 
Sauda had been an odd ally to the king and often acted as a mysterious advisor when Paramesse was unable to provide the king of council that King Horemheb desired. Many thought the king would wed her and make her his second wife, but the king seemed unable to love any woman save the one that took her own life to escape him.
 
With no heirs, Horemheb designated who should become king after him. His choice was obvious to all, long before he declared it.
 
Paramesse rose to become Pharaoh of Egypt and donned the new royal name styled ‘Ramesses I’.

Read more posts (55 remaining)